Enjoy: Revisf Om

Enjoy Physical
Education amd Arts

Grade 7
Revisf;om
S" r" Jonlrasi and R. [.eonard
--;-:!
CONTEF{TS
SECTIONA
PHYSICAL EDI]CATION
Study area 1: Physical education
TOPIC
1 Human Body 1
2 Safefy and Health .......... 9

3 Aquatic Skills 18
4 Kids Athletics 26
Study area 2: Sport
TOPTC
5 Invasion Games 33
6 Target and Combat Games 39
7 Net Games 44
8 Striking Games 49
9 Adventure Games 55
10 Educational Gymnastics 63
Study 3: Mass displays

^rea
TOPIC
11 Music 70
t2 Background Art 75
13 Arena Acts 80
VISUAL AND PERFORMING ARTS

TOPTC
1 History of arts and culture 86

1.1 Music 86
1.2 Visual Arts 96
1.3 Theatre 104
1.4 Dance I09
III
The creative proress and perfrormance 1r3
,t
NIusic 113
)1 f isual Arts 118
Thea{re 123
2.4 Dance 127
3 Aesthetic values and appreciation r3l

J.i VIusic 131
Visuai,Arts 13s
na Theatre 139
3.Ll Dance 143
4.1 Mtisic 149

4.2 Visual Arts t55
4.3 Iheatre 160
4.4 Dance 163
5 Enterprisg skills.. ...'r.r..q.trrrt.r.r..r*e.r.rrtrritr*rrrtir.rtttr?i..!i.rr 168

5.1 Music 168
5.2 Visual Arts ....." 172
5.3 Theatre 176
5.4 Dance 180
SECTION{ B
TEST PAPER I r87
SECTTON C
ANSWERS FOR ]
Section A: Physical Education and Mass Displays 230

Visual and Perf'orming Arts 2{0
Section B y,fi6
l-1
fi
MI
\'l
Study area 1:
Physical education
Topic 1 Human Body
OBJECTIVES
Learners should be able to:
. distinguish body parts that store and transport food, air and blood
. explain the process of storing and transporting food, air and blood
' design a project that shows the processes by which human body parts store and
transport food, air and blood.
Introduction
The human body consists of very important organs. Thus, it is essential to keep and maintain
these organs healthy. Both external and internal body parts have important roles to play in
our everyday lives. Different body parts combine to make up different body systems such as
respiratory digestive and circulatory system. Knowledge and understanding of the structure
and functions of the body parts is essential when learning about the human body.
The human body

There are several body systems and they complement each other in the way they operate. The
functions of such systems are explained below.
1. Respiratory System for air transport

The process of respiration starts in the nose when air is inhaled. The air flows through the
pharynx and larynx which is in the throat though the trachea. From the trachea, air enters two
tubes known as the bronchi which sr-rpply lungs r,vith oxygen. At the end of the bronchi are
tiny air sacs (alveoli) which are responsible for gaseous exchange in the lungs.
Oxygen enters the blood streatn through the alveoli and carbon dioxide also exits the blood
through these alveoli. The lungs are responsible for getting rid of carbon dioxide which is a
waste product.
The respiratory organs and their functions
I.lasal Cavity i
Pharynx
larynx
Trachca
Broncli
Lmg
I
I
Diaphragm
Fig Ll Respirutory s.l'stent
The diagram above shou's the organs of the respiratory system. These work together in
ensurin,q that gaseous exchange occllrs srnoothll,'. fhe functions of these organs are explained
belor,r,;
idose
The nose is t'esponsible for provicling a Dassase of eir into ancl out of the body. The rnouth
can also serve this titnction at times. Hor.l'ever. breatiln-q lr1 through the nose is best. This is
because the nose contains hairs that filter dust particles.
Pharynx
It is a tubular intemal organ found behind the nasal cavity. This tube allou,s the passage of
air frorn the nasal cavitv iuto the trachea.
Larynx
it is connccted to the trachea. lts fr:nction is io control the Ilou, of air during breathing. The
plrarynr allolvs the passage of inhaiecl air ii'om the nose into thc Iarynx, the windpipe and
thcn the ir-rngs.
Trachea
It is aii c.xteitsiou of thc lalvl.': to the croncil. IL hcl1ls in the flou.,of trir to the bronchi rvhich
rrc conitcctcd to thc lunt:,.
Bronchi
Thesc are tlibes that crtenci il'orn ihc trachca tr; ihu llrnss. Thev allorv the air to flow into tlic'
i irn gs.
Lungs
It is a pair of spongy-like air-fllled internal organs located on either side of the chest.The left
and right lungs are connected to the bronchi. Their plrlpose is to supply oxygen into the body
and remove carbon dioxide. The lungs contract and expand rvhen breathing in and out.
Alveoli (air sacs)

The alveoli are tiny air sacs that are found at the end of the bronchus in the lungs. They help
in the exchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide between lungs and the blood stream. These air
sacs are suitable for gaseous exchange because they have thin walls and are inflatable.
2. Digestive System for transport and food storage

The digestion process starts in the mouth. When food is taken in through the mouth, it is tom
and chewed by the teeth in order to break it down into small pieces for easy swallowing.
Digestion is the process whereby food is broken down from large particles into small parlicles.
In the mouth, the tongue helps by pushing and rolling the chewed food as the saliva makes it
slippery.
From the mouth it moves into the stomach through the oesophagus. In the stomach the food
is stored for some time. Further digestion then takes place in the stomach with the help of
digestive juices which break down the food again. From the stomach the food moves into the
small intestines where the food is absorbed into the blood stream. The blood then delivers the
absorbed food to the rest of the body.
The diagram below illustrates the organs that make up the digestive system. These orqans
r.vork together in the digestion process.
Salivary glands
Mor-rth Oesophagus
Liver
Stomach
Gall bladder Perncreas
Small intestine
Large intestine
Appendix
Rectum Anus
Fig 1.2 Digestive Systent
Digestive system organs and functions
Mouth
This is an opening that allows the food into the body. It is found below the nasal cavity.
Salivary -glands are found in the mouth and they' moisten the food. Inside the mouth, there
is a tongue and teetir which are part of the digestive process. The teeth assist in tearing and
grinding of the food in the mouth.
Tlre tongue then mixes the food using saliva glands to fonn a food paste called bolus.
0esophagus
It is a long tube which allows food to enter tiom the pharynx to the stomach. The lower valves
control the movement of food into the stomach. These valves also prevent the stomach acids
and fbod from going back to the oesophagus.
Stomach
It is a muscular organ which receives food. it is lotrnd in the middle of the abdominal cavity.
It is in the stomach where acids and enzyines are released to digest the food.
Small intestine
it is a coiled narrow tube. it is responsible lor absorbing nutrients and water into the blood
system. The food in the small intestines is further broken down using bile and other digestive
juices tiom the pancreas and liver.
Large intestine
It is larger than the small intestine in diameter. It receives digested food which was not
absorbed in the small intestine. It is responsible lor passing the digested by-products for
excretion. it is used as a temporary storage of f-aeces. The mucus in the large intestine is used
as a lubricant during the release of faeces.
Liver
The organ is reddish-brown in colour and larse Tt is located at the right side of the belly.
The liver produces bile which helps to digest ttrts. lt is also responsible for filtering blood
corning frorn the digestive tract.
Pancreas
This is a long flattened gland in the body. It produces digestive juices to the small intestines"
It also produces alkaline fluids to protect the digestive tract. It also releases enzymes to digests
fats, proteins and carbohydrates.
Rectum
It is a muscular tube in the large intestines. lt connects the colon to the anus. Faeces collect in
the rectum before they are excreted through the anus.
Anus
It is the last part of the digestive system. Its purpose is to hold the stool from coming
out.
The sphincler muscles on the anus are responsible lor controlling the movement of stool out
of the body during excretion.
3. Circulatory system for blood transport
The circulatory process is powered by the heart. The circulatory system is made up of blood
vessels called arteries, veins and capillaries. The heart has valves which prevents back flow
of blood.
During blood circulation, the heart pumps the blood which has nutrients throughout the body.
Arteries carry blood which is rich in oxygen and nutrients from the heart to various body
tissues.
In contrast, veins carry blood to the heart which is rich in carbon dioxide and waste from body
tissues. The capillaries connect the arteries and veins. Exchange of food, waste and gases
happens in the capillaries.
fuirnrn,uy cl6,illary
Pr.rlnron*ry ertery
ft,$mgtply tr*ln
Prrclct *art*
*yahlatrlum L*fi *triur*
Fo+t<avo
** Lrjli ?r:rllrqtf
f,lgftlvr*uxh *
idr*ri&l blrad
#askHod-
t*ptll;ar*ytrt{
p*rphr,rgl tr*rr*,
Fig 1.3 Circulatory System
The circulatory system organs and functions

Heart
This is the organ which pumps blood throughout the body. The heart has muscles which
contract and relax as the heart beats.It also has valves that control blood flow in one direction
and prevents the back flow of blood.
Arteries
These are thick-walled blood vessels. They are wide in diameter. Their function is to carry
oxygen from the heart to the body. They are muscular and elastic to withstand the high pressure
of blood from the heart.
Veins
They have thinner walis than arteries and are also wide. They bring blood back to the heart
frorn the body. These vessels carry de-oxygenated blood.
Capillaries
These are tiny blood vessels. Their rvalls are one cell thick. The cappillary walls allow water
and other dissolved substances to pass thror-rgh during absorption.
Activities
L Make use of available materials to make a model of the human lungs and
demonstrate the breathing process.
2. Design a model showing the digestive svstem. ldentify the parts that store and
transport food.
WORD SEARCH
V U G Z \/
! C T S D W M
rt-
J N P A V E o L I K
D K H E A R T V N L D
Z o S A N o S E a U x
M x S T o M A C H N V
K Y T F E S o N P G E
H G R M o U T H a S I
S E N I T S E T N I N
r\ o E S C D Fi G U )
G A Y H F U N P U o o
S R A R T E R I E S Z
M T R A C H E A D J I
L D K Y A X S H F P G
Clues
l. This is an external body parl through which oxygen is inhaled.
2. It helps in the flow of air to the bronchi which are connected to the hings.
3. A pair of air-filled spongy internai organs.
4. These tiny air sacs help in gaseous exchange.
5. Used for eating and speaking.
6. it is a long tube which allows food to entei'from the mouth to the stomach.
7. It is a muscular organ which receives food.
8. It is responsible for absorbin-e nutrients and water to be used by the body.
9. The internai organ which pumps blood thioughout the body.
10. Gass suppliecl to the rest of the body, vizr arteries.
I 1. They are thin-walled and narrow blood vessels.
12. They are thick-walled and ..r,,ide blood r,essels.
Surnrnary
' The human body has several systems which carry out specific functions for everyday
living.
' The respiratory system helps in the exchange of gases in the body that is, oxygen and
carbon dioxide. It is also responsible for the breathing process.
' The digestive system's function is for breaking down food into nutrients. The nutrients
are essential for growth, energy and repairing of wom out tissues.
' The circulatory system is a nefwork of blood vessels which carry oxygen and nutrients
to the cells and removes waste products such as carbon dioxide from the system.
' Food is stored in the stomach before the absorption process.
' Blood is transported to different parts of the body through the heart.
' Air enters the body through the nose until it reaches the lungs where it is transported to
various body parts.
GIossary
Absorption - absorption of digested food into the blood stream.

Digestion - the breaking down of food into smaller particles for absorption.
Deoxygenated - without oxygen.
Exhalation - breathing out.
Inhalation - breathing in.
SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE [10 Marks]

1. Which body organ is responsible for circulating blood throughout the body?
A. kidney B. heart C. lungs D. stomach
2. An example of an external respiratory organ ir _,
A. nose B. tongue C. spinal
cord D. kidney
3. Which one is an internal organ?
A. Foot B. Liver C. Ear D. Nose
4. Humans have
A. 1 lung B. 2 lungs C. 3 lungs D. 4lungs
5. The other name for trachea is
A. gullet B. tonsil c. wind pipe D. oesophagus
6. Name the organ which excretes waste after digestion.
A. Trachea B. Liver C. Intestines D. Anus
1. What is digestion?
A. transportation of food B. absorption of food
C. breaking down of food D. storage of food
8. Where does digestion starl?
A. stomacir B. small intestines
C. moutir D. large intestines
What are teeth used lor
A. biting fbod B. tearing food
C. crushing lood D. grinding food
10. What is the function of the tongue during digestion'l
A. talking
B. control fbod in the n-routh
C. receive fooi
D. transporl tbod
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUES'IIONS [15 Marksl
1. What are internal organs'/ 121
2. State the difference betr,veen inhalation and erhalation. l2l
l. Where does absorption take place'.) t2l
4. Use the table below to match the body parl with the correct function. t6l
Function
Teeth Pumps the blood throughout the body
Storr-rach Transport blood
Vein Carry oxygenated blood from the heart
Nose to the body
Trachea Break the food
Heart Helps in the flow of air to the lungs
Arterv Storcs tbod
Takes in air
5. State one organ which is used in cach ot'rhe tbllowing processes;

a) digestion
b) respiration
6
";.._:
Topic 2 Safety and Health
OBJECTIVES
. identify healthy living lifestyles
. engage in healthy living projects
. state injuries caused by lack of physical f,tness
. describe ways of preventing injuries
. demonstrate flrst aid procedures in managing injuries
. apply knowledge of safety ruies and precautions for various activities in
different environments
. demonstrate proper care and storage of apparatus.
Introduction
The main goal of safety and health is to promote healthy living style and reduce injuries,
illness and death at school as well as at home. Therefore it is vital to practice healthy living
habits and foliow safety rules every day. Knowledge of ways of injury prevention and
management are very helpful. The issue of nutrition is also of paramount importance as it
promotes good healthy living styles. Injuries cannot be stopped from taking place completely
hence knowledge of first aid procedures in managing injuries is necessary.
Healthy living habits

Healthy living habits are healthy behaviours that include maintaining physical fitness,
good habits and taking care of mental and emotional wellbeing. These behaviours comprise
of various lifestyles.
Healthy living styles

Healthy living styles includes eating a balanced meal, getting regular rest and quality
sleep. Doing daily exercises to maintain physical fitness, having a sound mind and a stable
emotional states are also ways of living healthy.
Good nutrition
This involves eating the right foods in their correct quantities, that is a balanced diet.
Indigenous foods and fruits should be included in our diets. ,A, balanced diet provides nutrition
for internal organs to function effectively. Water intake is necessary and a average of 8 glasses
of water should be taken daily. Other fluids like milk anrJ sugar-free drinks should also be
taken in. Food eaten shouid inciude carbohydrates, proteins, vitamins, fat. fibre and
rnineral
salts' Taking plenty of fmits and vegetables is also encouraged as they provide vitamins.
It
is encouraged to eat regularly but controlling the portion sizes of the food being consumed.
Maintaining a healthy body weight is also encouraged through practices like exlrcising,
not
skipping breakfast and being mindful of tbod portions that are eaten.
A good diet prevents conditions like; high blood pressure, cholesterol levels, diabetes and
other illnesses. Comect eating habits also improl'e gut health, for example, taking food
high
in fibre content helps to prevent constipation. Mineral elements strengthen bones a,d teeih,
fbr example, the intake of calcium.
Some indigenous foods and fruits which mav be included in our diet
tnutaknra/inkobc. sour rnilk nadoralamacimbi
inbantbaira, int b:iinbav i i ii i1t uilli;l-.re, r Lt] irr b t; i il magakar'anragai<a
I : ,.{
.*r.
t+,}
"
nvll/Llmnyt/
nvll/r.tmnvt
JJ tsttbt'Ltiutltshrvangela
tsub vLri r-trl ts lr tva n ge I a uxakuxakgrtnatohwe
f:i{! ). I I udi.gctttttts./itotls
Sleep and rest

QLrality sleep ilr-rd cnoLtsir t'cst is inrl"roltan{ in niaintaining a healthy living styie. Sieeping and
l'L-sting prevetlts diseases aitri conciitions srrch es insilntnia, heart disease, high blood pr.rr.,..
atlcl tlloocl riisord,:t's. It rils,,, in.ll'orc: sri:::;u'lcreis in tire bodl as well as controlling bloocl
pl'cssLtt-c. I{c'stiirg iii:i, ir,-i1-rs llrc iri':rirr tr,,rtri-li ili:icr-lrncl nroic accui.ately. The
body relaxes
its \!'ill as othcr l-r,.11-i1 o1'..111:.
Fhl'sical fitness
.\rtv pltvsictrl acti'"itr lilic.]oqgirtS" \\;rikiirg. itr,.,u;ri;rin ciintbing i<eeps orre physictrlly lit.
ii:
Exercising helps in maintaining a good and healthy body weight which reduces the chance
chances of obesity. Regular exercising increases blood flow which transports nutrients and
oxygen to the body. Physical activities also minimises the chances of diseases. Unnecessary
body fats are also burnt during exercises. Muscles, bones and internal organs are strengthened
during exercises. In addition, exercises also help to relax the body.
Mental and emotional wellbeing
A stable and sound mind helps to prevent emotional stress. Mental health is important because
it determines how we think and act in different situations. Behaviour patterns and moods are
also part of the mental state therefore they should be well maintained. A good mental state
helps one to relate well with others. The ability to control feelings, thoughts and emotions
is crucial in maintaining a healthy mental state. Criticism should be handled positively and
positive talk should be encouraged all the time.
It is everyoneb due to take good care of the body through exercise, good eating habits
as well as quality rest and sleep. A sound mind and a stable emotional state are vital for
a healthy life.
Healthy living projects

Healthy living projects are schemes or plans that are aimed at promoting healthy eating and
exercising so as to develop good healthy habits. In such projects learners take part in the
organisation of the events at school and they also participate in the events as well. The
following projects help in providing healthy foods and maintaining physically fit bodies.
. Growing vegetables and herbs in the class garden.
. Regular exercise through Yoga classes.
. Creating Health and Awareness Clubs at school.
. Healthy local fruits programmes in which learners collect local fruits , bring them and
share them among themselves.
. Active living projects whereby learners are encouraged to participate in any physical
activity daily.
. Healthy eating and healthy snacks projects . Aproject which teaches learrers to prepare
healthy snacks to bring to school.
Injuries caused by lack of exercise
Many injuries are caused by lack of exercise and physical fltness. It is important to take
note of these injuries in order to prevent them. The following injuries mostly take place due
to lack of exercise:
. Strained muscles . Torn cartilages
. Muscle cramps . Broken bones
. Knee pain . Blisters
. Ankle or arrn dislocations
Injury prevention and management
Injuries can be prevented and managed by following the rules below:
. IJse the correct equipment and proper sportswear.
o ll .
i&i*tF'
' Use cLrshioned surfaces to reduce back injuries when one falls.
' Avoid use of wct colrfts r,vhich are slipperv ancj can cause i-alls.
' Avoid any physical activity under extrerne hot conditions to avoid heat stroke.
' Muscle training. stretchins and stability training prevents sprains.
' Avoid careless collision especially in contact sporls like soccer, rugby, handball
etc.
. Follolv laid dow.n rulcs lor a specific sport.
. Stay hvdrated dr-rrins and after any physical activity.
' Spare at least orie hour fbr digestion after a rleal before rioing any activity.
' \\hrtt] Lrp and cool clor,r,ti activities lolver the risk of sprains and strails.
First aid procedures in managing injuries
T1'pe of Cause of injun, First aid procedure
Fracture rvalkins and Help th': person to sLlpport the injured area.
nriririr'g 0n Lurcverl Stop :ut;, blceciing by appiying pressllre with clean
s urfiiccs
banda_uc or cloth.
tzriis and accidents
,{pply a soft or hard splint above and beiow the area
,{ppi-"" ice or coid pack and elevate,
pcrson in shock iie the person down.
practicas
1. blou, on bones
Sprain Landins inrproperll, Rc':t tlre trrjtrred arca.
fi'orn iLrrnps and r\ppiiz ice or cold packs (wrap in cloth cloth
olhcr lcti,,,itivs. Lurdt l iirc re e t() pl'otcL.t tir.. skin t.
t\\'istcd t;r iul L'onrprc:is by lightly wrapping an elastic bandage
i n-ri-ll.ic ; rtn I i gantcnt iirr.r11s1l the injureci area.
iilt t-,i',,'-,.i' I i it; n c illr'r lt,: thc irtiLir-uri .ju'cl to r-educe s.,r,cliing.
Bleed ing ,,\ppi), iiliect pressLlre io the r,vor-rnd Lrsing a sterilc

CLITS -eaLrzc or clearr clotlr.
brLrises Elevate the injured area.
L'ovcr tltc rnjured area wrth a pressure bandage. If
rvounds
bleeding does not stop apply another bandage ancl
visit the nearest health facilit
.
I allergic re action . To stop nose bleeding, pir-rch finnly the soft parl of
\iose 2. injLrrv and blorv to thc nose fbr at least l0-15 minutes.
hleeding thc nosc . Lcan ftlr-r,vards and breatl-re throu_eh the mouth.
i. rcpciitcd sneezing . PIncc icc bag or a ba-{ of fiozen vegetables covered
-+ nose pickirig ir-r n cican cloth on rl-ie nose bridge.
5. ctrllisions betii,een . li blcedin-s contini.res seek rnedical attention.

tri o lbotball
plin, r--r's
,)
I-
Shock l. extensrve . Let the injured lie down on his/her back.
bleeding . Check if the signs of breathing, coughing or
2. hearl failure movement and if there are no signs of the above
perform Cardiopuhnonary Resuscitation (C.P.R) on
3. blood infections
the injured.
4. dehydration . C.P.R is a lifesaving resuscitation technique which is
5. poisoning performed when breathing or heartbeat has stopped.
. Turn the injured sideways to prevent chocking, if the
injured is not responding, call emergency or go to
the nearest health centre.
Dislocation l. Hard blow or . Do not delay medical care. Get medical help
force on joints. irnmediately.
2. falls . Do not move the joint. Until you receive help, splint
3" accidents the affected joint into its fixed position.
. Do not try to move a dislocated joint or force it
4. collisions
back into place. This can dan'rage the joint and its
betr,veen two
surrounding muscles, ligaments. nerves or blood
football players
vessels.
. Put ice on the irlured joint. This can help reduce
swelling by controlling intemal bleeding and the
build-up of fluids in and around the injured loint.
Table 2-l First aid procedures
Safet-v
Safetl, is the state or condition of being protected frorn injLrry or harrn. Safletl. can alsrr
involves activities that seek to minimise or eliminatehazards. In any activity, it is esse-ntial to
adhere to safety rules and precautions.
Safety rules and precautions

Proper warrn up procedures should be followed during physical activities. Atirletes should
also wear appropriate sportswear for speciflc disciplines. Equipment should be used f,or its
intended purposes, for example, goal posts and nets for soccer should not be usecl fbr other
sporting activities. Avoid over training as well as rushing physical activities as it can strain
lnuscles.
Intensity of activities should be increased gradually and not rapidly. Every activity should
be finished with a cool down exercise.
Storage of apparatus
It is important to keep an inventory of all the equiprnent and taking note of its state or
condition. Make sure that all tools and equipment are well organised, well maintained and in
good working condition. All the equipment should be accounted for and stored properly, from
large pieces of equipment to the smallest such as a pump needle.
Storage space must be created for easy identiflcation of tools and equipment. It is helpful to
design a simple labelling system in the storeroom for easy access of equipment. Large canvas
or synthetic bags can be used to store uniforms. Heavy duty mesh ball bag or drawstring
eclr-ripment storage bag can be used to store all balls.
13
Care tbr apparatus
Take note of the rvear and tear oi equiprnent rcguiarly. All damaged equipment shouid be
replaced. It is also il'r-tpoftar-rt to repair brokcn down equiprnent. Creating a budgct and
schedule fbr maintenance of equipment is crucial.
Tltere ure ulv'ctts higlt chutrc'es ctf'gettittg ittluretl clu;'irtg ph1,,tic'ul perfbrmunces. lnf urie,s
c'ott be oreventecl cuii ntttttctgetl if proDer *'{tt'nl up ctncl cool cktwn activitie,s are clone.
Hov'ever, tlrcre ure time.; n'hett ittjttrie^; (.)L'cLtr unci tlterc i,s neecl to cun"tt ottt fir.yt uicl
Jy'ot'ethtre.c in order lo ntttttttgt: the inlrtrie.s'.
Activities
Coilect dried indigenous foods rich in proteins and vitamins. Label and display
them in the School Culture Centre.
2. Construct four f;r'si aici rnodei iouli ai-,c riernon:;ii'ait iheir i;se.
3. in groups, dramatise performing of first aid to a person who has sprained an ankle
during a soccer r'natch.
CROSSWORD PUZT-LE
'r*
|; .'
1l
Across
1. Substances that provide nourishment to the body.
2. Food group which promotes growth.
3. It quenches thirst.
4. Injury of tearing and stretching of ligaments.
5. Safekeeping of equipment and apparafus.
6. A list of tools and equipment.
Down
1. What results when the body is hurt?
2. Source of vitamins.
3. A preparatory activity before playing games when doing sports.
4. Body part which is affected by fracture and dislocations.
5. Activities that help to maintain physical fitness.
6. Example of a healthy living styles.
7. It is used to cover wounds.
Summary
' Healthy living styles include; good eating habits and nutrition, performing physical
activities and exercises, getting regular rest and quality sleep as well as proper stress
management.
' Injuries caused by lack of physical activities are bruises, strained muscles, torn
cartilages and muscle cramps.
' Injuries are reduced by wearing the correct sport gear and following the laid down
rules for the specific activities.
' Knowledge of safety rules and following precautions is r:ssential when various activities
are performed.
. Proper first aid procedures are helpiui in managing injrirics.
Glossary
Apparatus - of rnaterials or equipmcnt produced for a particular use.

sets
Balanced diet - food that provides adequate amounts of nutrients to the body.
Healthy living styles- Ways and habits of rnaintaining good health
Dislocation - a displacement of bones at a joint.
Fracture - a break on the bone.
Hydration - process of providing adequate water to the body.
Injury - any damage to the body.
Safety - protection from danger or injury.
l5
SECTION A: tIULTtpLE CHO{CE [10 Marksl
1. Which Ii.,,ir-rg style is not healthi,,,
A. eatingjunk tbod
B. good rest and sleep
C. a stable ntentai state
D. a balanced diet
2. Name the nutrients u,hich help to keep our teeth ancl bones strong.
A. proteins and carbohydrates
B. calcium and vitanrin D
C. minerals and fats
D. vitarnin A and fats
a
J. Which are colnltlon bone injLtrics'.,
A. Bluiss-s B. FractLrre s C. Crarnps D. Sprain
:i. irientifl'the t1,,pc of in.iLrr),tl-orl rire !ira_rlartr belou,.
A.Kne,-- cap B. Kree C'. Dislocation D. Fracture

l'lorv do .r,e ntirtit'rtisa 1l{.)\,1-ltrelri rrl'l ll t,.rtitittri leg'l
i\. By' tai<in,u thc in-juied r.o riie iir,..iri.:i,
B Br clrrlr inr llt-. :::i:: :,',.! n-'r'- )r,
C. B,v taking care of the fiactur-e.
D. By taking carc- of the injureil L-.arr usrng splint.
6" What is sat-etv'l
A. proper care of apparatLls
B. to be able to pertbnr-i first aid proccrlures
C. being protected fiom injLrr-_v
D. fiee fionr tailing
7. whic[r ot'tltt'follo$ine is c cUr]lt)tot] LuLlse of injrrrv in spolling activities?
A. drug r-rse B. dircct inrpact C. handshake D. celebratin_e
What is the first aid procedure lbr sprains'.)
A. iower the injtrred part. ts. wrap hardly with a bandage
C. apply ice or cold pack D. use the injured part.
9. The other terrn lbr pulsc- is
A. hearl beat B. iespilation C. breathing D. inhalation
i0. is ir-nportant rviren storing apparatus.
A. Labelling B. Workins C. Maintaining D. Replacing
l6
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS [15 Marks]
1. Use the table below to identiflz the cause and management of injuries in
sport.
t6l
Injury type Cause First aid procedure
a) Fracture
b) Dislocation
c) Nose bleed
2. Explain why some swimmers use goggles in swimming l2l
3. State trvo advantages of sleeping and resting. L2l
4. Name four traditional foods that provide the body rvith proteins and
carbohydrates. V)
5. Identify one healthy living project that can be carried out at your school. I1]
t7
Topic 3 Aquatic Skiltrs
OBJECTIVES
i:earners should be aLrle to:
. sun.ivai strokc:
Cerr-ronstrate
" przrctise resuscitation technioties
. dernonstrate front. back. crau,i. breast stroke techniqr_ies
. execllte correct diving tecirnique.
lntroduction
Most peopie en-io)' anci appreciate actir rties perfbnned in water such as swirnming, diving
and water sports. Water or aquatic actir,ities help in the developrnent of motol skills and equip
leartrers with water survival tecirr-riques. i-c-aming several su,imming strokes adds variety to
swiurmin-e activities anci grves a betici' ii olj(r,Lri as ntore muscles are used. It is essentiai
tbr su,itnnrers to leam variolls \\':rvs o1'rntering into a rvater body and use such skills in
enrergencv situations.
Wa.ter safet,v
Survival techniques in w,ater
Sunrival tecltnrques it-r uatel are skiiis iirai siirnrmers should be equipped with when the1,
eltcoltnter a 1it'e threatcning srt-Lratron ln \\ a.t.-l-. -!lr:tE of tirese skills include: sculling, treading
lvater. floating. sllirnming anci use of rarieri del'ic*s to assist rescuing a drowning person.
Sonre oitne resclre cievlces are lit.e jackers" ring buol'anci shepherd crock.
Floating
Thc hlttlatt boc]'r itt).n: alil \\'iitei beciii-r,-r: til,.: tLtngs tirat are- filled u,ith air and the f-attv
tissues of tire btrciv are tir:hicr iii:lr:.,r;lie:' l-ir,lse ii,iiir inore boc11.fat can float easily. Floating.
also linolvtl as bltovancr. call b.: irii',)i'lti'r,: -'asilr w,hetr an-ns and legs are extencleci.
VIarit"ttLutr bltovancv is r--rbt;itntci ilircri.'ii1rlrri.,.,i'the bodi,arc subrnerged.
Sculling
ScLiliing is a basic sri ir irci-,; .lric Lises qLrick horizontal movement of thc
,.r.Lntl: irr tir. \i r1cr' ,i3(ivU ',\',ltc1" surtace. One itas to float in a verticai
l()iiti()rr rr iili lr-rrr: snoili.iei' levei r,r'ith. elbor,vs slishtiv bent. Water i.-s
liept at shctrjcier ier i,nci. :i;rd fbrtir u'ith hancis Sculling is irnportanr
as it helps Ii p--rSon
The help position
1t
Fig 3.1 Help positiott
The heat escape lessening position (HELP) - is a humair position to reduce heat loss
while immersed in cold water. HELP positioning involves wrapping one's knees together
and folding arrns around one's chest. This position also minimises water flow across the body.
Treading water
Treading water is a vital skill in water safety. It is to turn into an upright position in the
water and making in-and-out sweeping motions with arms to stabilise the upper body. Bicycle-
like kicking motions can be made to help keep the bod1.afloat. The benefits of treading
water include: covering short distances in the water, recovering breath after swallowing water
and increase in confldence while swimming.
Swimming
Swimming is the movement of the body through water using arms and legs. Tlie best
water suruival technique is learning to swim sr-rrvival swirnuring strokes include backstroke
and continuos water treading. Basic swimming skills prevent people from drowning and
enable them to move away from dangerous situations in water.
Use of devices
The use of flotation or swimming devices helps to survive in water. Life jackets, ann
floaters, floatation suits and other flotation devices can keep a person afloat in the water
even if they are unconscious or unable to swim. It is important to make use of any valuable
aid in and around the water in emergency sifuations.
Resuscitation techniques
After rescuing a drowning victim it is advised to give first aid. An example of a first aid
procedure is feeling the pulse on the neck side or wrist and checking if one is still breathing.
If the person is not breathing, cardio-pttlnlonarv resuscitation (CPR) should be performed.
CPR is a combination of chest compressions and mouth to mouth resuscitations to deliver
oxygen and induced blood circulation to the victim. Airw,a), Breatltilg Circttlation (ABC)
resuscitation can also be performed to an unconscious person.
t9
.:i.i.
t,ri
k 4l{}:j-{srf
*'\_ r \_ _.
'--
-_-e"-i/
Fig 3.2 Compression resuscitation in CPR
The ABC resuscitation

r { stands for air-way. Lifting the casualty's chin and tilting the head back will open the
airway passage. This position lifts the casualty's tongue away lrom the bacl,< of throat so
that it does not block the air passage.
r $, stands for breathing. If the casualtv is not breathing, blow your own exhaled air into
the casualty's lung thus oxygenating the biood by giving "artificial ventilation."
r ( stands fbr circuiation. If tl're heart stops, one can apply "Chest Compressions" to force
the blood through the heart and around the body.
. ABC resuscitation should be combined with artificial ventilation so that the blood is
oxygenated.
Rescuing a drowning causality

Drowning can take place any water bod1,. even in shallow water. Rescuing a drowning person
can be done through reochirtg. ihroiring, rowing as well as getting into the water. However.
the first thing to do when solneone is drownutg is to cali for help.
Reach
This is risky and a lot of care should be taken. One should ensure that he or she is in a safe
and stable position to avoid being pulled into the water by the victim. This can be achieved
by laying flat on the floor and stretching hands towards the victim. If one is not able to reach,
the use of a tree branch or a towel is encouraged so as to reach the victim. Encouraging the
victim to be calm can also aid in the rescuing process. Another way is to hold the edge of the
pool with one hand and stretching the other hand towards the victim. After grasping, slowly
pull the victim towards saf-ety.
Thron'
Most swimming areas have sat-ety rings attached to long ropes. They usually float and can be
used to save a drowning victim. T'hrow the ring towards the victim and ask him/her to grab
it then pull towards the shore.
Row
When the victirn is too far and cannot be reached using either the reach or throw rnethod
one has to take a boat (if available) and row close to the victim to rescue him or her. Ask the
victim to hold on to the boat and apply the reach rnethod to help the victim to safety.
2A
Go
Swimming to rescue someone drowning should be the last option. It requires a lot of
swimming skills and training before doing it. A drowning person is violent and not calm as
he or she struggles for breath. Therefore, this may pose danger to the rescuer resulting in both
the victim and the rescurer drowning. When swimming to rescue someone, carry a towel or
any object that the vicfim can hold on to.
Strokes
*urfl n: rrrl ltg rBr?'lr**
lh* rr,r*t< tf .?',11 fl ;1 5t'.rc' i:'f'
Lqrttsfiy t€il:tEf lrnillt,*

Fig 3.j Swimming strokes/styles
The common swimming strokes or styles are freestyle stroke, backstroke and butterfly stroke.
They are well known because they are used in swimming competitions. Besides these common
strokes, there are some other styles like the sidestroke and breaststroke which can also be
performed when swirnming.
Front crawl
The front crawl is often the preferred stroke by seasoned su,immers. It uses alternating arm
movements with an above water recovery. The legs execute afiutter kick which makes the
swimmer more faster. The front crawl generates more speed because of thefitttter kickand is
mostly used in freestyle swimming races.
Back crawl
As its name suggests, backstroke is swum whilst one is on the back facing upwards. It uses
alternating circular arn movements and an above water recovery. The legs execute a
flutter
kick similar to the one used in freestyle. It is faster than breaststroke but slower than butterfly.
The backstroke is also useful in working out the back for people with back problems. The
Zimbabwean swimmer Kirsty Coventry holds an Olympic gold medal for this backstroke
crawl.
Butterfly
This stroke stands out among competitive strokes because of its unique and spectacular
technique. It uses a symmetrical ann stroke with an above water recovery. It also uses
a wave-
like body undulation and a dolphin kick. It is the second fastest swim stroke after the front
crawl. Butterfly stroke can be quickly exhausting, but once you mastered it, it can be fun.
#
Breast stroke
Bleast stroke is a swinning style in .*'hich rhe sr,r.irrmer uses the chest tbr movement.
The head of the swimmer is out of the warer rnost of the time. This style is also known as frog
stroke because the movetnents are like that of a fi'og swirnming. However, it is the slowest of
all the strokes even if it is easv to leam.
Advantages of iearning diflerent swim strokes

Practising difi-erent switn strokes give a better workout as more muscles are used. Swimming
inj Lrries iike rnr"rscle strains are reduce d as the body is not stressed rvith the same movements.
There is mttch more fun and excitement in doing rrany strokes. Learning different slvirnrning
strokes hclps ir-r irnproving perfbrmance.
Ditl-erent strokes tend to t-ocr-rs on dill-ererlt aspects of the body. For example. free stvle gives
lltore speed to complete a lap ll'hereas backstxrkc helps one to relax and gain back energ)/.
Entry into water

Srvimtners are encouraged to clieck the waier depth betbre entering into water. Checkrng
'*ater icvcls can be dolte b',,ris1ng long sticl:s ol sculling feet dorvnn,ards first. (p6ra,in_q 11s11,
to get in rvater safely and using safe ways of entering into water is essential. Entry into water
cau be done bv through the use of steps, the side entry, sitting swivel entry, jumps and dives.
' Sitting sw'ivel is car:ried out lrorl a sitting position at the side of the pool then sliding in
rvater keeping the head allor,e tvster.
" Entering through the laddel'and steps is another rvav of water entry.
. The side of tlie oool can aiso be r-rsed to cnie]' into i,l,ater.
' Switnmers can even perfbrni a variety of entries such as litb-jacket entry.
' Diving is yet anothet'rvay o1'plunging into water. Usuail.v diving is done head first but
sorne dives can ].re .ii-,.itc .^ lth ihe i*gs list.
Diving techniques
5i. ''i':'t *
Fig 3.1 A srt,intmer diying into water
22
Diving is jumping or plunging into water from a platform or springboard. A correct dive
means proper entry into the water. Swimmers are encouraged to learn proper and correct
diving techniques to prevent injuries.
Correct body positioning during a dive is the first skill that should be mastered. A diver
should learn the proper diving posture before going near the water. A proper dive starts and
placing one hand over the other with palms facing downwards. Raise arms straight above the
head and bend forward to get the head as close to the water as possible. Crouching helps in
performing a smaller dive. It is encouraged to start with diving head first.
1. ln pairs, practice the skill of breathing in water. Fill buckets with water. Put faces in
buckets whilst blowing bubbles through the mouth.
2. Demonstrate different ways of checking water depth before diving such as using
long sticks or using feet first.
3. Practice backstroke next to a lane rope in order to swim straight.
POP QrJtZ
You have exactly 5 minutes to complete this quiz section...tick tock!!
1. State three survival techniques in water.
2. What do the words ABC stand for in resuscitation?
3. Name four swimming strokes.
4. Entry into water can be by...,...... and.......
5. Which three aquatic activities do you know?
6. What is the correct sequence of performing a dive?
l. Give three advantages of learning different swimming strokes.
8. State two devices used when swimming.
9. What is treading water?
10. Give one object that can be used to rescue a drowning person.
Summarv
' Aquatic or water sports are activities that are done in or on water for example, diving,
canoeing and swimming.
. Aquatic activities are necessary skills for promoting water safety.
. Swimming strokes include front, back, breast and butterfly.
. One of the ways of entering into water is by diving.
' Some of the survival techniques in water are floating and swimming.
23
Glossarv
Aquatic - relatirrg to r,vater.

Diving - jr-unpin-q or falling inio rvater.
Floating - to be suspended on u,ater r,r,.hile laying horizontally.
Resuscitation - the action of bringin-e ()r reviving sonreone back to life who has
lost consciousness.
Stroke - a rnethod oi'niovinq tire arnrs and iegs to push against the water
and propel the sr,r,irnmer.
Treading - moventent of limbs in a vcrtical position to keep head above the
sr"rrthce ol u,ater'.
SECTIO|TIA: N{UI,TIPLE CHOICE [10 Marks]

1. A person drowirin-q in an.v- water bod_v is called a
A. Water victinr B. accident victirn
C. fire victirn D. frost victim
2. Which sw,iinmin_e stroke is tiiught to beginners?
A. breaststrcke B. bumertll' c. backstroke D. freesfyle
3. The slor,vest cornpetitirue stroke is
A. breaststroke ts. burterflv --C. b*tstroke D. freestyle
4. The Heat Escape Lessening Position (HELP) position is a
ii't'iit:ir1Lr"
A. resLrscitation B. sLrn,ivai C. divins D. breathing
5. ln iiont crawt. nancis anci i-ect n-rust be together througirout the su,imming strokes
rt: tlti. lrlloii:
A. sntooti-r l.novclllent througit tite u,iitel
B. incorrect anl and ieg actron
C. sinking of the bod1, in warer'
D. proper breathing pattcrn
6. Which placc is sat'e to :ai<e a s."\ ltTi'.'
A. ril,cr B. dan-r C. su,imming pool D. lake
7. The tbllou,ing are wavs olcnrerins into u'ater except
A. dii,'ing B. side entry
C. sitting sl.;ir ei D. walking
8. The rs Lisualh' pertbrmed .1urin-e fi-eestyle swimming.
A. back stlol<e B. butterfly stroke
C. fi'oltt crawl D" breasr stioke
:,1
9. The picture below is showing the
A. front crawl B. freestyle c. back stroke D. butterfly

10. Which of the following suggestion is the best way to use when someone is about
to drown?
A. jump up and down, cry and faint with fear.
B. shout for help, get floating device, and swim to the victim.
C. call emergency number, do nothing, r,vait.
D. ask for the victims name, call the police, watch.
1. What are aquatic skills? tll
2. Give any four aquatic skills that you know. l4l
3. Name a female athlete who is famous for swimming in Zimbabwe? lll
4. State two water survival techniques. l2l
5. Describe how the ABC resuscitation technique is performed to an
unconscious person. t3l
6. State any four swimming strokes you know t4l
25
Topic 4 Kids Athletics
OBJECTT\IES
. perform tbr tirne in a specific indir.iduai track event
' displal'' the properrLinning mechanrc:. iirr sprinrs. long anC middle distance events
'o complete specific encjurance races u,ith great leVel oi'endurance
. clernonstrate the hang and sail technicpres rn long jurnp
. c\ccLlte tite scissols jLrriip i;i iriglL J rtilri,
. practise safe landing in ali the jur,-rps
demonstrate tire hop, step ancl jurnp ir.: triple jump
displa,v the corect handling of eouipment
demonstrate proper executron of throlvs tbr distance and accuracy.
Introduction
!iiiis ,\iitletics ts c:tc 'lf lir,, ':iug,:::.:,/ii!ij1,i,i., ,.'l3r',-.l,3pgtcitf 1)iogil'tittfites
il the rvol-lcl oi
sports. It invoives the engagetltnL oii'oung pcople in exciting anrJ creative athletic activities.
fcant-Daseti conrpctiili.jnS rt,..ill:i.jlu ,it'lliri,iiii-rrl atiii.:ti,_': gaii.les nre periorrned. The garxes
ancl actir ities done in kids athlctics htip thc'n.; iit discover basic athletic skills of running.
throrl'ing and jiimping. Ii aiso iniollcs ltirci tvpes ot-athletics can-ied out are track and fieid
cvc-ntS. rnaci running. cross uoLi:tr.l'\' i'Ltllt-illlq aild racc rl,alking.
Running
Running tactics and techniques
Runnit.tg is ai-r athletrc skill tnai necds pi'ollr'i trrining so as to achieve the best perfonnance.
Tiie action of n-itruing requlres a ilr oi.rntrscle activation and appropriate strides.
Prepareclness betbre rlinning i" ar.r csslniiiii t':chnique that develops alertness in athletes.
Ruitttiitg can be started at cliriclent stalti;r{ pi-'sitions to improve the reaction time. For
good i'caction. a crouch ol flight p,.tsiiilr.1 is bcst. The,:orrect anl-leg action, posture and the
firtishing techuicl.ic ts insti'Lrnerrtai ir: aiirir:ii;s i,s it irnplovcs acceleratio ciuring running.
-)A
"}NYAAfr '![f' <- gPP,'6 f,i{-iLLpiiTt3ti
ldhfrx'*
Fig 4.1 Take offposition in athletics
Participation in long distance runs or races is beneflcial to athletes as it improves their

endurance. Sprint races require special athletic techniques such as baton exchange in relay
races. Such baton exchange techniques develop handling, passing and techniques.
Running with obstacles
Fig 4-2 An athlete running and jumping over hurdles oncl (rigltt) running behveen slalont pole.s
Obstacle running is another kids athletics activities which is meant to improve flexibility,
strength, judgment and balance in athletes. Hurdle racing is an example of an obstacle
race.
Another obstacle race involves running befween arranged objects such as slalom poles.
Obstacle races are done whilst the athletes are running therefore they should be able to
control
their speed when they face obstacles.
Jumping
Jumping is pushing or leaping off the ground into the air by using muscles in the leg and
foot. Jumps can be done using an aid such as a pole. There are two main classes ofjumps
and
these are jumping for distance (horizontal jumps) and jumping for height (vertical jumps).
The goai in jumping events is to maximise either the measured distance or height of-the
athlete's ju-p. The movernents of the jumping events can be broken down into four
main
phases which are:
. Approach
. Take off
. Flight
. Landing
_ 'r1
'k#
Horizontal and vertical jumping techniques
Horizontal Jumps
Horizontal jurnps inclLrde long jLrmp ar-rd triple jLunp.
Long jump
The rnain concept in long ju*p is for the athlete to cover the greatest distance from the point
of take off to the landing point in one junrp.
Fig 4.3 Long.jump
Triple Jump
Tripie jump is also called hop, step and jump. tt is an event in which an athlete makes a
horizontaljump for distance in three distinct ar"rd continous movements. in the 'hop' phase,
the athlete takes off and lands on the same foot. This is followed by the 'step'phase in which
the athlete leaps and lands on the other fcrot. The final phase is the 'jump'in which the athlete
lands in any manner desired.
Approach Hop 5tBp Jump

, *
I
f* L
n r,
ar'
} t 1, -*
,,:
f. r* iE
)\r t
Take*ff:
board '
'
aa1
?i_,
ia
ffi : I
15
| : ri r r
Fig 1.4 Triplejuntp
Jumping for height
High jump
This is jumping over a bar that is continuouslv raised in height until one athlete remains.
It involves the athlete rnaking a short run before taking off on one foot or both. Special
lumping techniques enable athletes to ciear greater heights. Such techniques involve the
scissors technique. The scissor technique inr,'olves the athlete jumping over the bar upright
wirile lifting both legs Lrp over the bar in order to ciear higher heights.
28
Fig 4.5 Scrs,sors technique
Pole vault
This is a vertical jump competition in which athletes attempt to jump over a bar with the aid
of stick. In this event, athletes attempt to vault over a high bar with the aid of an ex.tremely
long and flexible pole.
Fig 4.6 Pole vault
Throwing
Throwing activities in athletics involve the throwing of implements of varying weight and
shape as far as possible from the thrower. Such activities include shot put, discus and javelin.
Throwing techniques
There are basic skills and techniques that performers need to master so as to achieve the best
throw in throwing activities. The basic throwing skills are holding or gripping, the stance,
movement and releasing.
Holding or gripping
There are 3 main types of gripping in javelin and are illustrated below.
,
t
t
Fig 4.7 Javelin grip
29
In discus. the discus should be heid flat against ihe palm rvith its edge sitting on the pads of
the fingers. The thumb then rests on the back of the discus as shown below.
Fig 1.8 Disuts grip
In shot put, the shot is held at the base of the fingers, not the palm. The flngers should be
slightly spread apart with the thumb for supporl. In addition, the hand will be bent back in a
cocked position when holding the shot.
Fig 4.9 Shot put grip
The stance
The stance refers to the standing position during throwing events. There are different stance
positions that most throwers use when perfbrming a throw. A stance depends on the movement
rnethod used by the thrower. ln addition. every throwing activity involves a marked space in
r.vhich the throw must be perlonlecl in Therr-t-ore. every stance should be executecl ,uvithout
passing the marked space.
The glide or movement
Movement involves any body movement done before a throw to generate momentum so as to
execute a better throw. In javelin, shot ptit or discus, movement follows the following steps;
prepat'ation, momentunt bui lding, delivet't: and t"ecovet)'.
The release
This is the process of letting the implement to be thrown go. Proper release is important in all
throwing activities so that the implernent can go the furthest distance possible. The distance
that any thrown object travels is determined by the following:
. height of release
. speed of release
. angle of release
The above techniques can be affected by'the shape or make of the object to be thrown as well
as environmental factors such as air resistance and density.
30
Activities
1 . Demonstrate the correct baton exchange by passing and receiving batons in groups
of 4 athletes each. Perform aby 100 relays executing baton exchange correctly.
2. Demonstrate in turns the execution of long jump, triple jump and high jump using
mats for safety.
3. Watch a video or PowerPoint presentation on proper handling, the correct stance,
rotation or gliding and release in discus and shot put.
WORD POEM
Create a word poem on kids athletics using some of the words belorv and demonstrate
any techniques using gestures from the sport as you recite the poem.
1. running 2. cross-country
3. relay 4. baton exchange
5. horizontaljumping 6. highjurnp
1 . long jump 8. triple jump
9. throwing techniques 10. shot put
11. javelin 12. discus
Summary
. Kids athletics is a group of sporting events that involves competitive running, jumping,
throwing and walking. It is a grassroots developmental programme for kids to develop
basic athletics skills.
. Reiay teams perform baton exchange.
. Vertical jumping involves jumping over a pole whilst horizontal jumping is jumping on
a level ground.
. Basic skills and techniques for throwing activities are holding, the stance the glide or
rotation and the release
Glossary
Athletics - a group of sporting events that involve competitive mnning,

' jumping, throwing and walking.
Crouch - a position where the knees are bent and the upper body is brought
forward and down.
Endurance - ability to remain efficiently active for a long time.
Momentum - the quantity of motion or force that keeps an object moving.
Reaction - an action taken in response to something.
Rotational - a circular movement of an object around a central point.
31
SECTI ON A: ML;LTtp{_E CHOICE [0 Marksl
Running. j un-ittinq anr I ai'e parl olathletics events?
A. dancing ts. i;iimbins C. throrving D. diving
2. Which one of the fbllo",r,ing is the cor.recr command for sprints?
A. On your marks. set and gun B. Gun. set and on your mark
C. Set. gun and on rrour n.iarks D. On your marks. gun and set
-1. A race in u.hich the rLrnners.junrp or.er l:arriers is called
A. hurdles B. iong_iurnp C. sprints D. relays
4. A fieid event'r,vhere a competitor.ihrou,s a heavy
metal ball as f-ar as possible
is called
A. discus B. ja'u'elin C. baton D. shot put
5 isa spear'hkc object throvvn by hand.
A. discus B sirot pr-rt C. javelin D. pole vault
6. Wiiat is the name of an e\rent u,herc crlnpetitors jurnp
over a bar?
A. triple jr*p B. javelin
C. highjurnp D. standing long jump
A rela,v team has ru;tnefs.
A, 1 8,3 c.2 D.4
8. Which of the following is not a fleid gvgnt?
A. javelin B. hurdles C. shot put D. discus
A sprint hurdle reiay is arace r.r,here
A.athletessprintoverhurdiesina'.@thebatontoateam
member lvho will also sprint over hurdles.
B' athlete sprint in a set distance anci pass the baton to a teammate rvhcl vrill sprint
also.
C. athiete sprint and iiirnn ;t bat- tirer.r ilnd on a mar
D. athlete sprirlt over I glvcn distance canying an object which he/she will throw
10. where should rhe rurnne. loc,k r-ipor-r hear-ing the command. ,.Set,,?
A. at the starrer B. at the flnishing iine
C. directly down the ground D. at the next runner in the race
SECTION B: STRUCTURED euESTroNS [15 Marks]
l. Give any one exalnltle of the fbllorving evenrs.
a) Sprints race
b) Long distance race flt
2. State any two obstacles that runners can jump over during in an obstacle race.l2l
LLl
3. Give one tactic perfomed bv ninners. t1l

4. How many chances is one given to clear the height?
5. a) what is the difference between vertical and horizontal jumps? l1l
l2l
b) Give an example tbr each,
12)
6. Give one throwing technique.
t1l
l. Name three throwinq events. t3l
8. Throwing takes place in a
t1l
32
Study area 2:
Sport
Topic 5 Invasion Games
OBJECTIVES
. demonstrate defending and attacking as ateam.
' discuss advantages and disadvantages of using various team formations.
' demonstrate positioning within boundaries in relation to team mates.
. demonstrate positioning in relation to opponents.
. execute ways of dislodging an opponent.
Introduction
An invasion game is a play which focuses on attacking an opponent's territory and scoring
a goal or a point' Invasion games involve competing teams that all have
an equal number oi
players. The use of various formations in invasion games is useful and tactful.
Invasion games
include sporting activities such as soccer, hockey and others. Invasion games also
involve
positions for players with specific roles which should be follorved during such games.
Space awareness in invasion games
Invasion games involve the aspect of space awareness. This entails the space occupied
by the
body as well as the relationship between the body and the environmeni. tn invasion games,
space awareness is displayed in defending and attacking techniques.
Defending tactics
These are skills and techniques that involve protecting the team's territory
from the opposing
team(s). Such tactics are put in piace so as to prevent the opposing team fro- ,"orirg
oi
attaining a point. Defensive techniques that make use of space awareness include
the following.
33
' Skillfully nrarginalising and erclnding sliillflil opponents from the play of the games.
This can be Cone b,v guarding such players rvith the best def-enciers or two def'enders.
' Making use of teal-t-t fbrmations that include more defenders than attackers
Attacking tactics
These are tactics that are useci b1, athletes or teatxs to attain a score or point against the
opposin-q team. Various technique.s can Lre employed when attacking the other team such as
the ones iisted beior':
' Maintaining ball or objects possession tactful passing until a goal is reached to
attain a point.
' Altentating dilectiort atrci making use of great speed to avoid opponents
' Makirtg Llse oi'tar:ttiri tilt'nrations that;lcnctrate the opponents'def'enses
Formations
These are tacttirl an'al1s.rienfr: i-rl pia-v*r poliriorls in the field of pla;,,. They can be called
plans or galne tactics. FLrrltrrtions are usetul in invasion games as they are deveioped to
-qame
strategically penetrate the Cet-enses of the opponents and attain a score or point.
Various tbmations are userJ 1n in\ asion garrlcs and tirey are represented mainly by numbers
suclr as 4-4-2 or 3-5-2 depending or.: tire nunrber of players that rnake up a team in each
and every invasron gar.ne. Letters can also be trsed to represent fonnations such. Example of
fbrmations are si.rr.lwn belou':
+. I
t;f
I
* rrl
ffi if
i
.'i'
.{ t1l t-
J
\ [,
I
l__ - mi I
frg -;. I l.-orntutiorr in busiiarbull (iefi) trnd ltandbull (riSht)
Advantages of lbrmations
. They are irsed to streuilthei: tite tealr.
" The,v can also be userl to sp()t the u,eakness of the opponent and attack.
' Using fonlations creates opl)ortunities tr) li1l spaces when defending.
. Formations help to strateqies tl.ie gallle beibr'c pla,v.
' Ball distribLttion is also planncd ibr nrlx'c ptrssession and control of the bali.
Disadvantages of formations
Requires pla,vers ro l-'',e tirlii,'a\\'are and understand the roles of assnmed positions.
For-rnations can cl'e:rte \,ci\ rigiti svslents olpla1,'.
Sometitre5 errpt)'si-1ace> ar't' crcatcri bv ionnations leadin-q to exposure of the defence.
Each roie is qurte specifi,.: and n-rieht not be played efi-ectively.
Fonrations dentancis a lot ,-rf cor-t-ut-runicatioit to coordinate
-!+
Positioning
This is placement of players in relation to the environment or marked space where the
sporting games are performed. It can also be in relation to other team mates and also in
relation to opponents. Position compliments formations and is also a tactful technique that
can be used u,hen attacking in invasion games. The ways of positioning can be done in
relation to the following;
. Marked boundaries
This is following the marked lines that demarcate sections of the field of play. It determines
if the implement or players are in or out of bound. In addition, there are different penalties or
scoring points in relation to the sections of the marked areas.
. Teammates
This mostly make use of team formations. They include the relationship of teammates to
each other which are strategic and beneficial to the team in both attacking and defending.
l'--' -':**:* t'*r*'-' -'r

l, '- * -: i i
t'
"---=q---:=r *4*t
ir
ll i\
: C,)6D,
a+rr!r:r eirqin j
lt'i\
i\-
i\
@i
,@ry(ai'(;) ,tue.,-i,;*?e$4r4,*+
,
: rf,T'?!!!f,ln i
t- @ n Oi
I!ir"i*r.r L4_)
, (.s ) tEFIiEGtr,
(n,:,!r:t!Ffr r',!:r+ii!.rr
o:
:
u'.r
'-. -: _ (EjtIilE .; - _: 'H'
i
-j
Fig 5.2 4-4-2 Soccer.(left) and basketball (rigltt) positioning
Reaction
In invasion games, it is necessary to ensure that the opponents do not have possession of the
ball or implement. This is called dislodging an opponent . It also implies that the opponents
fail to obtain ball or implement possession or an upper hand irr the game. This can be achieved
in many ways which are both defensive and offensive as follows;
' Change of speed (acceleration and deceleration) in dribbling, passing or bouncing enables
the opponent to be dislodged.
' Change in direction is a tactic of escaping an opponent. The direction can be moving
forward, backward, sideways or diagonally and can be aided by changes in speed.
' Feigning movement or disguise movement which involves moving in the wrong
direction outwits the opponent. Feigning movement is the capacity to pretend to make
one movement unpredictably.
' Guarding is also used in dislodging the opponent. Guarcling is the act of placing the
body in the path of an offensive opponent.
POINT TO NOTE:
space awareness can be used for both attacking and also defending.
35
Activities
1. Choose an invasion game of your choice and construct a model field of play and
position puppet players on their ideal positions.
2. Practice dodging and guarding opponents during basketballtraining.
3. ln groups, demonstrate dislodging an opponent in any invasion game of your
choice.
RESEARCH
Carr-v out a research on invasion games using the internet and complete the table
trelow.
Sporting equipment Invasion game Placeifield of play Number of

players per team
/
/.t
!.
,-,1.
;
,\
tl/-
Summary
' Invasion games include soccer, basketball, handball, hockey and rugby.
. Team formations are useful in planning for invasion games.
. Space awareness, positioning and reaction are the key techniques that are implemented
in invasion games.
. The act of dislodging the opponents includes dribbling and guarding.
36
Glossary
Attacking - engaging an opposing team with the objective of scoring

into their goal.
Demarcate - set boundaries or limits.
Dislodging - forcing or knocking out of possession.
Dribbling - beating the defender while maintaining possession of the
ball.
Feigning moYements - deceiving movements or when a player pretends to go but
changes direction.
Inyasion - to enter by force into opponent's territory.
Tactic - a game plan against an opponent's weaknesses.

1. The following are attacking tactics except
A. maintaining ball possession B. positioning with boundaries
C. avoiding defensive players D. principle of mobility
2. What do you understand by the term 'game'in sport?
A. netball B. soccer
C. traditional games. D. organised activities.
3. An example of an invasion game is _=--'-.-..-_,
A. volleyball B. tennis C. soccer D. darts
4. Characteristics of invasion games are
A. there is no sharing of space *ithin th. r.r*k.d borrdu.i.,
B. cheating
C. equal number of players for each team
D. more players on one team than the other
5. What is reaction in sport?
A. ability to accelerate
B. ability to respond quickly to stimulus
C. ability to stretch
D. ability jump
to
6. How are players in invasion games positioned?
A. haphazardly B. scattered c. systematic D. randomly
7. Players in the same team have
A. same roles B. different roles
C. no roles D. multiple roles
8. The foliowing are invasion games except
A. soccer B. basketball C. handball D. chess :
#
9. How is the scoring done in invasion games?
A.shooting into own goal
B.shooting into either goals
C. shooting into the opponent's goal
D. shooting at both goals
10. Name the four outer boundaries in basketball
A. 2 touch lines
B. 2 side lines
C. 2 side lines and 2 base lines
D. 2 touch lines and I goal line
1. What is the meanin_9 of the follorving terms:
a) deflending tll
b) attacking t1l
2. What are tonchlines and goal iines? t21
3. Give two defending tactics. l2l
4. State any two formations in any invasion game. L2)
5. Give two advantages and two disadvantages of using formations 141
6. Describe three ways in which an opponent can be dislodged. [3]
38
Topic 6 Target and Combat
Games
OBJECTIVES
. aim at stationary targets within a 50m distance
. aim at fast mobile targets within a distance of 50m
. adjust body positions by twisting, tuming, squatting ancljumping
' make fast movements and release energy towards certain directions.
Introduction
Target games are activities in which players send an object toward atargetwhile avoiding any
obstacles. The targets can be at a fixed or stationary position but can also be in movement.
Combat games are those that involve direct contact with the opponent(s). Combat games
make use of body aspect to defeat the opponent.
Aiming and targeting

Targeting and aiming focuses on how to to hit something stationary or moving from a
distance. In target games, different objects are used to aim at stationary or moving targets.
Example of targeting games include: darts, carpet bowls, ring games, target shooting games
and archery games. In target games, athletes develop accuracy and judgment skills when they
send objects towards targets at different distances and also through various obstacles.
This can be achieved;
. through a series of targets.
. by knocking down a variety of targets.
. by aiming attarget surroundedby different.
. by throwing rings at a stationary object.
. by shooting at stationary or moving targets.
Aiming at stationary targets
Aiming at stationary targets helps players to aim and accurately send objects towards targets
which are distances away. Stationary targets are objects that are fixed at one position. A line
where objects would be thrown from is drawn so as to show the marked area in which the
throw is to be performed. No one is allowed to throw after the line or step on it.
When targeting, players can throw or roll the object to the target. Objects thrown by athletes
39
can be of vary in tenns of shape, size and i,,,rigl-rt depending on the type of target garne.
Examples of games that have stationarv tar-qets are darts, bowling, archery and golf.
fit< 6.1 Rowling snd tlflrts
Aiming at mobile targets

Iv4obile targets are moving objects ihat are iiirned from a fixed position. The mobile targets
can be at different distances tiom the thrower, moving at different speeds and moving in
different directions. When aiming at rnobile targets throwers should not go beyond the
titrowitrg lirie. For one to hit a inobiic targct tlic lollow,ing are irnportant:
. Correct tirning and accuracy when airning.
. Proper angle of release.
. Good speed of release.
. Adequate force should be applied.
. Paying attention to the speed of the mobile object.
F'ig 6.2 .lrcherr on o ntoviug object
Combat games
A combat game is a competitive contact sporl where athletes flght against each other. It can
be a one on one fight or it can involves nrore fighters. The fighters can be armed or unarmed
as they attempt to subdue each other. In combar games. rules should always be followed so as
to avoid extreme injuries or e\/en death. Movenrent in combat ganles depends on speed of the
opponent. Combat games require proper n'ei-sl'lt distribution for balance. The wider the base
of supporl, the ntore stable the athlete becomes. It is important to balance the body on both
feet so as to elin:rinate fatigue and impror,e accllracy. Some eramples of cornbat games are
boring. wrestlins. karate,ludo. kick borrns anci kung Fr_r.
#
Stance in combat games
Stance is the change in body positions particularly the legs. This is done when attacking,
defending, advancing or retreating. For a successful stance in combat games the player should:
. Stand properly by spreading feet wider.
. Be in line with the opponent.
. Maintain a stability angle of stance.
. Weight distribution to the feet to have a strong footing.
. Be balanced in stance.
Energy conversions and release
In combat games there is transference of energy from the foot bearing the body weight to
the other which is not so as to achieve a better strike or m()mentum.. That same energy is
transferred from the legs to the hands performing the action. The correct base of supporl
for balance leads to proper transfer of weight from one body part to another as one executes
different skills. This weight transference also aids to energy conversions as they boost the
impact of the skill being performed.
Adjusting body positions
Adjustment of body position depends on how an athlete responds to an opponent and stiil
be able to maintain balance. If the base of support is too naffow there will be limitations in
adjusting the body position. The wider and more solid the base of support is, the more stable
and balanced one will be. Base of support is crucial to stay stable and perform combat skills
well. A comfortable base of support also enables quick foot movement and adjustment of the
body. Such reactions and body movement positions can be achieved by twisting, turning,
squatting and jumping.
Karate stances
Fig 6.3 (ef) Side stance and (right) front stance
Stances are important in karate as they represent the foundation or roots of good technique.
Incredible power is generated by adjusting body positions to maintain proper stances. Good
stances provide balance and power which is necessary in blocking and performing attacks.
41
Activities
1. a) Make use of available resources to make cardboard targets.

b) ln pairs, use a ball to aim at the targets from a distance of 50 metres.
2. Watch videos showing twists, turns and jumps performed in karate and kung Fu on
YouTube.
WORD SPLASH
l. lnten minutes, choose 14 words tion-i the list below that relate to combat and target
galnes.
2. Compose a Jazz song using some of the words belorv.
Judo Scoring Speecis Darts Stance Running airning

balls lormations 'shooting games space injuries kung
tu
bolv and ano\i' siiict\ stai.iouii.ry rnjurics baiancod ciict
karate
Kickboxing safety' stomach rvrestling mobileresuscitation
apparatus hula hoops srvimming veins combatants
digestive svstem
Summary
' ln target games players send an r-bjcct tolvards a target while avoiding any obstacles.
" Gatnes sucir as daris. caq)et bou is. iargc: shor:ting and ring games ere examples of
target games.
" Aiming and accuracy leanit in targ---l games helps in improving chanccs of scoring in
ball garnes.
. Skills taught in cornbat games help learners to defend themselves.
' Combat games involve adjusting body position by turning, squatting and jumping.
' Some of the combat games are wrestling, iucio, karate" fencing, kung Fu and kick-boxing.
Glossary
Combat games - a competitive contact sport that usually involves one-on-one fight.
Grip - a flrm hold of sornething
Stance - the posture or the \\/ay one stand.
Stationary - remaining in sanre ptrsition or not moving.
Target - a person. object ol place selected as the aim of an attack.
Target game - activities in r,vhich piayers send an object towards a target while
avoidirrg any obstacies.
12
1. and are target games.
A. Snooker and archery B. Snooker and karate
C. Karate and judo D. Judo and darts
2. The major objective of target games is
A. to score many goals
B. to aim a given point using an object
C. to show strength
D. power boosting
1
J. is a target game.
A. Netball B. Darts C. Cricket D. Football
4. Which is the correct equipment for a target game?
A. bat B. hockey stick C. arrow D. shooter
5. In target and combat games one should stand
A. In line with the target B. parallel to the target
C. along the target D. opposite with the target
6. The following are combat games except
A. Kung Fu B. karate C. bowling D. fencing
7. Why is a stance mostly important in combat games'?
A. maintains good score B. plays the game
C. provides a good balance D. reduces stress
8. During combat games, body positions can be adjusted by
A. squatting B. sitting
C. running D. throrving
9. Which parts of the body are used to convert and release energy during conrbat
games?
A.legs to eyes B. legs to arms
C. arms to head D. shor"rlders to toes
10. Combat games are performed by combatants.
A. four B. three C. two D. five

1. What are target games? t1l
2. Aiming in target games can be on and _ objects. 12)
3. Give any three examples of target games. t3l
4. How does one score points in target games? l2l
5. What is a combat game? tll
6. State rwo ways in which combatants can adjust their bodies during
performances. l2l
7. In karate
game, the performers use and to
change body positions. 12)
B. Name your two best combat games. 12)
43
Topic 7 Net Games
OBJECTIVES
' perfonn strokes for height, spin, distance and power in relation to time
" strike the ball or object to a target not rnore than 10m ar.vay from the starling point
. strike the ball over a batrier not more than 2m high.
Introduction
The net games are performed by striking objects towards a court or target area whilst the
opponent defends or strikes back. A stroke is created during the process of striking objects and
it can be done by a body part or an object. Dr,rring net game perfonnances, different strokes
are perlormed in relation to height, spin and distance.
Strokes
I'ig 7.1 (ul) A tennis plal,et'sening the ball, (al) ,1volleyball player spiking the ball and (a3) a badminton player
drivitrg u shol
ln net games strokes are pertbmred fbr height and tbr a spin. A stroke is an act of hitting an
object by swinging a irand or leg or an\ spor-ting equipment such as a racket.
41
Strokes performed in Strokes performed in Strokes performed in
volleyball tennis badminton
1. the serve 1. overhead forehand stroke
2. pass 2. forehand ground stroke 2. overhead backhand stroke
3. set 3. backhand ground stroke 3. underarm forehand stroke
4. attack 4. forehand volley 4. underarm backhand stroke
5. block 5. backhand volley
6. die 6. overhead smash
Table 7.1 Strokes
Strokes for height

Strokes for height are performed so as to clear the net when striking a ball or object in net
games. One of the best ways to achieve depth of placement is to aim ground strokes high
over the net. These strokes should be done accurately so as to avoid.the ball or object from
failing into the net. Good players use topspin to achieve high net clearance and keep their shot
out of the opponent's hittin g zofie. A higher ball is also used to neutralise opponent's natural
aggression.
Spin distance
Ball spinning is an important technique that is related to ball control in net games. A correct
ball spin increases a shot's margin for error and affect the bounce of the ball. However, greater
amounts of spin have the most effects on ball flight and bounce. Therefore, ball spin makes
the ball travel faster and thus making the opponent(s) rulnerable in trying to retum it. Ball
spin is mainly used in tennis and volleyball. Types of ball spins include topspin, side-spin and
backspin.
Power in relation to time

Power is a change in energy with respect to time. To improve power, one must also increase
the strength applied when hitting the ball. In net games power applied to the ball or object
changes the direction and distance covered by the ball or object. To generate power athletes
at times jump whilst hitting the object. Power can also be generated with great momentum.
Power gives many advantages in sports such as the ones listed below.
' Power is crucial for success in sports such as volley ball and tennis.
' Power gives athletes the ability to run faster and jump higher during performances.
' During net games the maximum force an athlete applies in preforming strokes,
improves the speed at which the objects and balls travels.
1. Practice how to spin the ball in either tennis or volleyball.

2. Demonstrate how to strike the ball striking of ball over the net which is not more
than 2 metres.
45
3. Execute any type of serve in volleyball or tennis.
CROSSWORD PTJZZLE
Across
L Another tem used to ref-ei'to fbotbal[.
2. The barrier between teams used in volleyball
3. Nurnber of players is a singles tennis rnatch.
4. A term used to refer to hitting the ball in volleyball.
5. Piaying tactic to prevent or block a gcial.
Down
l. Space were the bali is directetl to iir tc.nnis
2. Name given to the field of play in tennis.
3. Equipment used to hit the bail in tennis.
4. Nurnber of players in volieyball garne.
Summary
' Net games are activities in which players strike an object orrer the net towards a court or
tar-eet area that the opponent is defending.
' There are many strokes that are performed dLrring net games such as sen'e, set and smash.
. Net games include volleyball, tennis, table tennis and badminton.
' Players score points whenever the opponent fails to return the ball or object over the net.
46
Glossary
Backspin - a backward spin given to a moving ball.

Net game - sport or game played over a net with a player or team defending space
and at the same time aiming to score.
Spike - the act of scoring a point by slamming the ball over the net into the
opposing court effectively and aggressively.
Side-spin - motion put to a ball that causes it to rotate in the course about its
vertical axis.
Spin - an angular momentum of an object.
Top-spin - a properly of a ball that rotates for-wards as it is moving.

L In net games the object can be sent over the net by __ and
A. bat and ball B. hand and racquet
C. net and ball D. batting and flelding
2. The playing area in net games can also be referred to as
A. score B. net C. court. D. crease
3. and are examples of net games.
A. badminton and basket ball B. badnrinton and netball
C. tennis and table tennis D. volleyball
-.- is the importance of performing high strokes in net games? and soccer
4. What
A. achieving maximum distance
B. keeping the opponent out of reach
C. covering more distance
D. swinging an object with a hand
5. is an example of a skill in net games.
A. chest pass. B. serving C. bowling D. throwing
6. Badminton can be played as
A singles or doubles B. singles only
C. doubles only D. singles or triplets
1 . In which of the net games is a point gained if an object lands once in the opponent's
court?
A. badminton and netball B.
badminton and volleyball
C. tennis and table tennis D. tennis and handball
8.A is used when serving in tennis.
A. hand B.
bat C. ball D.
racket
9. One way of adding energy to strokes is to apply
A. target B. space C. force D.
strength
47
10. A player/team receiving an objcct should all the open space.
A. attack B. serve C. leave D. defend
1. a) What are net games? l2l
b) Give any two examples of net games l2l
2. Name any three strokes performed in net games. t3l
3. What is a top spin in volleyball? l2l
3. Explain the following:
a) spin 121
b) stroke l2l
4. What is power in relation to tirne? l2l
,18
Topic I Striking Games
OBJECTIVES
. explain the difference between applying and receiving fbrce
. time the execution of forehand or backward strokes
' illustrate how the angle at a time of contact with the object affects direction
. demonstrate spin and rebound principles.
Introduction
Striking games involve an interchange in by applying force to sporting equipment such as
bats when attacking and receiving by force when defending. These games tend to develop
major skills such as movement (locomotor), non-moving and manipulative skills. Locomotor
skills enable players to execute forehand and backward strokes. Striking games are also an
excellent way to teaching fundamental skills such as: catching, throwing, running and striking.
Baseball, cricket, softball, kickball and rounders games are examples of striking games. Such
games make use of the grip, stance, foot works and other locomotor movements in their
performances. Striking games are seen to make use of two major techniques which are the
grip and the strike.
Grip
A grip is a way of holding equipment in sport that is used for hitting or striking. Various
gripping methods are used in striking games and each methorj is beneficial in its own way.
Types of grips that are used in striking games.
. cricket-VandOgrip
' baseball - Door knocking knuckles aligned, Ax grip, and the wrapped grip.
. softball - Door knockingknuckles aligned grip
Grip in cricket
In cricket the term grip is used to describe how a a batsman holds the bat with hands.
49
Fig 8.1 l'grip irt cricket (left) ond the O grip itr buseball (right)
Stance
The stance is the postlrre in which a batting player does so as to have the ball bowled to them.
An ideal stance is one in which the entire weight of the batter is distributed evenly on two
legs. In some cases batspersons develop foot. knees and back injuries because of a bad stance.
Proper stance is important when playing striking galnes because it increases the attack angle.
This in turn irnplies that stliking the ball or object '',vill not be strenuous. When batting, the feet
should be apar1. neither too far nor too close.
Fig 8.2 Stance in cricket (left) and baseball (right)
Footwork
Footrvork ret-ers to the movement of tire lront and back foot of the bat person. It results in
the action of transfeming the body rveight in preparation of facing and striking the ball. This
techniqr-re is vital as the batter faces a deliver,v from the opposing bowler or thrower. Applying
the conect footu,ork together u,ith irnproved positioning, the batter can significantly decrease
the load placed on different parts of the body at risky angles. Below are examples of correct
starlces in striking galnes.
50
Fig 8.j Footwork in preparation for striking a ball in softbatl (left) and uicket (right)
Applying and receiving force

In striking games, there is force applied when striking the ball and the ball also has its own
force from the thrower. A force is a pushing or pulling action that can make things move,
change direction, or change shape. Striking a ball involves a pushing force which is r"rsually
applied in the opposite direction from where the ball is corning from. The batter decides on
how much force to put to an incoming ball when it is thrown depending on how further the
batter wants the ball to reach. Force applied by the batter is regulated by a combination of
good grip, stance and correct footwork.
@
ffi
\d*
t\
Fig 8.4 Receiving and applied force
Striking
This is the act of hitting the ball after it is received frorn the thrower. It can be done in many
ways as listed in the table below;
Cricket Baseball
forward stroke Base Hits
back stroke Bunts
leg glance (or glide) Clean Hit
Cut Line Drive
Pull or hook Fly Balls
Square-Ups
Table 8.1 Striking a ball
*51 ..',
+:;.#i''
l,* $'si r"'rrrr":'
*.# e#,
#,,
-
f).q8.,i Forehund stroke in cricket (leli) and striking in busebull (right)
Angie of, strike

'fhc
ar-r-9le at which a batsuran strikes thc ball altects the direction that the ball will take when
hit. Change of direction is mainlv noted in spin balls. When the angle of strike is _ereater,
the spin increases. Likewise. when the ansle is lcssened. the spin decreases. It is of great
intportance to know tlte comect angle to hit zr ball so as to direct it in the desired direction.
i,ffi prefelred
6-H
t
nFa L
Fig 8.6 Changc o.f.bull directiott y,hen hit in cricket sntl itt basebull
,,\ctivities
l. ln groups of 5, practice striking the ballat differentangles. Rotate positions of being

the thrower, batter and catchers. Some learners record the scores in their sports
diaries.
2. Practice different spins when throwing a cricket or baseball ball.
S CRAMBLED SE}.{TEl\C ES
.\iuki: nreaningtul sentences b1' re- arranging the scrambled sentences.
.iilri E\i-inpies striking garnes are rounrler" basebail. sottball oi crickct.
l,\"iren di:-itancc grip striking a lbr' ;rnd stance are considered.
(ilip l is the holclins oI iurnille l;at.
4. In an games runners object striking and throw,kick hit.
5. Two batting have equal fielding of teams and chances in cricket.
6 . run in cricket Scoring called a is.
1. strongest forehand the shot is the.
8. refers back of foot and the movement front to footwork.
9. O- shaped grip two are the V-shaped types of grips and the.
10. critical is position the back .
Summary
. Striking games are activities in which players score by striking an object and running
to designated playing areas or prevent opponents from scoring by retrieving the object
and returning it to stop the play.
. Some striking games are baseball, cricket, rounders and softball.
. Playing striking games enable learners to perform locomotor skills, team work and
parlicipation in the sports field.
Glossary
Batting - the act or skill of hitting the ball with a bat to score runs or prevent
the loss of a wicket.
Bowling - the action of a bowler in sending down balls towards the batters
wicket.
Striking game - activities in which players score points by striking an object and
run to designated playing areas or prevent opponents from scoring
by retrieving the object and returning it to stop the p1ay.
Swing - movement of hands or something held with rotary movement.

1. Striking games are also known as
A. bat and ball games. B. invasion games.
C. net games. D. net and ball games.
2. is an example of striking games
A. soccer B. netball C. hockey D. baseball
3. The following game use a bat except
A. baseball B. cricket C. hockey D. softball
4. The holding of a bat particularly with hands is called
A. footwork B. grip C. recovery D. stance
5. Some of the skills used in striking games are
A. grip, stance, and drive B. grip, stance, and kicking
C. bowling, dribbling, and shooting D. blocking, spiking and serving
53
6. When batting eyes should be kept on the target object that is to be struck. What
is
the target?
A. ball B. bat C. bowler D. fielders
l. are some of the protective equipment in striking games.
A. bat and ball B. ball and helmer
C. helmet and shin pads D. gloves and wicket
8. The main aim of striking games is to
A. to score runs only
B. to fleld the ball onlv
C. to score more runs than the opponent ancl to stop them from scoring runs
D. to ailor,v the opponents score utany rllns
9. Hitting the ball at different angles change s its
_
A. weight B. force C. direction D. colour
10. is not an example of a striking game.
A. Baseball B. Cricket C. Swimrning D. Softball
SECTION B: STRUCTURED eUESTIONS [15 Marks]

L What is the importance of having a corrcct stance when striking?
t1l
2. Give any three examples of striking games
i3l
3. What is stance in striking garnes'l
L2l
4. Erplain the follorving tenns as thev are used in stliking games:
a) front stroke
b) tbotwork L4)
5. Describe the striking process Lrsing bi-iuk..i,aLC stroke.
t3l
6. A score in cricket is called a ___'
t1l
7 - Why is in-rporlant for thc batter to iril the ball to a turthest distance'7
tll
5:l
Topic 9 Adventure Games
OBJECTIVES
. perform mountain climbing and water based activities
. locate points through map reading
. set up camp sites.
Introduction
Adventure games are games that mostly make use of nature and the environment. Such games
develop many skills in athletes such as problem solving and critical thinking. Examples of
adventure games include orienteering, mountain climbing and water based activities. In
addition, these adventure games such as camping and orienteering also develop exploring
skills.
Camping
Fig 9.1 Camping tents
Camping is an adventure game in which participants select, prepare and occupy a temporary
place of stay outdoors. In camping, the place of stay can be in tents or caravans. Camping
equipment such as camping beds, sleeping bags, pocket knife, water containers, flrst aid kit,
maps, weather-suitable clothing and chairs are essential in these camping expeditions. During
camping, cooking and other activities are carried outdoors. Camping is a great way of having
fun and has benefits such as good exposure to fresh air and is a way of boosting vitamin D
since most activities are performed outdoors. Some of the activjties performed during camping
are nature walks, storytelling, tug of war and horse riding.
55
Setting up camp
The following steps are taken when setting Ltp calnp;
a. Finding the perfect site which is preferably flat land with good water drainage.
b. Keeping trash at a distance but water sources close.
c. Maximizing the useftilness of the tent with proper placement.
d. Keeping an organrzed and clean kitchen area.
e. Building a proper campfire
Orienteering
Orienteering is a sport that cornbines runnrn-q. nrap reading and direction finding. The basic
idea in orienteering is to proceed frorl start to finish by visiting several control points with
the help of interpreting maps and cori-rpasses. L)rienteers choose the best possible route by
iooking at the features in the ten'ain. J-he r,vinner of the game is the person r,vho completes
the course in the t-astest tirne. Orienteering is a low'-cost sporl suitable for both genders and
a1l ages. I on-rpetitors ta]<e part indr.,'idrlirllv nr rrl ppil-s or grouns in competitive orienteering.
I:ig 9.2 Orienteering
Benefits of Orienteering
It can be perforrned as a sporl or a recreational activity to keep active and healthy.
Orienteering teaches self-reliance because it is done individually. It sharpens decision
making skills. It lielps to think and act under pressure.
Water-based activities
These are activities that are done on or in water bodies. These include examples that are listed
below:
. Canoeing
Canoeing is a racing sporl that invoives paddling of a canoe and it is usually performed in the
river and lakes. The activity of canoeins is good for strengthening the heart and has impact
on mental health.
56
Fig 9.3 Canoeing
. Surflng
Fig 9.4 Surfing
Surfing is a water sport which is performed on larger water bodies. Surfing involves riding of
breaking lvaves towards the shore of oceans and seas using of a surfboard. The surfer rides
facing of a moving wave, which usually carries the surfer towards the shore. Surfers'skills are
tested by their ability to control their board in difficult conditions such as riding challenging
waves and executing strong turns and cutbacks (turning board back to the breaking wave).
Surfing provides physical work-out and develops good body balance.
. Whitewater rafting
Fig 9.5 lYhitewater rafting
57
Whitewater rafting is a recreational outcioor activity which uses an inflatable raft to sail in the
river or other sources of water. The activity is performed in whitewater or different degrees of
rougl-r water. The experience gained frorn rafting is dealing with risk, working as teammates
and boosting confidence. The movement of paddling tones arrns? the back and shoulders.
. Water skiing
Fig 9.6 Skiing
Water skiin-e is a water sport in which tl-re skier is pulled behind a boat body of water or the
skier holds the handle of the rope that is fixeci on the backside of a boat. The driver of the
motorboat increases speed of the boat r,r,hile the skier has to hold balance on the water surface
by standing on the ski. Water skiing takes place in lakes, rivers and oceans. It promotes strong
legs and tones up legs.
. Scuba clivixlg
Fig 9.7 Scuba cliving
Scuba diving is an aitivity in which a swimrner dives in water and stays underwater for
extended periods of tirne using Self Contained Underwater Breathing Apparatus, hence
the acronym Scuba. Scuba divers cany these apparatus for source of breathing gas, usually
colnpressed air. They aliow them greater inciependence and lieedom of movement and longer
rundenr,ater etrdu ra n c e.
hlountaineering
llloitntaineering is also knor,vt.t rls rllolnrtain clirnbing. The spolt is for attaininq or attemptin_u
to reach high poittis ili tnountainou: regir-rns liir tire pieasure of the climb. lVlountaineering
58
activities help learners by strengthening their feet, heart and lungs. It also stimulates brain
activity and helps to build team work as it can also be done as a team. The sport is more
restricted to climbing in localities where the terrain and u,eather conditions are safe and a
certain amount of experience is necessary. Mount Nyangani is ideal for mountaineering.
Fig 9.8 Mountaineering
For the untrained, mountaineering can be dangerous if not mastered properly and should be
done with the assistance of an instructor. The athletes are expected to climb rocks protected by
belay rope and sometimes belay each other. For safefy, helmets and harresses must be worn
at all times.
Abseiling
Abseiling is the opposite of climbing and is also known as rappelling. It involves the use of
a specialised rope as one descends down a steep terrain. The ropes enable one to descend
in a
controlled and effective manner. Once the rope is secured and the climber is safely attached,
one can descend slowly in a controlled manner.
Fig 9.9 Participants of abseiling game
It is advisable to execute smooth movements when abseiling since jerky movements are
dangerous. A special knot called the figure of B is used on the abseiling device for
safety.
Participants should have the right harness which allows thern to connect to a friction
device
which allows one to descend in a controlled way. Helmets are required as a safety measure in
case anything above them gets dislodged.
59
Activities
1. Use an atlas to practice map reading.

2. Watch a PowerPoint presentation on water based activities, mountaineering and
abseiling.
3. As a class take a nature walkin a nearby park area with the guidance of a teacher.
Capture photos using any ICT tools or make drawings.
WORD SEARCH
Make use of the word list below to find the hidden words on adventure games.
ORIENTEERING ABSEILING MOUNTAINEERING CANOEING AILAS
CLIMBERS CAMPING COMPASS MAP ADVENTURE
A M o U N T A t N E E R I N G B C
E D T S C A N o E I N G L R M H L
C R V o R I E N T E E R I N G K I
A F Y E G N w \' VI K E Y K Y L L M
M A U D N A B S Lr I T
L
II N G D o B
P W T F H t R Jr
L-] t' o M P A S S T E
I E (] L j M U j B M G H M H R E R
N R P F A o S R A N L A H K S A S
G F K L M S N A E X P H C D o M H
Summary
. Adventure games are exciting outdoor activities. however they can be dangerous
because they involve extreme speeds and heights.
. The grcat rvay of having fun and at the sarle time keeping physically fit is participating
in adventure games.
. Sonre cif tire adventure games are carnping, orienteering, mountaineering, abseiiing and
different \\iater activities such as raft btrilding.
. The act of settin_q Llp camp sites and camping is a very exciting experience and it helps
in team bLrilding.
. Map reading rvrth the aid of a compass i-s an irnportant skill that is performed during
adventure games.
i;ii
GlossarY
Abseiling - a controlled descent off a vertical drop such as a rock faces using
a rope.
Adventure - unusual experience but exciting activities-
Belay - fix or pin (a rope or cable) by winding it around a person to
secure rt.
Expedition - a j ourney taken by a group of people with a particular purpose,
especially that of exploration, research or war.
Mountaineering - set of activities that involve climbing mountains with the aim of
attaining high points mainly for the pleasure of the climb.
Orienteering - an activity of direction finding and map reading whilst moving
or running usually in an unfamiliar terrain.

1. Camping is an activity.
A. stadium B. indoor C. in water D. outdoor
2. What is the importance of using a cooler box during camping?
A. to carry household goods
B. to carry special types of goods
C. for storing perishable items like meat
D. to carryz special tYPes of bags
3. Mountaineering activities help in strengthening one's
A. knees B. feet C. back D. shoulders
4. Adventure night camping involves activities such as
A. rock climbing
B. climbing a mountain
C. making fire in the middle of the night
D. bicycle riding
5. Which water based activity uses breathing apparatus during the game?
A. surfing B. whitewater rafting
C. scuba diving D. canoeing
6. Orienteering game makes use of
A. ropes and bags B. compass and maps
C. torches and helmets D. paddles and skii
61
7. What is the nal11e of the adventure activitv shown in the picture below?
,*:i
A. boating
B. rowing
C. canoeing
D. whitewater raftins
8. The lollowing equipment is used by the rock climber except

A. compass B. rope C. helmet D. atlas
9. Abseiling involves the activity of
A. climbing up rocks and mountains
B. negotiatin-q various terrains
C. clirnbin_e down tire rrountains and rucks
D. hunt in the forest
10. is a vehicle ecluipped for shelter during carnping.
A. Car B.Bus C. Caravan D. Lo.ry
SECTION B: srRUClruRED eUESTI0NS [15 Marks]
1. Give any 4 exarnples of adventure games
l4l
2. What is camping? t1l
3. Give any two benefits of carnping '?
121
4. What are water based activities? 121
5. Identify any two equipment used in orienteering games. 12)
6. State any four pieces of equipment used during mountaineering? t4l
62
Topic 10 Educational
nastics
OBJECTIVES
. explore relationships with partners, groups and apparatus in balances, weight
transfer and space.
Introduction
Educational gymnastics is all about body management, balance and teamwork. It focuses
on non-competitive and creative approaches to movement. In educational gymnastics each
gymnast is challenged to solve problems, develop body management skills, and create
movements at an appropriate level.
-r:::ta.=';.- '4?4::::i:a::.|
.1 t:-:.-.':3
,|i..,,,,id
Fig 10.1 Educational gymnastics
Locomotion
Balance
Balances are performances that require a gymnast to hold their bodies still and maintain an
even distribution of weight. Balance include static and dynarnic. Both these forms of balances
are done at stationary or axial (non-locomotion) positions. Balances can be performed
individually, in pairs or in groups.
63
Individual balances
These are balances that are done by one person. fhey involves weight transference when
one
changes the position of the balance. One can balance on large body parts such as legs,
hands
or back. One can aiso balance on small body parts such as fingers, side of the foot or toes.
(-'t':
:-- ti,,i.,'1.: -t.- -\'.^
':-';rr;
r!!i,1:*-\")**- J;;:]*A *
o
'l'iir',r, ii
i ,4
.7.: ,a_
i"r" ,\
';"-): j tl .r
'e:-/7
"! ,-i'*----, .,]',,f1
-
-':{} : 11
:}
-\.ri';
{,:r,!'-.i\,, i
Fig 10.2 Intlividlal balances
Pair balances
fY3,
v-.. I
/,r
ll !,.
,
!'' \'.
\'
f.. . "'...
I
\- qr*J.r-'.
*,j
^\.{*'\
Fig 10.3 Exanrples o./'pair bslance
Pair balances involve two gymnasts depehdin-e orr each other to maintain balances. They can
be of one pafiner canying the other. They can also involve leaning on each other for balance.
Group balance
t, "r*s"
*\ t* #
!T
fl
I! li
Group ba,ances.",:,:", :',:;':;:;:::;:':,:;",^

-':,',';;::,n coordinated and
strategic positions. Balances can be 2-point, 3-point or 4- point which refers to balancing on
the number of body parts. For example one can balance on head and hands.
64
Balancing on apparatus
Fig 10.5 Gymnast balancing on a hulancing beam
Apparatus such as beams or boxes can be introduced in perfr:nning balances. Balancing on

apparatus requires practice and precision so as to avoid injuries. These balances can be done
individually, in pairs or in groups.
Weight transfer
Weight transfer or weight change is the movement of weight from one body part to another.
This can be achieved in many ways such as weight change from hands to feet. Rolling is also
an example of transferring weight.
Back roll
Tpffi @d
Fig 10.6 Back roll
ww
Weight transference during a back roll starts from the feet to the back, the hands then the feet
again.
t
Front or forward roll
li
I )f
lO
r p Ju'{r
Fig 10.7 Front or forward roll
65
A tbrward roll invloves moving from the stariing position into a roll and getting back on the
f-eet again. weight transference is illustrated in the diagrarn above.
Cartwheels
Fig 10.8 C'urtwheels

A cartr.vlteei is a sideways rotary rnovelnent in ..r,hich one turxs completely over by throwing
the body sideu'ays on hands while bringing legs over your head ending with the athlete
standing Lrpright. During a cart'uvheei. tlie *,ei::ht is transferred from tlie feet to the hands.
The hands ther-r spring the bocly lvrth botir han,.1s and iegs extended and then transt'erring the
wcight back to tlie t-eet.
Activities
Practice and discover at least 5 ways ol baiancing in;

a) pairs
b) groups
CTR.CUT'-f,- STATIOI\S
{lomplete the gr rtnastics circu!r sturir;i: br !'illing in the gaps with any fwo body parts
used in perlbrming the tbiioll'irig ioconrotor anri non-locomotor movements.
f-r. __l
/ )1,____J
Pair balances
10. )
Climbing grou pba lances
.1,
3.
Cartwheels hala ncing on apparatus
.1,
f- &
ll Squatting
--) 4.
Lck ro lls
..l,
5.
JumPing reaping
,1f-----l I
t"l(
Front rolls
Summary
' Educational gymnastics develop coordination and body awareness.
. Forms of balances include static and dynamic balance.
' Back rolls, front rolls and cartwheels are ways of transferring weight to different body
parts.
Glossary
Balance - holding of the body still.

Cartwheel - when a gymnast rotates to one side or the other while keeping
arms and legs outstretched.
Gymnastics - physical performance displaying body agility and coordination.
Locomotion - any form of body movement; action repeated over and over while
travelling.
Sequence - linking body movements.
67
1. What is locomotion'?
A. movement B. weight C. balance D. formation
2. Which of the following is an example of locomotion activities'/
A. standing B. baiancing C. hopping D. sitting
3. Identify the type of locomotion sholvn be1ow.
A. backward roll B. incline roll

C. for-ward roll D. shoulder roll
4. What is educational gymnastics'l
A. its leaming about body management
B. its cornpetitive
C. its acrobatic
D. its artistic gymnastics used rn miiitary
5. The following are i,r,eight transfer activities except
A. back roils
B. carlwheels
C. sqLratting
D. front rolls
6. Which of the following is an example of- small body part used in balances
A. shoulders B. chest
C. toes D. fummy
1. Standing on both feet is an exarnple of a balance
A. I point B. 3 point C.2point D. 4 point
tt. Weight transt-erence in cartrvl-reel is fronr
A. hands to leet
B. fbet to irands
C. f-eet only
D. hands only
9. Gyrnnasts can balance on during their performances
A. r,vood B. card boxes
C. siipperf mats D. beai-r-rs
68
10. In a head stand below, the body parts used for balancing are
A. hands
Stomach and B. Head and hands
C. Feet andhead D. Hair and Head
SECfION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS [15 Marks]

1. Name at least 4 fypes of locomotor movements. l4l
2. Give three ways of performing balances. t3l
3. Describe an asymmetrical balance in gymnastics. l2l
4. Explain why a gymnast is encouraged to wear proper attire? l2l
5. State 2 possible causes of injuries in gymnastics. l2l
6. Give two reasons why educational gymnastics is important. L2l
69
Study area 3:
Mass Display
Topic 11 Music
OBJECTIVES
' record music that can be used as backgi'ound music in relation to given themes
' combine own songs with recorded rnLrsrc as background music in relation to themes.
Introduction
Music can stirnulate enjoyment. sin-eing and rvithout doubt. movement. This movement can
be randonr but can also be organised in relation to the music into a performance. Music
therefore creates a rich environment for phy'sica1 activities. Physical activity rnovements are
done in relation to one's own mnsic or bv irnitating already recorded music in the background.
The background tnusic is usually guided oi'relateci to a given theme to be used in the physical
activities.
Background and performing rnusic

Use of music
Mtrsic has the ability to motivate mol'ernent and speed in physical education. Music can
be r-rsed for two main purposes in mass displays. [t can be used as background music or
performance music.
Background and perlbrming music
Backgrotind rnr"rsic is rnusic that is plat'ed as one is doing any physical activity. It is played
r-rot just fbr enjoyment but also lor various reasons that help one in executing the physical
activities. Uses of background mr,rsic in mass dispiays are as flollows;
7{l
. It motivates, stimulates and inspires one into doing a physical activity r,vith ease and
enjoyment
. It guides and provides patterns movement in mass displays though its rhythms.
. It can be used as a timer guiding the duration of a workout and therefore replacing a clock.
. It arouses the mood and enhances performance.
. There is increase in workout endurance when listening to workout tracks.
. It reduces stress and anxiety.
. Listening to music can help one decrease stress level.
How to record background music

Music recording is a process that has many steps and requires full knowledge of how the
recording process works. However, background music for any mass displays activity can be
composed and recorded with ease when guided. Music can be recorded using ICT tools such
as cellphones, tablets and voice recorders. These tools have the ability to capture audio from
aimost any sound source. These devices have a recording button which is switched on when
the recording process is about to begin. It is switched off when the sound has been captured.
After the recording, the sound flle is then saved on to the device used to record the sound and
used for any desired purpose. However, the recording of background music can be done in a
professional way.
b---
Fig 11.1 ICT tools that can be used to record music (from left), Cellphone. tablet and voice recorder
Performing Music
Music can be composed for a specific type of performance. Performance music is therefore
music made in relation to a specific theme. A theme is a subject matter or an idea that is
required to be brought out by a performance. Therefore, theme-related or thematic music in
physical education helps a performance in bringing out the topic or message in the theme.
When creating music for a theme-related performance, one has to fully understand the theme.
This is because themes are always different and the choice of music helps in bringing out the
theme. Own music can therefore be combined with other recorded music in bringing out a
theme. This is done through selecting the right music for each and every stage of the mass
display performance. This combined music together with selected dance performances jointly
bring out the theme through the performance.
7t
Background music in relation to themes
Background music can be composed in relation to given themes. The musical
composition is often written speciflcaily for a radio programming, television shows, video
games or films. They are played during the opening, closing of programmes and in
solxe instances during the prograrn. Theme-related songs can be used as background
music in sporting activities, on sports channels and for fitness awareness campaigns.
Different musicians can compose bacl<ground music for example, Tanga WekwaSando's
song 'Vskomona Vekwedu ' was composed speciflcally for the Zimbabwean National
Football Team and is usually played on radio whenever the team is engaged in a game.
Activities
1. Compose and record a song you would use as background music for the
theme: " My Education, My Right, My Future
Explain your choice of song(s) in relation to the theme.
2. In groups of '15, create a mass displays performance and perform with a band using
the music you made in activity 1. You can also combine it with any other recorded
music.
MATCHWORKS
Fill in the table below and compare your answers.
Questions Own answers Friend's answersl If
friend's answer matches
with your answers write
their names below
l. Which type of music
do you prefer?
2. What is your
favourite singer or
band?
3. Name your best
musical instrument.
4. Do you like to sing?
Name the son
5. If you could n-reet
any musician who
would it be?
Do you play an
instrument? What
the instrument?
7. Name your most
lar so
72
Questions Own answers Friend's answers; If
friend's answer matches
with your answers write
their names below
8. Where do you listen
music from?
9. What do you enjoy
about your favourite
type of music?
10. Where does your
favourite music
originate from?
Summary
. Music can be used as background or performance music in physical education.
. Background music has the ability to stimulate and arouse the mood for a physicai activity.
. Own music can be combined with recorded music in creating thematic music.
. Dance and music can be combined in a performance to bring out a theme.
Glossary
Choreography - An organised dance routine usually in relation to a theme

Chord progression - The way music flows
Enhance - Boost or improve
Rhythm The movement of sound
Routine - An organised sequence of movements
Stimulate - To motivate
Theme - Subject matter or idea
Workout - A training drill or aerobic exercise

1. What is stimulated by background music?
A. Movement B. Fitness C. Recording D. Theme
2. Which of the following is a musical factor?
A. Money B. Endurance C. Rhythm D. Power
-). can arouse a good physical fitness mood.
A. Flexibility B. Music C. Routine D. Clock
73
4. Music made for a show or presentation is called music.
A. recorded B. performance C. contemporary D. paid
5. is the stage'nvhen one selects instruments to play in the song
during the recording process.
A. Arrangement B. Mixing C. Mastering D. Tracking
6. Adding digital effects ro a song is called
A. overdubbing B. mastering C. drumming D. arranging
1 . Music that brings out a required message or meaning is called music.
A. thematic B. paid C. recorded D. dance
8. is a fitness aspect that is developed through dance.
A. Time B. Patience C. Award D. Endurance
9. Music can be used to replace a during a workout.
A. teacher B. radio C. clock D. machine
10. Music can be combined with in bringing out a theme.
' A. dance B. time C. bndurance D. coordination
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS It5 Marksl

1. Define the following as used in mass displays,
a) Physical activity
b) Workout
t3l
2. State trvo factors that makes music to be suitable for use as background music
during a physical activity. L2l
3. Give any two uses of background music in physical education. l)1
L-l
4. outline the process of recording backglound music for mass displays. l)1
L- I
5. Explain how rnusic and dance can jointly bring out a theme. 121
6. What is the difference between background and performance rnusic. l2l
7. Erplain how a song can be helpful during a workout. L2l
74
Topic 12 Background Art
OBJECTIVES
' design shapes, pictures and symbols appropriate for given themes
' decorate shapes, pictures and symbols suitable for given themes
. mount art on boards or books
. display art depicting given themes.
Introduction
Art brings life and meaning to objects. Background art is art that establishes any desired
mood or character of the surrounding or environment. Background art can be theme related.
In such cases, the art will show a resemblance that portrays er specific mood and environment
as required by the theme. Art can also bemounted on various materials. When mountecl, it can
then be displayed. The mounts can also be used to create background art in physical education.
Patterns
A pattern is an arrangement or design in which there is repetition of visual elements such as
shapes and colours. Patterns can be seen in background art. It can be found in many patterns
or forms such as shapes, pictures or symbols.
Shapes
A shape is a structural figure or the outline of an object. Basic shapes include a circle, triangle,
square and a rectangle. Shapes can be designed in many ways and can also be joined together
to create varied objects or structures as shown below.
sI
h
'7:
Fig 12.1 Examples of shape designs
"uid
75
Pictures
A picture is a drawing, sketch, painting, photogrctph or a diagram. A pictorial illustration can
be designed using any of the techniques mentioned above.
' .i .
Fig 12.2 Exantples of pictorial illustrations
Symbols
A symbol is anything in the form of a mark, sign.or character that represents an object or an
idea. A symbol is desi gned based on a subject or theme as illustrated below.
B 2l) ;tJ r '-'i-'..
{* -.1 V
'il
'p 6) s
-1
-"4
,,".'*.''
'^i
i;''lt
\#g\
,/o
rynd
-"4:-
,4\u
| ',u r/ t4rl
-41
'.-.f'.
Fig 12.3 S),mbols sho*'ing various sporting activities
Thematic art
A tliemc is an idea or subject expressed and revealed througli arlistic images. A rvork of art
commurricates an idea visually. However, themes vary and a work of art should be able to
capture any given theme. When designing an artwork, one has to include illustrations that are
in line with the theme as shown in the examples below,
F'ig 12.1 Exornples oJ'uri *'iii, i;i,!)ires snd visusl illustrations
i\'[ounts
Artu,orks can be displayed u4ren they arc hnisiied. For this io happen they shoulci be placcci
or1 a rnouilt. fu{omiinfl lneans that rhs ar1 is siuck ontc a r:i.eid backing boarrl anci lirso has a
j:it1
gla:;s that co\/eis the r,,rrincioy,/ l-ltr)iini. r'\. i'ti,,i, clrl itisi; i:e :"tscci .is a baci'.ili: ,r ,,'-,.
serves to protect artworks from bending, curling, wrinkling, rapid changes in temperature and
humidity.
Fig 12.5 Blank mount and Mounted art
Art displays
An art display is a place where finished artworks are showcased. An art display can also be
called an art exhibition. After mounting art, it is then collected with other pieces and displayed
for people to view. They are usually displayed on walls. Below are examples of art displays.
Fig 12.6 Art dkplays in an exhibition
Activities
1. Design and decorate using locally available materials an artwork on the theme of
Gender and Equality in Sport.
2. Create a simple mount using any locally found hard materials for a board and mount
your artwork.
POP QtJrZ
You have exactly 5 minutes to complete this quiz sectio;n...tick tock!!!
1. What is background art?
2. What is a pattem in art?
3. Give 3 examples of patterns.
4. What is a theme is art?
5. What factors can one use to bring out a theme in art?
6. What is a mount?
7. What is the other name for an art display?
8. What is the function of a mount in art?
77
9. What is a symbol in art?
10. Where are finished artworks displayed?
Summary
' Background art is used to create a desired environment in the surroundings.
. Shapes, pictures and symbols can be used as patterns in creating art.
. Artworks can be done in accordance to a given theme.
. Mounting art of rigid boards protects artworks.
. Art exhibitions are places where finished artworks are displayed.
Glossary
Mount - A frame onto which an artwork is placed.

Portray - To show or describe.
Resemblance - Similarity
Showcase - To display
SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE [10 Marksl

i. Background art is able to create a desired
A. theme B. surrounding C. art D. paint
2.A is a design in which there is a repetition of visual elements.
A. pattern B. display C. rhythm D. symbol
3. A is an outline of an object.
A. symbol B. picture C. colour D. shape
4,Shapes,1ines,symbolsandcoloursareallexamplesof-.
A. themes B. displays C. drawings D. patterns
5. The message in an artwork is referred to as the
A. theme B. mix C. background D. pattern
6. _.
A board onto rvhich an artwork is placed is called the
A. pattern B. mount C. exhibition D. display
7. Dispiaying of artworks is done at the
A. theme B. park C. exhibition D. wall
8. A mount protects artworks from _.
A. time B. curling C. thieves D. flying
9. The follow:ng are examples of pictorial illustrations except
A. drawing B. painting C. symbol D. sketch
10. One quality of a mount is that it should
A. rigid B. flexibie C. soft D. colourful
,I
SECTION B: STRUCTURED euES'rIoNS [15 Marksl
1. Define the following terms as used in art;
a) Symbol
b) Mount
c) Pattern
t3l
2. State the importance of background art.
12)
3. Illustrate an example of a pattern in art.
t3l
4. What is meant by the term thematic art?
t2l
5. What is a theme in art?
t1l
6. Give two benefits of mounting artworks?
t2l
7. Why is an art display important?
12)
79
Topic 13 Arena Acts
OBJECTIVES
. change space and direction with varying rhythm
. perform challenging leveI variations
. perform challenging rhythmic variations
" display through fcrmations that depict rd,.ir:ational" social and econorttic issues.
Introduction
Arena acts involve moverlent of the body in space. f'his movement is usually guided and
organised. The organisational structure of movement is based on thelhythm of the music as
well as the space. Various forms of rnor rntent lrre practiced. Some cau be random and others
can be speciflcally organised or choreographed. Such choreograpired movements illustrate
various formations in their nature during arena acts.
Movement and rhythm

Movement is the way in which the body travels in motion within a provided space. This
motion is usually guided by a rhythm set by background music.
Movement to cover space and direction
Movement is done within space. Space is the location of a performance. Any mass displays
should be done within the boundaries of the marked space. During movement, performers can
alter how they use the space.
Fig l3.I Movement in mass dkPlaYs
80
Movements can be done stylishly from using half of the space, all of it or the middle part of
the space. These changes are made possible through directional changes by performers. The
movement styles can be the same but performers execute them in different directions as a
body and fill up the whole space. They execute this stylishly and creating various patterns
vertically, diagonally, horizontally or circular with changes in direction. Common movement
is in the form of walking, running, marching, shuffiing and dancing.
Varying rhythms using complex themes
Movement can change in many ways as guided by rhythm. Changes in rhythm are in turn
guided by the theme of the movement. Movement themes are designed to combine concepts
into acfual activities on the floor within space. Movement themes include body u*u."r.rr,
space awareness, location, force, direction, time, levels, pathways, extensions effort and flow
relationships.
Choreography
Mass displays performances can be done in an organised nlanner rather than being random.
This creation of arranged and organised movement patterns for a performance is callecl
choreography. Choreography can make use of the AB, ABA and rondo sequences as well as
retrograde in developing a choreographed performance.
Combined arena movements with variations
{3
'. .t
'"e
il.'
'tr
*
Fig 13.2 Choreography performances illu;strating dffirent variations

Arena movements involve both axial and locomotor movements that are choreographed in
many varied ways. Axial movements involve swinging, tilting, tuming, shaking, rotating,
bending, pulling, falling, twisting, stretching and reaching. Locomotorlmovements include
marching, sliding, running, shuffiing, rolling, walking, skipping, jumping, hopping, crawling
and leaping. These movements can be selected and combined stylishly and thematically
into a choreographed performance. In such a case, the movements are executed following a
designed choreography pattern or format that makes the performance organised. Chor.ogruphy
movement combinations can be executed changing the plane, direction or rhythm. For
example, shuffiing can interchangeably be performed vertically, diagonally or horizontally. In
addition it can be done with different rhythmic changes.
81
Formations
Movements can be done in such a way that produces clear arrangements, forms, structures
or patterns. Such movements are called formations. These formations are created by mostly
locomotor movements.
Combined movement and choreography with complex formations

Mass display movements and dance can be choreographed into formations and patterns. These
formations form patterns that can be symmetrical or asymmetrical in how they appear. Simple
formations include patterns like simple shapes circles, lines and letters. Such formations are
created by locomotor movements of performers into such formations within space.
:l .
"+
n
- re
{ t! r,i -
je .rlr I
!a
r:
;iC(l .i.i.-f* '.' :i;
,i 0
tr ':1 "f
I, ' jl" rr
't tr
r
i! ,tr.t 4i
\i !f r.r
t"t '!'r - ritl uI I r-{
u
, .tS{
ll r i
Fig 13.3 Examples of simple lineformations
Simple formations can be combining together with choreographies into more complex
formations that depict various themes. These thernes can be educational, economic or social.
Examples of complex formations are illustrated below;
Star formation Circular formation
heart formation
Fig t 3.4 Examples of complex formations
82
Activities
1. a) Using chalks or any other safe objects, mark out space for mass
displays performances.
b) ln groups of 10, interchange marching, walking and shuffling within
the marked space in relation to the rhythmic changes played on
drums by the rest of the group
2. create choreography with a social theme of "Unity"and include the following;
a) Rhythmic changes
b) Directional changes
c) Simple formation
WORD SPLASH
1. In ten minutes, choose 14 words from the list below that relate to arena acts.
2. Write a poem titled 'Mass displays at Zimbabwe National youth
Games, using
some of the words from the list below.
choreography Scoring dance footwork

rhythms balls line formations shooting games space varying safety
stationary organised balanced diet directi,n striking mobile
change mass displays accurate apparatus patterns diagonally
swimming dancing forward combatants locomotor
movements marching distance
Summary
. Arena acts focus on movement within space
' Movement is guided by rhythm and can change directi.n within space
' Choreography is when movement is organised into patterns for a perfornance
' Movement in choreography can change in plane, direction and rhythm
' Movement sequences can be developed to form simple and compiex patterns
and
formations
Glossary
Arena acts - Performances within a marked area

Asymmetrical - Irregular or uneven or unbalanced
Axial - Stationary or at a flxed position
Execute - To carry out
Locomotor - Movement
Shuffiing - Walking slow and dragging the feet
Symmetrical - Regular or even or proportional or equal
83
SECTION A: MULIIPLE CHOICE [10 Marks]
l. Arena acts entails bodily movements in
A. theme B. space C. afi D. dance
2. The trotion of the body in space is called
A. pattern B. display C. rhythm D. symbol
3. The marked area where mass displays are executed is called
A. symbol B. picture C. space D. shape
4. is an example of a movement.
A. Shuffiing B. Displaying C. Praying D. Pointing
5. An exarnple of a lnovement therne is
A. force B. therne C. background D. pattern
6. Creation and organisation of movement sequences is called
A. pattern B. choreography C. exhibition D. dance
1. is an example of a movement sequence.
A. Retrograde B. Sliding C. Axial D. Moonwalk
8. Movement that creates ciear arangelrlel)ts of objects or perfonners creates a
A. formation B. art C. background D. move

9. Movements that occur at a stationary position are referred to as
A. locomotor B. theme C. symbol D. axial
10. an example of a locomotor movement.
A. Bending B. Marching C. Reaching D. Stretching

1. What is rneant b_v" the tenn arena acts'l 12)
2. State the meaning of the folloiving;
a) Space awareness
b) Space
c) Formation t3l
3. Explain the function of rhythm in movement. 12)
4. Define the tern-r choreography. 121
5. What type of formation is shown by the illustration beiow? l2l
6. Explain how a tbrmation can bring out a theme. 12)

1. Explain why it is necessary to mark out tl-re space. 12)
84
@
To pic l" Historv of arts nnd culture
..
OBJECTI1IES
Learners should be able
identify music ofAfrica and other parts of the worid
classifu instruments of different cultures
perform music from diverse genres and cultures
identify musicians who sing songs on health issues
compose songs on health and other social issues
play indigenous and foreign musical instruments.
Introduction
Music is seen to be diverse and mainly culture oriented. It can be noted that Africa and the
world at large has many different musical genres which also illustrate culfural diversity within
them. This is seen through orientation of rhythms and musical instruments of the different
genres. Though musical instruments are different the world over, they can be universally
classifled according to the way they produce sound. Musicians make use of these musical
instruments when composing and perfonning their songs which are noted to address many
subject matters that include social and health issues.
Culrural siil'ersiff in the music CIf the rnsdern world

Music as an art involves lnany varied creative styles in composing and arranging songs. This
leads to the creation of vast types of musical genres with rvhich cultural diversity can be seen
and is dominant. This is so because fi1&n1, different cultures of the world have their own way
in'which their music is arranged.
1l 1:rr sll' ffi tt.lic

\unqufa
This genre becarne popular in Zirnbabwe in the iate 1970s. Its origins rest in the Kanindo type
of rnusic tiom Kenya which was brought by freedom fi-uhters to Zimbabwe. It also borrowed
sorte rhythms fror-n the Rhumba music of tl"re Detnocratic Republic of Congo (DRC). Locai
artists then tused Zirnbabu,ean rhvthms inic Kanindo music and developed Sungura music.
ln Zimbabwe, Sungura music was popularised by artists like Ephraim Joe, Alick Macheso,
System Tamida, John Chibadura, Nicholas Zacharia, Simon Chimbetu and many more.
Sungura music is nicknamed museve and has a common dance pattern called chibhasikoro.
Chibhasikoro footwork Alick Macheso a popular Sungura artist

Jiri
This is originally a traditional dance type of music of the VaKorekore people of Zimbabwe.
It is characterised by a varieff of fast traditional rhyhms played on at least three traditional
drums. The music is now popularised by contemporary artists as they fuse it with guitars but
still maintain the traditional and indigenous rhythms. This type of music has been popularised
by musicians such as Baba Harare with his famous songs such as "The reason why" and
"Generaior".
Baba Harare performing Jiti on stage Typical Jiti drumming

Kanindo
It is a type of music that is closely related to
Sungura in terms of rhythm but it is however
different from it. Kanindo is a type of Rhumba and it is originated from Kenya in the 1970s.
The genre is well known for its unique fast rhythm beat that moves in harmony with a
churning lead guitar that often plays the tune of the vocals. It was popularised by fhares
Oluoch Kanindo, hence the name of the genre, Kanindo. He was an influential music producer
and attracted many congolese artists because of his skills.
fsr..I
\^-./
Christopher Maryserah Ken Wa Maria
llbira iVlusic
It is a traditional and sacred music type of the Shona people of Zimbabwe. It is characterised
'by playing of the Mbira instrument which is fbund in many types such as Nyunganyunga,
Nhare, Matepe and Njari and also has the Hosho instrument as an accompaniment. This
type of music rvas originally performed at ritual ceremonies srrch as installation of kings
and kurova guva. However, artists have contemporised this type of music and now perform
it incorporating other western instruments like guitars, drums and keyboards. Despite the
contemporary aspect, the rhythms of the music are stillmaintained. Mbira was popularised by
rnusicians like Hope Masike, Mbira DzeNharira, Mbuya Stella Chiweshe, Dumisani Maraire
Ephat Mujuru and the late Chioniso Maraire.
Hope Masike Mbira dzeNharira
Country music
Country music takes its roots from old-time music and blues. It originated in the 1920s
in Southern United States of America. Country music often consists of ballads and dance
tunes with generally simple forms, folk lyrics, and harmonies mostly accompanied by string
instruments such as banjos, electric and acoustic guitars, steel guitars such as pedal steels and
dobros and fiddles as well as harmonicas. It is also known as western music. Popular country
musicians are Shelton Blake, Kenny Rodgers and Dolly Parton.
A
i.!.*:
Blake Shelton Typical country music performers

Rhythm and Blues [RnB]
Rhythm and Blues is a genre that has its origins in funk and hip hop music
styles. It is mainly
characterised by a distinctive record production style, drum machine-backed
rhythrns, pitci,
corrected vocals, and a smooth, lush style ofvocal arrangement. It originated
in the United Siates
ofAmerica and has seen vocalists making use of melisma and these include popular
vocalists
likes Michael Jackson, Stevie Wondeq Whitney Houston, Mariah Carey urd
B.yorce. other
artists tend to merge Rhythm and Blues together with pop and Hip
Hop music.
Kelly Rowland Mariah Carey

Rhumba
This type of music is of Congolese origin and is popular in most parts
of Africa especially in
East Africa. It is seen to have many forms whichinclude Soukos, Ndombolo, Mbokamboka,
Kwasakwasa and Makossa. The music is characterised by upbeat,
fast, and ;;;;;;;;;i;
emphasis on the off-beats, and features complex polyrhyihms,
or multiple rhythmic patierns.
The music was popularised by the likes of ron oiomide, yondo
SisteE pepe Kale, Awilo
Longomba, Diamond Musica and Diamond Platinum. In Zimbabwe,
the music is also being
popularised by artists local artists such as like Juntal
E
Koffi Olomide Awilo Longomba
Kwaito
It is a form or Hip House that originated in South Africa in the 1980s. It is closely
linked to House music but however, it has a slower tempo range than other styles of
house music. Kwaito contains catchy melodic and percussive loop samples, deep bass lines,
and vocals. Despite its similarities to hip ho_p music, Kwaito has a distinctive manner in which
the lyrics are sung, rapped and shouted. It was popularised by artists like Mandoza, TK Zee
and Bongo Maffin.
Bongo Maffin Mandoza
Jazz nnusic
Jazz rs a form of music that originated in the African-American communities in the United
States of America. The distinctive elements of jazz include characteristic rhythm patterns,
harmonic practices related to, but not identical with, functional harmony, and the practice
of improvisation. Jazz has influenced, and has been influenced by, traditional classical
music and popular music. Popular Jazz arttsts include Billie Holiday and Wynton Marsalis.
Instruments played rn jazz music are usually trumpets, saxophone, piano, cello and bass.
Billie Hoiiday Wynton Marsalis

Classical music
This is music of Western origins with musical styles from the ninth century to present
day' This type of music is popular in European cultures especially in
Vienna, Austria. It is
mainly played by orchestras in concert halls. Classical music mostly consists
of symphonies,
concerti, sonate and opera. Instruments that are characteristic of classical music
are string,
woodwind, brass and percussion instruments. The defining characteristics
of classical music
are as follows:
. It has an emphasis on elegance and balance.
' It has short well-balanced melodies and clear-cut question and answer phrases.
' It is found mainly in simple diatonic harmony and it makes use of contrasting
moods.
' It dominated by homophonic texfures in both melodies and accompaniment
:;:
a{ i
{
.*
orchestra and concert hall
Asian music
H
}H:rxt?,xl:,,,1fii:1'il:""1fr.;Hi:"1x1
folk music of the Asians that is culture oriented. The
ffi #
x dWt
music shows little change in the course of centuries.'
*rm;;61,n;;:i*i*jm*:* ffi
ilr"fiffi;'i:#il:"'"*,,lnlrlfflilH:;:::
on each instrument playing its own rnelodic line but ,*. B \
?k-4. @ -
:"::::'1T:.T:.h:: TT"-,, rMord orientatiorl "*;ij

means a very low use of abstraction in music and ffi t'r -5E - !! \, .#*adi*
thus it is generally focused around an event, place or Asian mtrsical instrnmettts
mood that state the feel of the piece. Asian musical instruments
include Erhu, Guzheng, pipa,
Dizi, Dulcimer, Huqin, Hulus, Suona, Lusheng, Sun and Chimes.
Song composition
It is the art and process of creating an original piece of rnusic. The main
elements that guide
a composer in song composition are rhythm and melody.
Once these have been ...rt.,1, it
becomes easy to add in the lyrical content as well as musical perfonnance
clirections. In
addition, every song has a theme that guides a conrposer in creating
the suitable rhytllnic
form, structure, melody and harmonies.
I:
L.
Ir/
lnstru ments classifi cation
Instruments are classificd according to holv they produce sound. The tbur main classes of
instruments are membranophones, chordophones, idiophones and aerophones.
Membranophones
These are insttuments that produce sound through the vibrations of a membrane when it is
struck or hit. A traditional drurn is a good example.
membranophones khanjira (/ef) djembe (right)
Chordophones
Thcsc are instruments that produce sound bv means of vibrations of strings stretched between
tr,vo points when they are plucked or rubbed. Examples include chipendani, violin, celio and
fr
guitar.
F\-r.r
{;t
E$ I
i# t+l
i# q€
1&
jr$_ -tr f,is*/
Ha i? Celio
Itliophones
These are musical instriiments rilat irl'oilLlcc, ..Oiind b,v rneans of shaking or scraping the
instrument. Exarnples are hosho, tambottl'ine and rnbira.I
iL* )
e.;
Maracas Cyrnbals
Aerophones
These are instruments that produce sound when air is blown into them. Examples include
hwamanda, trumpets and homs.
*a+ .-
t,
Fiwanranda Saxophone
m
Music, Health and other Social issues
Musiiians are seen to address many topical issues with the messages that are embedded
within their songs. Chief amongst these are social and health issues even though they can
even sing about other issues such as political, economical and educational.ln Zimbabwe,
a number of musicians to date have composed and sang songs to raise awareness on health
issues due to epidemics of different diseases. In most cases, musicians attain the role of being
an ambassador for raising awareness on health and social issues. The late Oliver Mutukudzi
was the ambassador for HIV and AIDS awareness in Zimbabwe.
Musician Name of song Health issue

Thomas Mapfumo Mukondombera Warning on the dangers of
HIV/ AIDS
Albert Nyathi and Dereck Apart or Together We stand Awareness campaign on
Mpotu strong against COVIDI9 COVID-I9
Oliver Mutukudzi. Todii HIV/AIDS Awareness
Tanga Wekwa Sando and Cholera-Chenjerawo Cholera awareness
Oliver and Sam Mtukudzi
lndigenous and lbreign musical instruments in Southern Africa

Musical Instruments
Musical instruments are grouped into indigenous and a foreign musical instruments depending
on where they originated from in a country. Indigenous instruments are those that originated
in the country whilst foreign instruments are those that were brought in the country from other
countries.
Indigenous instruments of Zimbabwe

ngororombe mbira o' ,
'staE.AF-
r#j;
t'r*3
hwamanda
*H/
upondo chipendani
marimba ngoma
lngungu
:;t
&
t
I
_-f,oryrg! qqtryqLents in Zimbabwe
I
f
Guitar Djembe
T-
I
I
Saxophone
"{
1. Compose a short melody based on the Covid-i9 global pandemic. Add lyrics
to your song using at least two native languages of Zimbablve.
2. Choose any one indigenous and one foreign instrument and use it to play an
accompaniment iine to the song in activity 1.
3. Make a list of at least 10 popular artists and their songs across Zimbabwe from
different ethrric cultures and ianguages v,rho sang songs on any health issue.
WORD SEARCH
K M A K o S S A B T
w A V
A F F T E S A
A C C N D J E E G E
S H H o S G x x M R
A E I P o A A R E o
K S o U L. o i) W L P
W o N A W A S E o H
A L S K i\ N I N D o
S w o V II w J P Y N
A J U N T A L M A E
FI o S H (l L E J Z S
t. 3 types of Rumba music

2. A popular Sungura artist
l
-') . An example of music found in Sor-rth Afiica
4. City where country music is mostly popular
5. Artist rvho popularised Mbira music
r;il
L.-,)
6. AZimbabwean Rhumba artist
7. Music rype which is closely related to Sungura
8. Instruments that produce sound when air is blown into them
9. An example of an idiophone
10.An element that guides song composition
Summary
' There are many different fypes of music in the world and they can
be noted to be culture
oriented.
' Musical instruments are classified according to how they produce sound.
' Song composition is mainly guided by rhythm, melody und th.-..
' Musicians address many issues in their songs including social and health
issues.
' Musical instruments are also grouped as indigenous or foreign depending
on their
country of origin.
Glossary
Rhythm - The combinations of long and short, ev.n or uneven sourds
that convey a sense of movement in tirne.
Diversity - Variefy
Genre - Type or kind of musical work (e.g. opera, jazz,mariachi)
Contemporary-Modernised
Folk music - Traditional music that shows the way of life of a people
community
Melody - An organised sequence of single notes
Indigenous - Native, traditional, homegrown or local
Foreign - Borrowed or unfamiliar, not from the local or adopted frorn
other
cultures or countries
MULTIPLB CHOICE UO MARKSI

1. which of the following music types is not fromAfrica?
A. Sungura B. Soukos C. Kwaito D. Classical
2. Which of the following genres has its origins in DRC?
A. Kanindo B. Amapiano C. Sungura D. Kwaito
3. Which of the following is not atype of Rhumba?
A' Mbokamboka B. Soukos c. Sungura D. Ndombolo
4. which musical element should be considered when composing a song?
A. Rhythm B. Forte C. Genre D. Dvnamics
5. causes diversity in the musical genres of the world?
A. Tempo B.Pitch C. Artist D. Culture
6. An example of an idiophone is
A. guitar B. maracas C. drum D. flute
1. An instmtnent that prodr'tces sound r,vheu strings are plucked is a
A. membranophone B. idioPhone
C. aerophone D. chordoPhone
8. A,- lSa key arlist in raisrr-rg awareness on an issue through mr-rsic.
A. ambassador B. awareness
C. awarded D' entrePreneur
9. Which one is uot an indigelous mr-tsic type of Zimbabwe?
A. iiti B. Sungura C. Mbokamboka D. Museve
10. Which westetn music type is closely related to African tnusic?
A. Classical B.
Jazz C. Country D. RnB
SE,C'[ION sTRUC'tLiRED QUESTIONS 120 MARKSI
a) What is song cornposition'7 t1l
r1t
b) Outline what is considered when composing a song'? L-.l
Describe hou, culture causes diversity in the music of the world. t2l
Outline the charactelistics of the tollo1vine musical genres:
a) Jazz
b) Kwaito
c) Country t6t
4. E,xplain how'the follorving tnusiczrl itrstn-itlrents produce sound gir,'ing one example
lor each type. a) ChordoPhones
b) ldiophones lal
5. Explain the difference betr,r,eell Lr1-r indigetiolls and a loreisil il}-lsical
instrument'l
|,|
f1l
L-)
6. a) What is an electrol'rhonc'.) tll

b) Why is it intpor-tanr lbr artist:: ro sing abor-Lt health anci socitl issltes in a I
!
comtnunitv'.)
t)t
t ")
i
I
I
Visunl
,'ff-
i r+m;rncrt\:t.s
Learners should be atrle to:
identify the different cultural valties in l.arious afirrrork ol Zimbabwe and
Southern Africa
differentiate styles of artrvorks in .,'ariotis periods in Zirnbabwe and other parts
of Southern Atiica
. distinguish styles of artu,orks usin-Q cr-rltural influence
colnpare n-redia and tool:. r-rsed in afiu'orks'
\.,-*-- --_.-
Introduction
Art has always been practiced since the pre-colonial era in Zimbabwe and most parts of
Southern Africa. Artworks found from these countries are seen to comprise of valued cultural
significance as they entail the way of life of the people during the pre-colonial era. However,
these artworks are seen to exhibit different characteristics and forms. This diversity can be
largely attributed to the difference in the cultures of these countries: a factor which is still
influential to date.
Cultural values of artworks of Zimbabwe and Southern Africa

The value of an artwork lies in the story it tells which is known as the content. Many stories or
themes have been deduced from pre-colonial artworks and these include love, hunger, unity,
power, waq traditions and cultures. From the pre-colonial period to date, art has evolved but it
is mainly found in the form of sculptures, paintings. beading, drawings, pottery and basketry.
Artworks of Zimbabwe
Zimbabwe has had a variety of artworks found throughout history which depict a lot of cultural
significance and these include the following.
Sculptures
It is the most popular form of art in African cultures
as stone is an easy material to fincl in
Africa. Stone sculptures in Zimbabwe were made to represent the value that the society and
community placed on the object being sculptured. They were mainly of specific animals which
were viewed as spiritual or considered as a spiritual link with the ancestors or represented the
way of life of a tribe and thus its social identity. Some sculptures were of the kings and chiefs
of the land. Popular Zimbabwean sculptors are Dominic Benhura, Joseph Ndandarika, Agnes
Nhongo, Tapfuma Gutsa andLazarus Takawira.
The Zimbabwean bird (Hungwe)

Pottery
This is the making of pot like objects using baked clay. Pottery products were mainly used for
cooking, storing water and food as well as for decorating the horne. Pottery products, mainly
clay pots, were associated with rirual ceremonies. Their function was to hold brewed beer that
was used in appeasing the spirits (kupira vadzimu). Ritual ceremonies in which pottery was
mainly used include kurova guva and kunamatira myura. Pottery was also placed on top of
graves and at shrines.
r
7r'oditionui 1tt'tt.s usecl to nold iseer tbr ritual::
Rock art
This ivas a fbnl of art that r,"as clonc on r-ocl< surraLres and rlainlv in anci around cave walls.
It was tlainly painting but it alst, inclr-rieti srraii amour.:rs oi'markings or drawing using
cinder. -i-he paint used was rnacie tror.n aniniai bio,.rcl. cggsheiis" egg yolk and plant materials,
csoecially leaves.
llost ci:the paintinss t'epresentei: iir-- ac,-ii,rr-':. 'ira: rvere cionr nv thc nrs-coloniai peoole
'rihi.:h were mostiy hrirrting art.j lt:trf i,:S;rri:,i-i . ir noteci iLLrrl ihc anirnais rn the paintings.
ii:r\ics as wcll as \,\a"klrr-rbe {-lr,::,
Rock paintings oj the San people in tllntopos
Carvings
These are artworks that are produced frorn carving of wood. The wood was carved using
sliarp objects until it prodr-rced the desired shapcs. Wooden can,ings were Llsually of animals,
people, tools that peopie used and also objects that symbolised culture. power or aurhority.
Carvings inciuded hnmatr heads. walking sticks. musical instnrments and animal can/ings
tirat resenrblc the peooic-'s wav of lif-e. \4-vthical legends like the Nyaminyami were also
carved and these played an important roie in thc reii-eious belief.s of the society.
UAlkirtg .rlit'li wi/ii \ivrttrtitr.'ir:tt j ltLtt, t. i t t',.' i t t :: .r'/ir; i lilg Z i tr t h tt l't v' e u t t tttt i n tt l,'.
Monuments
A monument is a statue, building or other structure erected to commemorate notable people
or events or sites that are of historical and cultural importance or interest. Monuments were
primitively but yet artistically erected and most are stil.t intact up to now. Examples of
monuments in Zimbabwe include the Great Zimbabwe Ruins in Masvingo and the Khami
Ruins in Bulawayo. These were symbolic and entail a great deal of culture on how the chief
and kings lived socially with the people in the comnrunity vrith each and every member
of the
community having a designated area.
Khami Ruins Great Zimbabwe Ruins
Weaving and basketry

Weaving is a process that makes use of grass, reeds, animal hair and palm leaves to produce
artworks. These materials were woven in an interlocking manner toproduce artworks that
include baskets, garments, mats and wall hangings. Baskets and mats were the most \ ,o\.en
artworks because of their great importance in agricultural ancl cultural practices. Baskets
were
used for storage of agricultural products and also for ceremonial uses in rituals.
Weaving also
produced garments such as hats, mats and fishing baskets. Clulfurally. woven
baskets are also
trsed durin g lobola ceremonies to hold money. The Binga community is
best knou,n fbr their
high basketry skills.
:-:
weaving cutd busketryt products
Artworks of Southern Africa

Masks
IVIasks are objects tltat cover the facefor l'arious reasons. They were used to seek ,rotcction,
disguise, entertain and for ritual purposes. N{asks are made fi'our clillerelt t;,,es
of inaterial
such as used newspapers, plastic textiles, poitery, shells. feathcrs. aninral
teeth, coF)l)er. bropze,
u'ood. rnetal. Masks are seen to have dill-erent patterns. Afi-ican masks are rtrostlr,
.ltaped like
human and animal faces. Masks represeill different aspects in each and every culture and in
some cnltures masks signify and demonstrate spirits ofthe deceased.
T't'pirul lti'icutt masks
Rock art paintings - Namitria

is i-rome to manv rock art sites tirat have rock artworks showing drawings and
tr..ar:ribia
paintines done in the pre-coloniai era. Besr knorvn rock artworks in the country are tbund
in Darzunaland. The rock artu,orks are highll'r.aiuable in Narnibia as tliey reflect their ricli
spirittral and cultural heritage trom the pre-colonirl era" Namibra enjoys World Heritage status
becturse oithe aftworks on rocks anci caves.
i*fi
r{.it
... !. r.i
.*,
'
*si
.-'-:,
ij
Roc' li Ttcrittt in g i n Doronta loncl
Bcrrdrvork-soutlr Alrica and l.esotho

.iSeadwork craft was maittl'r, clotie ',t_r 'i\;01ncn since the pre-
crrionial period. The beads rl'eie coioLu'tirl ancl vl'ere made oi'
stilncs. shells and teeth of aninrais blrl norvaclays tire beads are
nratic of processed plastic and glass. The cultui-al value of beads
iics iir iircrr-i bein-e syinbc;is of proteetive charms. For r,vot.nett.
spccillc beacls tnark thcir stlitLrs to sitor it'thc;- are matried or
lrot. llcacis in Lesotho are associated ..vitit initiattoii cereurotries.
Norvadays. beads are bcing worll fbr"lirshiort attd irs a decot'attvc-
irill'r oi e 051Lllnc.
m
Cave drawings and paintings - Botswana
Botswana has many rock arid cave drawings that were clone by the Khoisan people. The
famous paintings and drawings are found at Tsodilo Hills. The artwork is unique and mostly
shows animals paintings. The animals in the painting depict totems which identified a clan
or tribe. They believed in the common totems of the zebra, elephant and Cape buffalo as
witnessed by animals in the drawings and paintings.
Artwork in kodilo Hills

Art styles from historical eras in Zilnbnbwe and Suuthern Aliict
Almost all the artwork styles were practiced during the pre-colonial period. The only difference
lies in the materials used to make the artworks. The pre-colonial era saw artists producing
aftworks using different natural materials, such as rocks, she|ls, blood and teeth of animals.
The colonial era on the other hand saw artworks being largely influenced and dominated by
the whites as European art dominated especially drawing and painting of portraits. Artwork
in Zimbabwe lost its cultural value and power when missionaries introduced Christianity.
Most of the arlworkproduced during the colonial era used stone and stone sculpture played
a leading role in arts during this colonial period. The post-colonial era saw art,work being
promoted on various platforms. The National Art Gallery was formed to promote local art.
Annual exhibitions for visual arts began to be hosted. Many art galleries were also set up for
local artworks to be exhibited and these include the likes of Chapungu Sculpture park which
was set up in Masasa in 1980 for displaying artwork.
Materials and media used

Pre-Colonial Era Post-colonial Era
Sculptures Stone, wood Wood, soapstone, bronze,stone, marble, wire, metal,
ceramics chisel, hammer, grinder
Painting Blood, leaves, egg york Oil paint, water-colours, canvas, wood, paper, textile
fabrics, water colour, pallets, paint rollers
Pottery Clay Clay, clay oil
Carving Wood Wood
Weaving Reeds, grass Reeds. grass. straw, wire
Drawing Cinder Pencils, pen, crayon, graphite sticks, erasers,
charcoal, canvas, wood, paper
@
lnfluence of culture on art stvles
' Artworks are noted to be different across ethnic groups and countries on a larger scale.
This is largely due to the influence of culture on the nature of artworks made. This
impact of culture could be noted in artworks through the following:
' Sculptures made resembled different anirnals or people that a culfure believes in or values.
' The pottery made was based on the differcnt ueeds and uses each culture has especially
in ritr-ralistic ceremonies.
Rock art was done based on the activities done by a social group as well as the spiritual
beliefs in animals or totems which a cr.rlture has.
Monuments served comlnemorative purposes and different cultures had different peopie,
sites and events thev commemorated as a societv and cnlture.
1. Study the artwork shown below
a) Discuss the content that can be drawn from the artwork.

b) Evaluate how culture nright have influenced this artwork.
2. As an artist in the post colonial era, suggest ways in which an artist can be free to
create any artwork of your choice without being influenced by culture.
WORD SEARCH
o Y R T E K A B G
S
K J H rr C H K M E P
M T K Fi O I S A N A
C N H il R Z C T H N
A F, A o W R I o U G
,r
N N,{ ti V C N P R S
V N I E F A D o A
A o S a Z H E S
-t-
S C U I
l_ t U R E C V
I o t_ ll S o T H o B
l. The greatest influence on artworks
2. The message depicted by an artwork
3. Ethnic group of people who did rock paintings in Botswana
4. Claves where rock paintings are found in Zimbabwe
5. A renowned Zimbabwean sculptor
6. I\4aterial used for painting in the pre-colonial period
1. Example of a pre-colonial monument in Zimbabwe
8. Well known art style of the Binga people
9. Example of an art material used in the post colonial period
10. Country well known for its exceptional beadwork
Surnmary
' Pre-colonial artworks cany a lot of cultural value and significance of its people
' Artworks are usually in the form of sculptures, pottery, carvings, painting, drawing and
weaving
. Arfworks are influenced largely by culture
' Different historical periods used different materials and tools in creating artworks
' Artworks are exhibited in art galleries where people can view thern during exhibitions
Theme -An idea based on a particular subject

Social identify - The way in which a society is viewed or identified
Appeasing - To thank, honor, calm or to sooth
Ritual - A rite or ceremony
Cinder - Ash
Primitive Ancient or prehistoric
-
Lobola - Bride price
Heritage - Legacy or tradition
Portrait - A visual drawing or painting of a specific figure
Exhibition - A display of artworks
Cultural value - A set of beliefs or ideas that a society upholds and upholds
MULTTPLE CHOTCE [10 MARKSI

1. An example of a theme is in artworks
A. unity B. pottery C. khoisan D. sculpter
2. The suitable material used for sculpturing is
A. eggshells B. monument C. soapstone D. bakcd clay
3. In Zimbabwe, rock paintings are found in
A. Mutare B. Hwange C. Gweru D. Bulawayo
4. The people did rock painting in Matopos caves.
'A. Binga B. San C. Tsodilo D. Korekore
m
/-'-
5.
I
Which ar-t type produceci artworks that u,cre used in ritr-ral cerernonies'/
A. Carvings B. Paintinqs C. Monuments D. Pottery
6. Khan'ri Ruins are an exanrple of a pre-colonial
A. monument B. sculpture C. ritual D. statue
1. Which art skill is the Bin_ua cominur-iity of Zirr-rbabwe well known for'/
A. Pottery B. Basketly C. Painting D. Carving
8. Which arlwork in South Arl'ica indicatcs the rnarital status of a wornan'l
A. Mask B. Weavins C. Beads D. Basketry
9. Which liistorical period sarv afi b.'ing don'rinated by the westem cuitures'/
A. Colonial B. Ple-co1onial
C. Post-colonial D" Nec-colonial
10. What is the rnajor aspect that ililJ'erclttiarr-s art"vorks?
A. Age B. Thcrne C'. f'ontent D. Cultr-rre
SECT'IOIi tl: 51.R{- {-'"iL.l'tIil] QU[STIO]\{S I20 bl,{ilKsl
1. State any two caves fi'onr Southe rn ,\fl'ica rvhere rock afi was done. r1t
LL]
l. Describe thc fbllolvin_{ ar-t t-,.;tc:
a) Potterl, b) Beading c) Masks l6l
l. State the cultural signiflcance of rock paintings in Zimbabwe. t2)
4. Explain hou,culture can be seen in an artwork. t21
,5. Outline how' derreloplnelrt of art galleries developed and promoted local art in post
colonial Zimbabwe. ttl
6. Cornplete the table belou,: i3l
Weaving ,.-]
Pottery
Stoncs
7. Explain why artworks tion-r differerrt historicai periods are difi.erent'l
Theatre
OBJECTIVES
Learners should be atrle
contrast theatrical styles tronr ptrst iurcl present in Zimbabrve
icientity theatrical genres tl'oni Soliihem Atiica
compare theatrical styles frorri ciillci!-ilt r; olrntrie s in Southern Afiica
design ntasks, puppets, props. cLrstulnes and sets lor a selected theatrical Southern
Atrican styles lor perfbnnanue
r-id'l
B-i
Introduction
presentations. They are influenced by time,
Theatrical styles are ways of acting or dramatising
place, artistic and individual styles of art. E*u*pGi of
theatrical arls are drama, dance, music,
poems and comedy. There ur" diff.r.nt theatrical styies
from different historical periods in
styles are categorised frorn past
Zimbabwe and also from other parts of Southern Africa. The
its own unique theatrical qualities'
to present and each historical period can be seen to have
Theatrical stYles in Zimbabwe

can be noted from the
ln zimbabwe, theatre can be seen to have developed over time'-This
and those that are found nowadays' The
theatrical styles that were found in the pre-colonial era
in different historical periods'
tabie beiow shows the different theatrical styles of Zimbabwe
Dqsf fhpqfrical sfvles Present theatrical stYles

Story-telling Movies
Pungwe gatherings Street theatre
Drama Comedy
Traditional dance Musicals
are still being practiced up to date'

Even though some theatrical styles are from the past, they
as social gathering. This is
Theatrical styres fiom the past encouraged unity and were done
are seemingly much more organised
different from the styles that are found r-owadays as they
and are now being done for commercial purposes and
require payment unlike in the past'
Theatrical genres
being told' A genres is different
A theatrical genres of a perfomance refers to the type of story
Examples of theatrical genres
from a style in that a styie is how the story is presented on stage.
from Southern Africa include the following:
a way of
A. Theatre in education (TiE) - This is the use of drama or theatre techniques as
fostering effective learning in schools'
B. Physical theatre - A type of perfomance where physical movement inis story-telling'
the primary
modern dances
method of story-telling. It can also include mime, gestures and
C. Political theatre - It is a form of theatre that is used to present a campaign or
show an
shown'
injustice to an audience in the hope of making changes to the situation
D. Comedy - A type of drama or other art form with the chief object of amusing the audience'
E. Tragedy - It is a form of drama that treats in a serious and dignified style, the sorrowful
or terrible events encountered or caused by a heroic individual
Theatrical styles from Southern Africa

because of the cultr-tral
Theatrical styles differ from one country to another. This is mainly
from Southem Africa'
influence on theatre. The following are some of the theatrical styles
South Africa
are found in the
The rich cultural base in South Africa is due.to the many tribes that
are part of their culture' Dance
country. Theatre styles such as praise poetry and story-tel1ing
Z6'\
\^-./
are also part of th-' thearre pe'formances
SoLrrh Afiicans atso praffice
;::J}',il:;1.:lt"*
Lesotho
cerernonial dances fonn the majorparl
of BaSotho theatre. These include Mohobelo,
Monyanyako and ollo Mangae clairces. Mokhibo,
Praise poems are also a ,rajor f-eatLrre
prodtrctions. of-their theatre
Swaziland
Their style is rlainly in the fbr,r of s{ll.}gs
antl dances. These are Ingabisa, Tingorna
TikLrtsarnba' Riddles a,cl fblktales also and
1"rr p.r't of their g.eat perlormatflces. -fhe urnhlanga
is peribnneri vi-arlv in latc Scptcinber
ro pa-y hornase ro rhe queen" mother
:i.",?-,:,:i[:i"mony
Sets, costumes, props, tnasks and puppets
used in theatre
Set - I-iius is ihc iiiurilrir;iti eriLriprlent sucir as cLrrtains.llats.backdrops
or
irlattbrlis irsci-i in r prociirciirrn.
Costumc, * -fhis
is el,rtir,rri:,1irri :li,.,.itss()ri,.ls'i,{)i.lt h'
'i *,-r.ii.rr
cliaracter artri pclirli. ''"-"t'rillil'li tJ ;'rt'l"ifa;'
Prop - l-his is a,r'.h-ject r.\cc,r c.rstuure or set trrat is
usecr bv acrors as
pA i't tr i' i ln \ ir i"( )( ltiC l rr ti.
Mask -'fhese are obiects \\',airil il, thc ft.rce fbr cii-ceLrise r-rr
protcction.
Puppet - {, artiflt i*l figrr'c r,lill"L,s.nii*g a hunra* bcirrg
or,n ani,ral.
L:.xrtt-r 1t1,--S .)f COSltr r ilcr \ llr: t
Sr:i
L Design a theairical s=i iilr tirr :_i;.i,iiia;-rq .r :rreirrony

iroin 5waziland anciexplair the
choice of yorir iesig:,
t_ Usirrg locailv avaiiabie materiais, desiq;r rrl
r: ila ke ar leasi two types of the following:
a) Masks
hl Puppe!:s
WORD SEARCH
P S J H F T S V N P
J T V D H J C K E U
M o K H I B o A S P
D R P H V M S E T P
R Y R P I B T W I T
a T o M A H U G N E
A E P o V E M N G E
Z L S T Y L E U o R
X L T S I L L P M P
C I V C X Z D G A K
F N M N H G F D S E
G G P o I U Y B F V
1. A way of presentinga theatre

2. What actors wear during a play
3. The environment created for a play
4- Objects that actors carry or use during a play
5. 2 theatrical styles of Southern Africa
6. Two theatrical styles from the pre-colonial era
7. One who controls a puppet
Summary
. Theatrical styles have developed from the pre-colonial up to the post colonial era,
. Culture has a large influence on theatrical styles.
. Theatrical genres from Southern Africa include the like of folktales, praise poetry and
ceremonial dances.
. Masks, puppets, sets, costumes and props are used in different theatrical performances.
Glossan'
Theatre - Imitation or representation of life performed for an audience

Genre - A form or type of theatre
Street theatre - A form of theatre that takes place in the street and whose
audience has no charge
Puppet - An artificial figure representing a human being or an animal
that is controlled by a puppeteer in theatre
Costumes - These are clothing and accessories wom by performers to
portray characters in a play
Props - This is any object or article except costume or set that is used as
part of any production.
,f-d;\
li^-./
i
5tt ; t_r{ pt,tj_ {'Ht}tcE I1 t} itlARKSJ

L A font or type of presenting a thearrical play is called a
A. drama B. style C. theatre D. movie
2. An aspect that largeiy influences theatre is
A. age B. set C. genre D. culture
J. is the arangement of objects on stage to create an
environment.
A. Content B. Tirerne C. Props D. Costumes
4. objects that are used by actors during a play
are calred
A. costnmes B. plops C. tools D. set
,5. Theatre i, the pre-colonial era u,as clone fbr commercial
purposes,/
A. False B. True C. Maybe D. None
6. 'fhe Umhlanga cerelrony is done in r,r,hich country?
A. Zintbablr,e B. Botsw.irna C. South Atiica n Swaziland
U.
7. Man-nride fignre that are controlled bv-
strings in theatre are cattea
A. pLrppets B. actors C. puppeteers D. props
5. wirat do we cali clothing wor.] by.acrrrs
L to ciraracterise a role,l
-J -'
A. Props B. Costumc-s C. Rags D. Make-up

9. The foliowing are erarnpie of costunre
except
A. mask B. beads
C. hat D. ivalking stick
10. An example of a theatricai style tb,r-r the pre-coioniar
era is
A. street theatle B. comed.,, C. tnr:sical D. pungwe
SECTION B: STRUCTIJRED euESTIONs
I20 IITARKSI
l. Defiire the followilrq tcl-rns ls used in thcatre:
a) Set b) Puppet
c) prop d) Costume
2' Explain why actors tteed to weal specific costuines to characterise L4l
a role in
a play.
3. Explain what is meant by a genre in theatre. L21
4. Why do people wear a mask when acri,e?

5' Outline the dift-erences between pre-colonial and post-colonial ii]
theatre. L4)
6' Match the follorving theatrical styles to the countiies in i,vhich
they are practiced.
-- -.'-, l4l
r
- .--
Countrl,
Mohobelo
Umhlanga
Ingatrisa
Pungw'e
7. Why do theatrical plays need a sct,.)
m
OBJECTIVES
. identify dance ceremonies from Southern Africa
o compare dances from different countries in Southern Africa
. create dance performances from different periods
. identify functions of dance in different age groups
Introduction
Danie can be seen to be an important aspect of a people's culture throughout the world.
Many cultural and social activities include dance as the core of the ceremony. SouthernAfrica
has many different danoe cereinonies where dauces like nyau, gumboots, chipisi, agogo, and
kongonya are performed. These ceremonies are of great significance in cultural setups. In
addition, dance is seen to serve many pu{poses in different age groups.
Dance ceremonies from Southern Africa

Dance signifies culture. In most Southem African tribes, ceremonies at which dances were
traditionally performed were considered sacred and not everyone was allowed to perform
dances at such ceremonies. Some of the traditional sacred ceremonies at which dances were
performed included:
. Rain making
. Appeasing the spirits
. Bringing the deceased's spirit in the homestead
. Searching for a lost person
. Praying for crops
. Crowning of chiefs or kings
Dance ceremonies were organised and had a form or structure which include the following:
Origins - Location and the ethnic group where the dance started
Purpose - Function or reason of performing the dance
Ethnic group - The cultural people who performed the dance
Sex dominance- Either males or females dominated a speciflc dance
Taboos- This is what was not allowed to be done during the dance or who was not
allowed to perform it
Attire - This is the specific dressing that was worn by those performing the dance
Musical instruments- The type of instruments that were supposed to be played as
musical accompaniment to the dance
Songs - These were the songs that were required to be sung during the dance
However, with the dawn of colonisation throughout Southern Africa, most of the dance
@
ceremonies changed and new dance styles emerged.
Most of these danced that emerged are
noted to have a colonial influence and they include
the likes of kongonya, chipisi, agogo,
gumboots and pantsula.
Dance performances from different periods
Dance name
Country of Ethnic
Purpose of dance Historical
origin group period
Iwossana Zimbabwe Ndebeie Rain makins Pre-colonial
Zvipunha Zimbabwe Wondering spirits without
Shangani
relatives to anneqqe them Pre-colonial
Sibhaca Lesotho Sotho Fun or Comoetition Pre-colonial
Agogo Zimbabwe I Shona _ Entertainrrent
i
Colonia
Nyau Malawi I Cherva Initiution of boyr intoldrlthood
i
Pre-colonial
Gnmboots South Africa i\4,r;-
fti-__-_--+ Communicatron Colonia
Chipisi Zimbabwe Shona i Ent.rtuin-*t Colonia
Muchongoyo Zimbabwe Ndau i
Preparation for war Pre-colonial
--lKorekore
Dinhe Z mbabwe I Celebrating a bumper a -harv.est Pre-colonial
Chinyambera Z mbabwe Karanga i Huntins Pre-colonial
=
Iwossana Zimbabwe Krlrra*l Rain making Pre-colonial
_I"rgl Zimbabwe Ndau Celebration of war Pre-colonial
Zhana Z mbabwe Manvika Rain making Pre-colonial
Mbende Zimbabwe Zezuru Courtship Pre-colonial
Kongonya Zimbabwe
llery Entertainment Colonial
Functions of dance in different age groups
Dances serve a lot of purposes from cultural exchange
to socialising. Hoi,vever, dance also
serves a variety of functions in different age groups.
a) In children dance: b)
. Supporrs creativity and socialisation
. Improves physical fitness .
lT#r',l1]| #X;;r"..r,
provides fitness
. Providesentertainment
. Exercises the bodies
' Improves memory retention
. Exercises the bodies
' Stimulates brain activity . lmproves blood circulation
' Improves coordination skills and
t*proves baiance and strength
balance ' Provides social and entertainment activities
Activities
1' watch a video of lwossana rain making dance of the Kalanga people
and compile a
report on how the following are best suited for the purpose
of the dance:
a) Attire b) Sex dominance
c) Songs d) Dance patterns
2. As a choreographer, design a dance routine that is best suited for improving balance
and coordination in children
WORD SEARCH
A S F H R C J L P J
D F I T N E S S C D
F G Z V I P U N H A
S w J o W F E J E G
T A B o o H K V W o
o T S x S F D M A G
o T w o S Z V K M o
B I D S A C R E D D
M R G J N K o P M N
U E, V B A I: A N C E
G B N M H D G J D x
Clues
1. Dance ceremonies that were selective on who is to perform them
2. Rain making dance of the Ndebele people
3. Spiritual dance for wondering spirits
4. What is not allowed to be done during a dance
5. What is worn by dance performers
6. Colonial dance from SouthAfrica
7. Colonial dance from Zimbabwe
8. Ethnic group that performs Nyau dance
9. Purpose of dance in adults
10. What is developed in children through dance
Summary
. Dance represents the culture a people
' Dance ceremonies were performed for many reasons like appeasing spirits, rain making
and crowning of chiefs
' Colonisation led to the development of some colonial dance during the colonial period
. Every dance has an origin and a purpose
. Dance seryes many different functions in different ages
Glossary
Ceremony - An event or service of ritual significance

Appease - To settle or calm down
Sacred - Holy or blessed
Style - The distinctive and unique manner in which a dance is arranged
E
t. The location of where a dance starts is called its
A. home B. origin C. base D. ethnic grou
2. What is not allowed to be done in a dance is called a
A.
taboo B.
sacred C. sin n mistake
L).
a
J. The dances types beiow are from Zirnbabtve except
A. tangi B.
agogo C. nyau D. zhana
4. Costumes that are wom by dancers r.l,hen perfbrming are called
A. attire B. clothes C. "irrops D nibikiza
,5. Chinyambera is a type of dancc done h',, ivhich ethnic
-eroup?
A. Zezuru B. Karanga C. Kcrrekore D Nciar"r
6. The purpose of Muchongoyo dance is preparing tbr
A. harvesting B.
rain C. wal' D. corir-tship
7. Which of the following is not a type r.lf a dance cerernony?
A. Burial B.
Appeasement C.Rain making D. Harvesting
8. Which onc is a dance style fiorn thc colonial periocl'/
A. Tangi B. Agogo C. Nvau D. Zhana
9. Which one is a rain rnaking ceremonial dance of the Ndebele people?
A. Mhande B. Zl^,ana C.Iu,,ossana D. Arrrabhiza
10. A dance style in rvhicli onlv a selecteci t-erv could perfonr-r the dance is referred to
as being
A. taboo B.
sacred C.special D. ritual
SECTIOI{ B: ST'RUCTURED QUESTIONS [20 MARKSI

L State the meaning of the tbllorving ien.)ts as used in dance:
a) Ori-ein b) Ethnic grolrp
c) Props d) Mr-rsical accolnpaniment t4l
2. State any three examples of dance cercmonies. t3l
1
J. Cornplete the table below on dance types and their pu l4l
Dance type Pur
Gurnboots
,]
Tangi
Ar-nabl-riza
Sibhaca
4. Explain how dance is of irnportance in each of the tbllowin,s groups of people:

a) Children b) Adutts L2)
,5. Explain horv traditional dances from the pre-colonial era were aft-ected during the
colonial period. L2l
6. Mbende is a couftship ciance ot'tl-re T.ezurtpeople from Murehwa. Give an
example of each of the tbllorving a'borii the dance:
a) Attirc b) Song c) lVlusical accompaniment l3l
7 " Expiain how culturc influenct--:; dance stvles. L2)
Topic 2 The Creative Process and Perfomance
OBJECTIVES
. perform intervals of a2"d,3'o up to the 8'h of the scalc
. ieacl rhythrnic and melodic notation in simple and compound time signatures
. u,rite sl-rort melodies in three part harmony
. play tuned and un-tuned musical instruments-
Introduction
Music can be writtel using many different ways like staff notation. This notation makes it
easy to read the intervais of musical notes on the stave. This is useful as it enables one
to
develop good sight reading of rhythms and rnelodies in any meter. it also develops good
music cornposition skills and the ability to play melodies on instruments.
lntervals
An interval is the distance in pitch between any given two tones or notes. Intervals are
calculated by counting the distance or number of steps between the notes starling frorn and
including the bottom note going up to the top note.
fiS 2.1 ittterpals
An interval of a 1", is also referred to as unison whilst that of an eighth or 8u" is called an
octave.
Staff notation
It is a way of writing music making using musical note tiine values. It can be written on
stave showing both rhythm and pitch thus creating a rnelody as below:
It can also be written without pitch and this is mainly done
for percussion and thus only
indicating rhythm as below:
Musical scales
A scale is the arrangement of notes in a specrfic
order of whole and half steps.
following pattern of intervals between adjaceni notes: It has the
Whole Whote Half Whole Whole Whole Half

Step, step, step, step, step, step, step
Tone Tone Semitone Tone -Tone
Tone Semitone
Scale of C major
D c B C
Stale of G major
A B C D E F# G
Scale of F major
Scale of D major
m
Time signature
It is a combination of two numbers (top and bottom) which represents the number and type
of beats in a bar.
3 number of beats
4 type of beats
a) Simple time/ meter
This is a type of meter in which the type of beat is divided into twos.
b) Compound timel meter
This is a type of meter in which the type of beat is divided into threes or sixes.
Simple meter Compound meter
ZJ4 6 12 9
4, 4, 4, 8,8,4
Song composition
It is the creation of original music by organising sound. It is usually written forothers to
perform. Composing a song should include the elements of music which are rhythm, pitch
and melody as guidelines in arrangement of the song. It can be done for one singing part or
for more than one thus soprano, alto and tenor. Song composition can also be for instrument
playing.
Harmony
It is the simultaneous sounding of two or more tones. It can be in vocal music where two or
more singing parts are sounding at the same time or when simultaneously playing instruments.
When three singing parts like soprano, alto and tenor are singing different notes at the same
time, three-part harmony results as shown in the extract below:
Poignant trounce
YeDzinza Music Roots
Con brio.i = +o
SOPRANO
ALTO
Tuned and un-tuned musical instruments

Tuned instruments are those that can be adjusted produce a definite pitch. Examples include
marimba, mbira, guitar, violin, bassoon, cello, electric drum, piano and a clarinet.
Untuned instruments are those that do not produce a define pitch and cannot be tuned to
produce any pitch. Examples include hosho, magavhu, zvikey'o, chigufe and tambourine.
E
1. Play the following intervals melodically and harmonically in the scale of G nrajor
on
Marimba with the lower note being the (i)root (ii) 3'd and then (iii)4th:
a) 4',h
b) 3'd
c) 5'h
2. Play the ascending and descending scales of C, G, F and D major on any instrument
of your choice.
3. Compose a three part B bar melody in the key of F major. Use a common time
signature. Add your lyrics below the melody that address Human Rights.
CROSSWORD PTJZZLE
Across
I. An interval of an 8'i'
2. Shortest distance between notes in a scale
Down
l. What makes up the key signati-rre
).. An example of a tuned instmment
3. Simultaneous sounding of tones
4. Meter whose type of beat is divided into threes and sixes
5. what is found in the scale of F major and not in the scale of G major
6. What staffnotation not written on a stave lacks
1. Another name for time Signature
B. Arangement of notes in a specific order of whole and half steps
Summary
. Intervals are counted starting with and including the lowest note.
. Time signatures indicate the number and type of beats in a bar'
. Compound meter has the type of beat that is divided into threes and sixes.
. Scales have an arrangement of tones and semitones in a speciflc order.
. Harmony is created when two or more tones are sounded at the same time.
. Tunes instruments can be adjusted to a definite pitch whilst untuned instruments have no
definite pitch.
Notation -Away of writing music tonic solfa, pulse notation, staff

notation
Tone A whole step between two notes in a scale
Semitone - Hdlf a step between two notes in a scale
Music extract - A parl or section of a musical composition taken frorn the w'hole
musical Piece
Harmony - Sounding of two or more tones at the same
MULTIPLE CHOICE [10 MARKSI

1. The distance between two or more notes called
A. chord B. an interval C. harmony D. semitot
2. The other name fbr an interval of a 1"
A. Triad' B. Octave (1. Unison D. Simple
3. The interval between flrst note bar 1 and the third note in bar 2 IS
A. 2"d B. 5',h c. 8"" D. 4'h
4. Staffnotation is writing music making use of

A. time values B. the modulator C the scale D. pulse
5. Staff notation written for percussion instruments does not have
A. rhythm B. melody C pitch D. meter
6. The shortest distance between two notes is a
A. semitone B. tone C. whole steP D. overtone
7 . A group of accidentals found at the beginning of a musical on the stave
indicate the
A. key signature B. flats
C. time signature D. sharps
8. Sounding of two or more tones at the same time results in
A. tenor B. harmony C. melodY D. bass
nt]{
\l^^/
9. The followin_e are tuntuned instrumenis ercept
A. hosho B. tambourine C. mbira
r0. The first note of a scale is called the
D. magavhu
A. tonic B. octave C. chord D. unison
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS
t2O MARKSI
l. Define the following:
a) Simple tirne signature
b) Corrrpound tinre signarLrre
2. Identify the markecl intervals frorn the extract L2l
below
n r-t r-t n n
tsl
J complete the rhythm berow on the space providecr

berow: L5]
cl.mbals tf *. i ; r;]].r-L-+- -*,+-*------J-
4. Explain the fbllowing terms:
a) Key signature
b) Accidentals
5. Illustrate the ascendin-e scale of D rnajor on the LZl
stave berow using minims. Do
not add a key signature but add in all the necessary
accidentals. Also mark the
positions where semitones are founrl.
t6l
Visual
OBJECTIVES
illustrate obseryational and imagina.ry drawings
apply art elements and principles ol.desrgn inlmaginative
composition
explore tints and shades in life drawinss.
I'iG\
r^.i
Introduction
Drawing can be done in many forms in the world or art. One can draw from imagination, from
observation or from areal life object. In all these forms of drawing, artistic techniques such as
the elements and principles of art and design should be illustrated. The same concepts apply
for abstract drawing even though it has its own art principles.
Observational and imaginary drawings

Observational drawing
Observational drawing involves the drawing of arranged
objects from the angle or perspective from which the artist
is viewing them. In observational drawing elements of
afi such as line, shape, colour, value, texture, space and
lighting should be observed.
Observational drawing
Imaginary drawing
This is drawing that comes from within the mind
of the artist. It is dra',.ving that requires an arlist to
have a good imagination, knowledge, experience
and emotion. The only guiding aspect in imaginary
drawing is the limit of the aftist's imaginative mind.
imaginary drawing
Abstract compositions
In some cases, artists tend to create artworks that are very difficult to decipher as to what exactly
the arlist was creating. Such artworks are called abstract cornpositions. The alrangement of
artistic elements and principles in an abstract composition appear to be childish and lacks any
definite pattern or figure. However, the artistic techniques applied have an appealing effect
that makes the artwork beautiful.
Abstract drawing Abstract painting

Abstract cra./ts
-lbstrutl st,ulpture
Lil'e drarvings
Manv tinres arri.sr: tend to dran real iit-e people. This is a fonl
of drau'ing that bcc-an lorg ago as irfluentiar people where
captLrred ;rrtisticallv trorn lif'c as tl-reir portraits u,ere r-nade.
it
usuall"'in,r'ir,jr. iii,r.,ring u pel'sor1 uho is nrii:rtaii-rir-ig ihe sanre
pose or stirnce fbr a long period.
[,ila dtutrin,g.s
:{rt elements in lit'e drawings

Tone - It is the lightness or.ciarkr.les: L)t u uoloLrL
Colour - It is the visLral impression that dcper-lds on the reflection or absorption
of light
fl-orll a gii'eil surtbce anci has ritrec clraracieristics which
are hue. value and intensity.
'['exful'e - lt is tite surtacc'qiralitr'
,ri'iirlriii.ii]i:. either acttral or i]s car be sccn.
Line - It is a poirrt n.]ovlng in space arrci can varry in ll.idth. length. cul.\.atr-lre. colour.
or c-iirectron.
Space - it is tlre cnlptiness r)r'alca beiuc'cn. uroLincJ. above. beiorv.
or contained
vr irhin oblccrs
Shade - It rs colour ivith black added ro it
Form - It is the appearance of an objr'ct to iiare l-reight, width a1d leitgth
or an object being in 3I)
Proportion - It is the size reliitionshiprs of onc part to the whole and
of one part to
another
1. Make an imaginary drawing that has a iheme of Heritage.

2. Create an abstract painting using local ly available,-naterials.
3. Make an evaluation report on the artwork below:
CROSSWORD PIJZZLE
7
,
4
Down
1. Drawing something that is pictured in the mind
2. An art element that shows the llightness or darkness of a hue or neutral colour
3. The lightness or darkness of a colour
4. A point moving in space and can vary in width, length, curvature, colour, or direction
5. A colour with black added to it
6. The size relationships of one part to the whole and of one part to another in a work of
art
Across
1. A drawing of a human figure in a fixed position
Z. The visual impression that depends on the reflection or absorption of light from a given
surface
3. An art element that shows an enclosed space
4. A type of drawing that is nonflgurative
E
Summary
' Drawing is found in two fonns which are observation
and irnaginary drawing.
' Art has elements which include line. shape, colour,
texture, space and lighting
' Abstract compositions are those that do not 1arue,
have definite figures o.
' Drawing a human being who is at a stationary iur,.-,
position is called life drawing
I Clossan,
Appealing - Attractive
Portrait - Msual representation
Shade - A colour with black added to it
Balance - The overall distribution of visual weight
a composition
3-D - Having height, width and depth
MULTIPLE CHOICE lr0 MARKSI

l. Drawing from the mind is called
drawing.
A. imaginary B. life
2. Drawing of aruanged objects is called
C. observation D. abstract
A. imaginary B. life
3. G
An element of art which shows size relationships
D. abstract
of parts is called
A. tone B. proportion C. colour
4. The surface quality of materials is refer red
D. line
to as
A. texture B. form C. th.*.
5. \,Vhat do we call arlwork that has height.
D lines
width and length?
A. Abstract B. 2_D C. 3_D
6. The lightness or darkness of a colour is called
D. Imaginary
A. tinr B. black C. ;hud"
l. Drawing a human figure frorn sight that is stationary
D. shading
is called drawing.
A. imaginary B. life C. observatior- -
8. What do we call a drawing of arranged objects?
o. lbrt.u.t
A. hnaginary B. Life C. Observation D. Abstract
9. wirat do we call the visual impression that depends
on the reflection or absorption
of light fiom a given surface?
A. Colour B. Line C. Drawing
10. what is referred to as a painting, drarving, photograph,
D. portrait
or engraving of a person,
especially one depicting only the face or head
and shoulders?
A. Portrait B. Paintin-s C. Drawing D. Abstract
SECTION B: STRUCTURED
[20 MARKSI
1. De{ine the following elernents of art:
a) Line b) Colour
c) Texture d) Space
l4l
What is the different between a painting and a drawin5;? l2l
Explain the following types of drawing:
a) imaginary b) observation t4)
4. What is a shading technique? l2l
5. Why is shading important when drawing? t1l
6. Explain what is meant by tonal variation? 12)
1. Clearly classifli the three types of artworks shown below: t3l

L
a b
8. Expiain how proPortion important when doing an afiwork.
lz.t
I
Theatre
OBJECTTVES
. maintain a rehearsal notebook to sketch directions and blocking
. master blocking
. assess the impact of blocking
. use improvisation to discover characters and motivation
. contrast sets suitable for the environment
. create characters suitable for the environment
. use actions that exhibit tension and suspense.
lntroduction
Most theatrical performances involve a lot of movement on the stage by the perfotmers' This
movement of actors should be a guided one, so as to avoid confusion on stage which ends up
distracting the whole play. In some cases, unplanned movetnr:nts or unscripted scenes tend to
pop up during a play. However, characters should be able to n"raintain the therne of the play.
In addition, characters in a play perform actions that draw the audience as well as creating
suspense and tension.
Blocking: Actorsn positions
Blocking is the planning and working o,t of the
movements of actors on stage. Actors tend
move around and about on the stage during to
a play. Therefore there is need to set
blocking movement that allows each and every out proper
character to be seen on stage and also to
an organised flow of events during the create
play by characters through blocking.
Examples of blocking movements on stage
. Walking across the stage
. Climbing the stairs
. Sitting in a chair
. Falling to the floor
. Getting down on bended knee
Improvisation on characters and motivation
Dtrring a play. actors are faced with changes
that emanate on stage. These changes are
unscripted and are mainly due to some actori
fbrgetting their lines or--or.*ents because
too much excitement on stage or motivated of
to .esporra to the needs of the audience.
Improvisation is the spontaneous style of acting
in which actors perform scenes that are not
previously rehearsed and that are not on
the script is called improvisation.
Motivation entails a character's reason to do or
say things in a play.
Environment/setting
irt thar it requires to be ser so as

lr:f: :iT:::"T:;lT:li::_. :,1,,1,on,,e
This environment.or the setting ola play is the
rr to urlllll uut
ru bring out the
tne
:T,it-"^::T *tf: combinarion of rheatrical
setting is also the set design tbr
or the pla'v'. \'a,ous settings e a* be made for plays
pla.y.. 1:,
background, a birs station or a busy market prace Ike a forest
urronir, others.
*.i
L
1i
st:
$.-
F
E.r a m p I es oJ' .; et d e s igtt s
Actions/tension and suspense

When actors are perfonning during a plav, they
incorporate certain skiils that make a theatrical
performance live and not predictable. The tr,vo
rnost scenarios that they create are tension
sllspense' Tension is the ability to creatc a sense and
of unease, wony, anxiety and nervousness
witliin the ar'rdience during a play. {t is usually" empioyed
to counteract what the audience
assurles to happen. Suspellse is the creation of
expectations within the audience. This is an
actinq skill that leaves the audience \{'aniir.rs and
erpecting rnore to happen in a piay.
m
and discuss how
1. Watch a short playfrom the internet orfrom your school drama club
blocking was been done by the actors. Also comment on whether the movements
were suitable or not and if they made the play better or not.
2. Design a set for a play that is focusing on Environmental issues'
CROSSWORD PTJZT.LE
TI 7
tll I _l
2
F
l:ll 4
6 I
Atross
. The skill of leaving the audience wanting to see more of the play
1
2. The movements of actors on stage

3. A character's reason to do something
4. The environment depicted on stage'
5. What can be used as Part of set
6. Execution of unscriPted scenes
Down
1. An example of a blocking movement
2. People watching a PlaY
3. A sense ofunease created by actors in a play
Summary
. Blocking is the planning and working out of the movemonts of actors on stage.
. Improvisation is the execution on unscripted scenes on stage
. The desire of actors to do something is called motivation
. Set designs can be created differently for different plays
. Tension and suspense are special skills that are used by actors in a play to make it
not
predictable.
f,El
i^-./
Environment Setting
Suspense Moment of anxiety and cr,rriosity
Tension A feeling of worry or unease
Atmosphere The mood creared by the play
[,{UI-TIPt,E CH(}ICE u0 N{ARKSI

l. The rnovernent of actors on stage is called
A. runnin_u B. blocking
@
2' Creatin,e a sense of unease within the atrdience D. acting
is cailed
A. motivation B. tension . C. ,rrp.n*
3. An actor's desire to do somethine is t:alled.--a D. blocking
A. motivation B. iension ,*p.r*
4' The act of reaving the audience rvith curiosity is cailed D. blocking
A. rnotivation B. tension ;L. ",.^.-_-
5. What do we call the roles of actors on stage./
SUSpenSe D. blocking
A. Theme B. Characters C. Set
6' what is refen"ed to the environment created on
D. Comedians
stage tbr a piay?
A. Set B. Theme C.
7 " What do r,ve call the rnood creatcri
Decoration D. Fumirure
by,. a play o, stage?
h. Atmosphere B. Tension C.
8^ \'vhat detennines the type of set to be r'iesigned
Suspense D. Motivation
t-or apray
A. Characters B. Tirne C. -fheme
9. The space onto which actors per.fbi.nr ,-rii
D. Venue
rs callecl
A.
A -^+
set B. C.
10.
stage
What do we call the people who watch
carpet D. costume
a play'i
A. Adjudicators B. Crow,d C. I\{anagers D. Audience
SECTION B: STRLTC.[LiRr] r)
QLTESTTONS [20 MARKSI
l. Define the following terms as used in theatre:
a) hnprovisation b) Tension c) Mood
d) Suspense e) Motivation
2. Explain the in-rportance of a set clesisir. t5l
J. What is meant by characterisation,l l2l
4. Explain the lollowing tenns in theatre; 12)
a) Blocking b) Scriptrvriting
5. What is the importance of suspense L4l
in a play'/
6. What is a sr,rb-text in a piay? t2l
7. State any 3 types of moods that l2l
can be cr eated by a play.
t3l
OBJECTIVES
. create movement sequences
. affange movement sequence into dance skits
. use the dance skits for choreography
. demonstrate increased focus, physical control, co-ordination skill and accurate
reproduction in performing locomotor and axial movement
. identify themes for dance
. discuss how to incorporate themes in dance
. create sequence using the identified themes
. rehearse dance skits
. perform dance to a paying audience.
Introduction
Dance performances are organised movements that entail a given theme. Even though dance
is sponianeous when one is listening to music, it can be noted that a dance performance is
more than a spontaneous activity. This is so because it involves creating and arranging the
dance movements to be performed. However, dance movements are subject to change during
a performance resulting in improvised movements being created. Themes in dance enable
performers to create dance skits that can be performed for a paying audience.
Performance of movement sequences

Every dance performance has a speciflc movement sequence. This movement sequence entails
the guide on how dance patterns are to be executed. A movement sequence or pattern is a
repeated sequence of movement ideas, a rhythmic movement sequence, and a spatial design
on the floor or in the air, or a specific relationship or grouping of people during a dance.
Examples of dance movements include:
. Bending . Jumping . Sliding or gliding
Stretching ' Turning , Dart
'
. Rising
Improvisation and choreograPhY
Despite being carefully planned, dance performances somehor;v tend to involve circumstances
when non-rehearsed movements are performed. Changes and unforeseen events can happen
during a dance performance leading to the movement sequence changing and thus the need
for improvisation.
a) Improvisation
It is the act of creating and performing unplanned, unrehearsed or unscripted dance
movements during a dance performance.
b) Choreography
It is the creation and composition of dances by arranging or inventing
steps movements, and
patterns of tlovements for a performance. Choreography
can make use of the AB, ABA and
rondo sequences as well as retrograde in developing a choreographed
performance.
AB Two-part conrpositional fbr-nr rvith rrn A and a B theme
ABA A three-part compositional lorrn in which the second section differs
with the
first section and the third section is an interpretation of the first section
in a
condensed, abbreviated" or extendcd form.
Rondo - A rnusical fbnn in lvhrch a sectior-r is repeated, with contrasting sections
in
between. such as ABACA
Retrograde - The act of taking a seque nce o1'choreography and reversing
the order lrom
back to front.
Elements of dance
" space is the area in and around whicii dance n-loves are performed"
' Time is an element of dance involr in-e rhl'thm phrasing, tempo, accent
and duration.
' Force is the release of potential encrgy into kinetic energy. It utilises
body weight, reveals
the effects of of the body and is prr5ected into space.
-qravity
' Energy is the amount and type of fbrce appiied to movement.
' Shape is the positioning of the body in :ipace and it could be curved.
straight, anguiar,
twisted, symrnetrical.
Locomotor and arial movements
In dance' there are two rnajor types of nrovemeuts. These are axial
and locomotor movements.
a) Axial lrovements are ilrose thal happu,t at a stationary position. These include
swingin,q. tilting, turning, shaking. ioi-,iin-u. bending, pulling. fallir-rg,
twisring.
stretching and reaching.
b) Locomotor lxovelllents are ntovernents that involve travelling through
space.
They include the likes of sliding. mnning, rolling, walking, skipping, jump,
hopping, crawling and leaping.
Thematic dance drama
A dance theme is an idea based on a particulai' subject or topic that a dance
must bring out
through the arrangement of its dance rnovernents. Therefore, movement
patterns are then
cornbined with a dance theme in creating dance skits which are a
short theatrical episode
perforrned in front of an audience in dance or a dance drama. Examples
of dance themes are:
. Animal Theme
. Work Theme
. Military Theme
. Colours Therne
. Space Therne
. School Theme
Create a dance skits using the following movement sequences:
a) Retrograde
b) Rondo
2. Watch your local school dance group performing any ind.igenous dance type and
evaluate the following:
a) Use of improvisation
b) Effects of performing to live music
CROSSWORD PIJZ7.,LE
Across
I .
An idea based on a particular subject of a dance
'A
2. short dance theatrical period in dance
3. Area around which a dance is performed
4. A movement sequence in which a section is repeated with contrasting section in
between
5. An example of positioning the body in space
Down
1. To perform an unplanned dance movement
2. A dance movement that is the same as sliding
3. Reversing a choreography sequence
4. An example of a dance movement
5. Movement sequence with two forms
Summary
. Dance performances can be created and composed
. There are elements of dance and themes of dance
. Choreography is responsible for the production of a dance movement sequence
. Dance performance can be done to a paying audience
@
Glossary
Accent - A strong l-novetnent or ge:iture
Theme - Idea based on a particLrlar.subject or topic
skit ,\ short theiitrical episot{c
Audience Assembled spcctators anci oi listeners e perlbnlance
L',LT'rPt_[- cHoIC0 I10 I{ARKSI

,,\n eranrltle ilalrcc lni.)\'cntalt i i5
A. -ulicling ts. citt,r'cograpiti t'. Ilattenl ll. sli ir
Creation uncl arr {rnqet.}tcitt clf dance ilililcilis is crlii:rl
A. arran{cirrer.rt Fi citix-crrur-rr;:it,, (a' i,t. .ri;ilcing
r
:.i li
Whiit c1o r,r,c ciill- sltort tlicatt-icii i cir i so,-ic pcrf-orrled itr ii-ont oian ai-rdierrcc
r rr tiancc'l
A. Daitcc sl<it B. Rondo
t'. P.itt'rtgi';:il: ii. filroi-cou;-a1;hr
1. A clartcc ll0\,e llcnt i,i,hich is thc siunc -i5 slidins is
.\. gliding B. tunrrng C'. r'ising l) -prr.nping
-l'irc
5 nrrrin ri'le a of a clanc.. is callcC a
\ idca R lllCSsiitltl (-'. therne D clancc skit
(r
'fire
act rt1- llcrlbrntil,f Lrpplalrrcrl clalrr.; illovirlcnts is called
A 'r',-r ti. itr
r
ti. cirore ographr
t'. inrpr.r l,isl.rtI oit D. in'ri;r'ovenrcnt
,\n c.'irtirrpir,-ti-;i r_lilr1{i: \a:i,; iicl.rr'L i:."
\. rii,iirr r I ,1,,, 1,,
tl. inovcntcrir D. improv,isatiorr
8. \l'hat,-l(', \,,'C ,,tali f Sti'(ilt_{ 3ti)\ iril.raila \:t,rCStLlfC rtr tiA'Ce,.)
A. Ronclo B. Skrt C.. i\cccr.rt D. patrc_rn
L). Revcrsinq a choreogi-aph_v sealtienrc is Lnor,r,n as
,\. ronclo Fl. ABA (.. ,l ,t -- D. retr.ogracle
10. A l,o'cl,c,t scrl*c,cl rr ith tr,,,. ibr,ts i:; calleci
A. rcspoltse B. clror-coslaf.,lrr t. AB D. caii
Sl,{tII{,i\ tJ: r'r RI,q:"i i trf.,t] {JL{aS ftt)NS l2{i NIARKSI
t. l)cfinc thc tbllctu,ing tiancc llo\ cntcnt in dance:
;Ls lrsecl
a) TLrnring b) Juntping
c) {llrdine d) Strctchine f4l
2 [:rplain thc concepi r;i'lnt]-rr-r.rr islriion :lr tllince.
- t2l
-). What is choreograltir_i'., I)l
l-l
.-l . What is ntc.ant Lrl, titc ir-1.i1] alallj .;e sctlLi;ncc,.)
,5. Outlinc the fbliou,rng d;ince \.,lLlcltrcr aclclirrg r li Lrstl-atioits tviterc ilecessiirv
l't)
A) ABA b) Rondo
c ) I{etrograrlc .l) ( all and rcspoltse
(r. \Vitat is iinitatittr.r in tiitril.r', L8j
9L*;
Topic 3 Aesthetic Values and Appreciation
OBJECTIVES
Learners should be atrle to:
. derive mea0ing from works of music and perfonnance of musicjans
. prepare adjudications sheets for choir
. adiudicate choral and indigenous music.
Introduction
Music is made up of a combination of many elements that are brought together to create
musical pieces. These elements include rhythrn and pitch as the main ones. Both recorded and
live music should display correctly organised musical elements in their performances. It is
these musical elements that are considered when music adjudication is being done.
Elements of music
Music elements are the basic structures upon which mursic is created. A good and organised
an angement of these musical elements brings out aesthetics in music.
Rhythm - Rhythnt is a pattern of regular or irregular pulses which happen in music fron-r
strong and weak rnelodic and harmonic beats.
An example of a rhythm
Pitch - it is the highness or lowness of a tone or sound.

rflr6
'!orE
6 HlqfiEe...-.
l
A
I
f,{,E Nrf€
'I,lAFI
EE\
l'^-./
Melody - a musical sequence of single musical tones that are organised tn a song or
a ntusical piece
Enclos'd in cinders
\\.Ii-T IAN,I SI{AKE SPEARII TFION{AS C'HEV
p
SOPR,\NO
--^J',
Beau - t\ beau
^f "t
,\LTO
'--l---l---.--
B r'att fA
p ,t'
TENOR
U
Beru tnrth ancl ri - tie.
An example of a melody
Timbre - It is the quality and tone of a sound which makes it unique.
Texture - describes how layers of sound within a piece of music interact
Form - The overall organisation cf sections in music
Expressions - The markings that entail how the music is to be performed
' These elements are used when assessing and deriving meaning frorn both recorded and
live music.
' Recorded music is a physicai record of any musical performance that can be played back
or reproduced.
' Live music is when any musical performance is being done in front of a live audience in
real time.
Music adjudication
This is the formal and overall assessment of a musical performance. It focuses on evaluating
the execrition of musical elements. Choral or voice adjudication focuses on the following
criteria as noted from a choral adjudication sheet:
Possible Remarks
Mark
Posture and Arrangement
Pitch and Attack (starling together, con ect pitch)
Balance and Blend
Tone quality and voice production(cladty of ]
words)
f*Tt
t^/
Performance Directions
Score and Interpretation
Conducting
General Musicianship
Total 100
Overall Remarks
a) Posture and arrangement looks at two main aspects. Posture looks at the convenient
manner of standing that supports singing. Overall affangement of the choir focuses
on the arrangement of choristers in a way that makes every singing part audible
(soprano, alto, tenor).
b) Pitch and attack is all about the choristers being able to sing in the correct key that
is given. It also involves the ability to sing at the recommended dynamic levels as a
choir.
c) Balance and blend is all about how the singing parts sound together to produce
harmony. It also involves the balance of volume levels (dynamics) for these parts.
d) Tone quality and voice production is about the quality of voices produced and the
voice types (tremolo, vibrato) being produced.
e) Conducting is the ability of the conductor or director to lead the choir. The conductor
must show the correct rhythmic movement, time signafure and expressions.
Score and interpretation focuses on the ability of the choir to perform what is
required by the score or musical piece. This involves the execution of performance
directions, rhythmic and melodic structures on the score.
s) Performance directions entail the ability to follow the given markings on the score. '
These include tempo markings, dynamic markings, technique markings and
expressive markings.
h) General musicianship is all about the personal skills that the conductor and choristers
exhibit during the performance.
1. a) Design your own percussion band adjudication sheet clearly stating the
aspects that need adjudicating.
b) Use the adjudication sheet to adjudicate the percussion band at your
school in performing any short musical piece of their choice.
2. Listen to any two songs of your choice from difl'erent genres and assess the
implementation of musical elements in the two songs.
ral
i,^Lr
JTJMBLE LAI\D
Rearrange the following words to come up with musical terms and explain
what they
mean.
{. IDJTUICANAOD * ROECS
* ELYMDO *AMCSDIYN
{. EIMRBT * XUETERT
.i. PITATTERONRNEI * SIOEESNSXPR
* HIMSNCIAPUSI * MRTHHY
Summarl'
' Elements of mnsic form the basic stnrcture of any musical piece
' Any rnusical performance. recorderj or iive, can be adjudicated
' Arangement of musical elements in a musical piece brings out its aesthetic values
' An adjudication sheet is an instrr-tment usec'l to adjuclicate a mnsical performance.
GIossary
Pulse - Beat
Musicianship - Personal as a muslclan
Aesthetic - Beauty
Binary - The structure of a piece of ntusic which
different sections
Adjudication - Assessment or evaluation
MtrLTrPl_E CHOICE [10 MARKSI

1. A rnusical fonl is how a piece of music is arranged in
A. sections B. competitions C. steps D. forms
Arrangement of musical tones in a sequence fonns a
A. rhythm B. beat C. melody D. pitch
3. A combination of two or more melodies results in
A. binarwJ B. harmonl, C. rhythm D. melody
4. Markings that suggest the speed of a song are called markings.
A. dynamic B. tempo C. rnelodic D. rhythmic
5. Assessment of a musical perfonlance is called
A. rnarking corectrng
C. adjudicating fault finding
6. The highness or lowness of a soLrnci
A. pitch B. r,olurne C. rneiody D. rhythrn
'7
.
The intensity of a sound is
A. pitch B. volume C. melody D. rhythm
8. The personal skills one has as a musician refer to
A. conducting B. dancing C. musicianship D. singing
9. Leading a choral performance is called
A. singing B. solo C. conclucting D. expressing
10. A musical form with two different sections is said to be in form.
A. binary B. duple C. simple D. compound
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS [20 MARKSI
1. Deflne the following musical elements giving example where necessary:
a) Timbre b) Texture
c) Form d) Melody t8l
2. Explain the difference between pitch and volume.
a
t2)
J. What does it mean if music is in binary form?
t2)
4. Explain the following in terms of music adjudication:
a) Balance and blend b) Scoreinterpretation
c) Tone quality d) Voice production tSl
OBJECTIYES
[-earners should tle able to:
. derive meaning in works of art
. analyse form and content used in works of art
' discuss speciflc criterion to be used by individuals or groups to access and critique
works of art
' use elements and principles of design to assess works of art.
Introduction
The beauty of art lies in its form as much as it does in its content. Different works of art
have different meanings depending on how they are rnade. Assessment of these artworks is
guided by evaluation of art elements and principles of desigrr. These include shape among
other, texture, colour and line. When individuals or groups assess and critique works of art, a
speciflc criterion is used.
Aesthetic qualities
Aesthetic qualities entail the beauty of art. For artworks, the aesthetic qualities are seen,
noted or deduced from assessing the artwork's form and content.
fi3-?I
L^r./
a) Form
Form is the three-dimensional volume or the illusion of three dirnensions that can be noted in
artworks. It entails the parlicular characteristics of the visual elements of an artwork.
An example of form lSDl * It sltrttt,s rttt illusiotr oJ'Jbrm on poper
b) Content
Each and every artwork as created by an artist car-ries with it a message. This message, idea,
or t-eelings expressed in a work of arl is the content of the afiwork. In most cases it is easier to
conclude the message carried in the artwork. However, rt can aiso be noted that viewers tend
to deduce varied content from aftworks ancl this is the beautv of art.
Elements of art
Tone - It is the lightness or darkness of a coloLr:'.
Colour - it is the visual impression that depends on the reflection or absorption of light
from a given surface and iras three characteristics rvhich are hue. value and
intensity.
Texture- It is the surr'ace quaiity of materials, either actuai or as can be seen.
I-ine - It is a poini iuoving rn space :rnci can ,,'t1r)' ir.r i,r,idtii. iength, cl1r.",ature, colour, or
drrection.
Space - it is the emptiness or area between. around, above, below, or contained within
objects.
Shade It is colour with black added to it.
-
Principles of design in art

The principles of design in art irnply the rules that a designer must follow so as to create an
effective and attractive composition. The tbilorving are the principles of design that are found
in art:
. Balance . Proportion
. Alignment . Repetition
. Contrast . Emphasis
i\ssessrnent of arfivorks
For a work of ar1 to be considered to have ,9ood aesthetics it should match the guidelines of
making ar1. This is the way in which art elernents and principles work together to influence
the mood, feeling or tneaning of an artwork. Viewers tend to see artworks differently and also
deduce different meaning or content frrlm artworks. Therefore, ail aesthetics should be guided
by the following principles:
a) Imitation
The major pu{pose of art is to imitate or reconstruct nature.
A11 elements of art are used so as to have a high-quality
imitation. The ability of an artwork to imitate reality proves
it to be an exceptional artwork.
Artwork depicting reality
b) Formal qualities
These are the elements and principles of art which the artist focuses on so as to bring
out the desired form of the artwork. The purpose is to create forms and images that
are appealing or eye-catching and pleasing in the eyes of the viewers.
c) Emotional qualities
These are qualities that express the deep artist's emotions,
beliefs, feeling, social, cultural, econ6mical or political views.
Therefore, an artwork should be able to stimulate emotions
within the viewer making the viewer understand and relate to
the arfwork more.
An artwork showing emotions (Anger)
Activities
1. Make an imaginary drawing with a theme of Child Protection.

2. Exchange your drawing with your art partner and assess each othert artworks
looking at the following qualities:
a) lmitation
b) Formal
c) Emotional
JUMBLE LANT)
Rearrange the following words to come up with visual arts terms and explain what
they mean.
MFRO * GNTALNIME
'* NTCOTEN * IORORPTNPO
* oRcLo * ORCASTTN
* HASED
'TAIMITNIO
* I\NBCELA
* OTEN
r,;l
\^-./
Summary
. All artworks have fbrm and content.
' Elements of art include texture, line, tone, colour, space and shade.
' The guiding principles of design in art include balance, alignment, proportion,
emphasis
and contrast.
Glossarv
Critique - Analyse or evaluate

Form Shape or physical appearance
Content Message contained or disirla)'ed an afiwork
Deduce Figure out rleanins
Stimulate Arouse
N{ULTIP|,E CHOTCE [1CI MARKSI

I . An example of an art elernent is
A. shade B. cLtrviirture C. aesthetics D. fonn
). The 3D structure of art is calleci
A. colour Il. content U. forrtr D. tone
The message idea and feelin_q cnrbecidctl an artwork is knor,vn as
A. sculpture B. contcnt t'. aestherics D. lbnr
4. Adding black to a colour procluce s l
A. shade B. colour C" white D. dark
Tl-rc visLral intpressions that depencl lcilection of light entail
A. Art B. ColoLrr C. Aesthetics D. 3D
6. An example ofprinciple of design in arr below is
a
A. Shade B. Balance C. Light D. Tone
I . What do we call a thorough analysis ot'an artwork?
A. Adjudication B. Criticlure C. Emotion D. Value
8. what quality is associated with the erpressions of an artist an aftwork?
A. Emotional B. Lritatiori C. Realitv D. Fonn
J
9 - The quality ol art that is able to reconstruct art is known

as
A. reality B. irnitzition C. emotional D. aesthetics
l0- what is called the relation in sizes of parts in an aftwork?
A. Balance B. Proportion c. Emphasis D. contrast
5E,C'ru0\- s'rR{r{ -[[itd]._tr Qt Es'rr()NS J20 ]xARKSf
State any 3 principles of design in art.
i3l
Explain the rneaning of the lollolvrng art elerlents:
a) Color-rr b) Lir-re c) Tone l6l
7",til\
lir-i
Explain how the principle of repetition can be used in an artwork. t3l
4. What quality is shown in the artwork below?
l2l
5. Identify the following ty of artwork. l2l
6. Explain the use of the following principles of design in art:

a) Proportion
b) Contrast L4l
OBJECTIVES
. use theatre vocabulary to describe theatrical experiences
' explain how culture influences affect the content or meaning of works of theatre
. identify dramatic elements within a performance.
Introduction
Theatre is an area that has the capabilities of depicting what happens in real life situation
in a dramatic way. However, it can be noted that theatrical plays are largely influenced by
cultural aspects. Culture influences the content and meaning of works of theatre in a variety
of ways. These include the cosfumes worn, theme of play, language and characterisations.
Within a theatrical play, certain dramatic elements come to play so as to make the play more
captivating.
Aesthetic qualities in theatre

Theatrical performances are directed by two main qualities which are form and content.
1la!
l,^r./
' Fonn is the overall structure of a theatrical play that normally fbllows an established
design. Fotms may refer to a literary typc like a nanative form, short story tbrm or
dramatic forrn. Basically fbnn is tlie structnre used to tell or arrange a story and explore
themes.
' Content refers to the rlessage, idea, or feelings expressed through a play. It is basically
the main story or topic of a theatrical play.
Elements and principles of design in theatre

Dramatic elements
Dramatic eletnents are essential f-eatures of every perfonnance. Actors nanipulate dramatic
eletnents to shape and enhance meanins itr a play. Dramatic elements include conflict, mood.
sound, contrast, climax, rhythm, space and tension.
Principles of theatrical designs
These are responsible for adding value to a theatrical play. The principles of theatrical designs
include the set, costurnes and lighting.
Meaning of thcatre rvorks

Theatre is a collaborative fonn of perforrning aft. It makes use of live performers to present
the experiences of a real or imagined event beiore a live audience on stage. Modern theatre
includes performances of plays and mirsical theatre. The meaning of a theatrical play lies
within the theme of the play as a rn hole. Not one scene is capable of generating meaning of tn.
play. It is instead the combination of all the scenes that is able to deflne the meaning of a play.
N'Iask, puppetrr,, make up *nd costunres

Theatre makes use of a variety of style in theatricai plays. These include rnasks, puppetry,
make up and cosfiunes.
A mask is a face covering that is wotrt b'v actors for characterisation. This cogld be done to
simply hide the face or to depict another figure.
Examples of rnasks used in theatre

Puppetry is the use of puppets in theatre. This involves the use of dummies or dolls as actors
in a play. Types of puppets include hand-puppets, finger-puppets, glove-puppets and string
puppets.
*;
, ,l
I
t
'l:,]s.
Examples of puppets used in theatre

Make-up involves the visual effects that are used in theatre. This involves the use of cosmetics
to enhance or change facial appearances ofactors.
Examples of actors with make up

Costumes involve the use of various types of outfits, clothing and gear that actors r,vear ln
plays. Attire is used to represent certain personal aspects in plays.
Examples of costumes in theatre
Actir itfe:
1 . Watch a short play irom the school drama club or frorn the internet and analyse the
following dramatic elements:
a) Conflict b) Mood
c) Climax d) Space
e) Tension
2. Using face paints or locally found materials guided by the teacher, does make-up
on each other's faces for any play of your choice.
@
JUMBLE LAI\D
Rearrange the following words to come up with visual arts terms and explain what
they mean.
* ONCFCTLI * TINLIGGH
* ACSEP * TSE
.:. oMoD {. ESGEN
* SITENNO * UPEPTP
* OSCTEUM * LICMXA
Summarv
' Theatre has content that can be drawn from the play as a whole
' Dramatic elernents in theatre include conflict, niood, sound, contrast, climax, rhythm.
spacc and tension.
a
Meaning in theatre works can be drawn from all the scenes of a play
a
Theatre makes use of tnany types of designs like masks, puppetry, make up and costumes.
Characterisation - The act of inlitating or depicting a character a play

Scene A short part draw'n fi'orn of a play
Collaborative Joii-rt or shared
NIULTIPI,E CHOTCE [IO MARKSI

Tlie overall stnicture of a theatrical play is calied
A. forn-r B. conte nt C. blocking D. structure
An example of a dramatic element is
A. light B. content C. set D. mood
An exan-rple of a principle of design theatre
r
A. set B. colour C aesthetics D. content

4. The rneanin_e of a theatrical play is drawn tiom the rvhole
A. act B. actors C. costLrme D. lighting
5. A small parl of a plal,is czrlled a
A" biock B. piccc SCCNC D. fonn
6. hnitating a character in a play is known as
A. shading B. characterisation C. pLrppetry D. tone
7. What do we call the peak of a theatrical play?
A. Assessment B. Critique C. Climax D. Value
8. what do we call a doll made to characterise or represent a figure in theatre?
A. Puppet B. Figure C. Reality D. Form
9. What actors wear to cover their faces when acting is called a
A. costume B. imitation C. clothing D. mask
10. What do we call the clothing worn by actors in a play?
A. Costume B. Imitation C. Clothing D. Mask
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUI]STIONS I2O MARKSI
1. Define the following terms as used in theatre:
a) Costume b) Mask
c) Props d) Form t8l
2. Explain what is meant by dramatic elements giving examples.
a
12)
J. Explain the following principles of design in theatre:
a) Set b) Lighting 14)
4. What is known as climax in a play?
L2)
5. Why is make-up necessary in a play? l2l
6. Explain the meaning of characterisation.
L2l
Dance
OBJECTIVES
a
identif,z assessment criteria used for performances in dance
a
demonstrate understanding of elements of dance and craft of choreography
o critic two kinds of dance: solo and duet
a
analyse the impact of live and recorded music on dance and performance
a
appraise how group dynamics used with other dancers can be applied to other group
activity
a
describe how dancing builds physical and emotional well-being
explain how different venues influence the experience and impact of dancing.
Introduction
Every dance is made up of form and content. These mzrke up the dance structure upon which
the dance performance builds on. The value of a dance can be assessed following a specific
criterion. This criterion assesses the dance's form, content., space, time and ,.qr.n."r.
However, a dance performance is also affected by the type of ,r'enue at which it is peiformed
and also if the type of music is live or recorded.
f i4i\
i'-.,/
i\esthetic qualities- lornr and rontent in cluncc
The beauty of dance rests in the ability to erecute the perforrnance as a whole in a captivating
manner. This irnplies the ability to bnng out the dance theme and also by artistically
executing the dance pattems and moves.
Dance lbrnr
This refers to the overall structural organisation ola dance. it includes fonn likeAB, ABA, call
and response. rondo, thetne and variation and canon. It also involves the inter-relationships of
nroventents r,vithin thc overall structure of the clance. Dance tbnns are choreographed in line
with the number of dancers that are to pertbm it.
A solo dancer Duet dancers
Solo - Tl-ris is when only one pcrson is perf-ouning the dance.

Duet - This is rvhen two clancers are sinruitaneously perfonling the same or different
routine-
Group - This is atr ensetnble of inore ih:in tr,vo people perlbnnin-9 a dance.
A group ofdancers
Dance content
This is the main idea or rnajor concept of a dance. Every dance has a message that it carries.
The content of a. dance contains and brings or-rt tl-ris message which is the storyline of the
dance.
Elernents of dance
Body -The physical figure ofthe dancer used to execute dances.
Energy - The intensity of a dance lnove rneltt.
Space -The physical area upon which dancers perform.
Time - The period taken to perform any part of the dance.
Form - The overall structural organisation of a dance.
Principles of dance
Dance is not only based on dance elements but also has the following principles that guide
the performance of a dance.
. Time management
. Listening skills
. Problem solving
Venues and dances
The place and space upon which dances are performed has a huge impact on the outcome of
a dance performance. Dances can be performed in halls, studios, clubs, open stage, theatre
parks and in the street. In addition to the place of performance, dances are also affected by the
music. This is so because the music can be recorded music or live music.
Setting Impact on dance performance
Venue
Studio It has smooth floors that support dancing hence it will produce good
sound from the floor. The floors are meant for dancing therefore
the dancers will not harm their feet
Theatre park It is an open

space with a custom br-rilt dance stage. The floors are
not as smooth as in the studio and are generally made of wood or
cement. Therefore the venue fairly supports dancing. They also
fairly produces a good sound when dancers stomp their feet.
Traditional There are usually in the open space and can be done anywhere.
The floor is generally on the ground without any surface covering.
The floor does not support dancing as the sound is absorbed into
the ground and the.
Music
Recorded It maintains a fixed tempo for the dance and does not allow
room for improvisation. There is no room for adjusting rhythmic
patterns as they will not coincide with the music. It is best suited
for contemporary dances
Live It is a type of music that allows for improvisations and adjustments
during a dance performance especially when mistakes happen. It is
best suited for traditional dances.
Dance assessment
ZTG-\
\^-.,1
This is the formal and overall assessment of a dance perfonnance evaluating the exec*tion
of
all the dance elenrents. Dance assessment tbcuses on the following criteria as noted from
a
dance adjudication sheet below:
Comments
Activity
Entrance
i--i
Choreogra
Costumes and pro
Tirne managernent
Space:
Shapes
Curyes
Energy, stamina and
control of muscular
strength:
Balance
Centery
Weight and balance
Flexibility
Posture
Physical control and
coordination
Body alignment anC
coordination I
.]-
Storyline:
Originality
Exposition
Rising action
Tension and development
Falline action
Appropriateness of music
Speciai effects
Ensemble:
Concentration
Focus to collaborate
Originality
Self-Expression:
Sense of perfbnnance
Concentration
Focus
Sta management
Total Marks
Overall Remarks
1. Watch the school traditional dance group performing a dance of their choice and
assess their performance using the dance assessment criterion shown above. Give
reasons for your assessment report.
2. Design a dance choreograph piece for the theme of collaboration that will be
performed by a duet using recorded music.
JUMBLE LANI}
Rearrange the following words to come up with dance terms and explain what they
mean.
* NUEVE * ATPTENR
* ROGRETDERA * DORNO
TMEHE * ORECPHHOYGRA
*' UDTE * EEMNSEBL
* OPUREST * OTYNARIGILI
Summary
. Dance performances have form and content
' Examples of dance forms include AB, ABA, rondo and call and response
. Elements of dance include force, time, space and body
. Dance performances can be performed by sole or duet acts
' Live and recorded music have different effects on dance performances
' Various spaces for dance performances also have varied impacts on dance
Glossary
Theme - Storyline and main idea of a dance

Form - The overall structural organisation of a dance
Assessment - An evaluation
Originality- Uniqueness and not copied
t.
l'^r./l
nIULTIPLE CHOICE I10 NL\RKSI
Overall structural organisation of a dance is called
A. form B. critique C. climax D. value
2. A dance performance of two individuals is called a
A. solo B. duet C. group D. ensemble
3. The message embedded within a dance is known as a
A. aesthetics B. theme C. form D. beauty
4. The physical area upon which dancers perform is called
A. platform B. energy C. rondo D. stage
5. What do we call a one man dance act?
A. Solo B. Duet C. Group D. Ensemble
Which venue produces good sound acoustics during a dance?
A. Theatre park B. Traditional C. Hall D. Studio
What is assessment of a dance performance called?
A. Retrograde B. Judge
C. Adjudication D. Fault flnding
8. A group ofdancers is called an
A.
solo B.duet C. group D. ensemble
9. Retrograde is an example of a dance
A. movement B. sequence C. practice D. form
10. what is known as the uniqueness of a dance without any changes?
A. Originality B. Aesthetics C. Focus D. Beauty
SECTION B: STRUCT'l.jRED QLTESTIOi\S 120 IUARKSI
l. State the meaning of the following as used in dance:
a) Form
b). Content L4l
2. Explain what is meant by the follow,ing dance formats:
a) Duet
b) Ensemble
c) Solo l6l
3. What is meant by the term dance adjudication? tzl
4.. In adjudication of a dance performance. what do the following look at?
a) Entrance stage management
b) Selfexpression
c) Originality i6l
5. Explain how a venue can affect a dance performance. l2l
T*pic 4 Arts and Techrl'ok gt*
Music
OBJECTIVES
. use music software to compose melodies
. insert performance directions to songs using music software
. analyse downloaded and uploaded music from the internet.
Introduction
The global world is fast digitalising and new technologies are being created. Such technologies
have seen their way into music. Software can now easily and accurately do what was once
done manually, especially in song composition. Software like Sibelius ancl Finale has rnany
functions that can notate and express music with accuracy. However, use of the internet
through digitalisation has seen many musical ethics being done away with.
NIusic technology
It is the use of both hardware and software applications and tools to create and perform. Music
software enables musical compositions to be done fast, easy and precise with many tools to
edit and arrange a composition. The most common and user friendly software are Sibelius and
Finale.
..-a +:^.-!+. .: ... 1. '
t.. *.r ra
n
Ir'
re
l. , a . .
l"
{l .,.ffi
L,'
rc
t. .
t,
tJ
'l-11. I !ff
' +i .#.*-
n. :. '
t
6€
!-r
i i.
Screenshot of Sihelius trorksheet

Music software is capable of notating music in both staff notation and solfege. The two
notations can be interchanged as per the Jesilcs of the colnposer. Changing music fiom one
notation to another is called transcription. The contposer can chose any output format after
completion of the work from like portable document fonnat (Pdf), midi, audio or even video.
This is possible through the use of plug-ins tirat the software have. in addition, if tonic solfa
is chosen, the software automatically shows the key in which the music has been written in as
shown in the example below:
Foh nol
lo :t-t lm I. ,; ,; I
d.r:s I'
Song in the key of D major
Song composition
Song composition is rnade easy by rn,,rsic softu,are like Sibelius and Finale. As soon as one
opens the application. it shorvs a qtiick star-t menu where setup is done. This involves selection
of the singing parls neecled. time and key signature to be used as well as score information
to indicate copyrights on the document. This saves one the labor and mistakes in manuallrz
creating a score.
retr
m I il
il II
tuqg hffi h& ffi hrw
n r IIII Y.3' tum ffi. *mm
Quick starl page on Sibelius
Once the page has been created, the composer can start creating a melody by simply dragging
notes from the Keypad Bar and fllling in the bars on the stave. The music software also ailows
for playback so as to listen and edit the melody if need be.
(Pv lrlit t*I!T;1d
m; 5,6 t,rb o -=rqKz Fr

\,> \",n.itr n
v.* h'*r I /\;r 1
t.l
a) iaD
D +ivin:'
.;
l: fi
taa i
h
n:a.lf;l
,i
i
I
;
i7
'{:
t"
::r;:i":::"1. t...
I
t .ltr: An
Sibelius keypad bar
Performance directions
These are markings found on a score that tell how various sections of the musical piece
are to be performed. They are found in groups such as tempo markings, dynamic markings,
technique markings and expressive markings.
Tempo Markings
These indicate the tempo (speed) at which the music is to be performed. They include markings
like adagio, andante, allegro, grave, presto, moderato.
Dynamic Markings
These types of markings indicate the volume levels at which the music is to be performed.
They include the following:
Dynamic MarkingI ji Mear
Meaning
1T Very loud
f Loud
mf Moderately loud
mp Moderately soft
p Soft
pp Very soft
Ethics in music and the internet

Ethics in music necessitate the good and right principles or acceptable behavior in the practice
of music such as:
' Composing music that has a positive irnpact on the society addressing social issues.
' Performing music that raises a positive awareness within the community.
' Create music that communicate and Lrphold good morals and traditions of a people.
. Composing original music and avoiding copyright infringement.
. Desisting frorn pirating music of another arrist.
Technology and the internet make music readily available for everyone's consumption.
However, uploading and selling music on the internet should be solely done by the owner
of the copyrights. This is done so as to do awav with piracy and copyrights infringement. In
addition, music should be bought and dor,',nloaded from olhcial sites of the artists or those
given the copyrights to do so.
1. Notate the melody below as it is using 5ibelius or Finale.

,i', , ,'i1
t,,
a) Compose and add a harmonisinq alto and tenor line

b) Add in two tempo nrarkinc.Js and two clynamic markings
2. Download at least t\/o songs f;'om tlre internet from official sites and write an
anaiytical report on each explaining whetherthe songs are ethical or not.
POP QTJLZ
You have exactly 5 minutes to complete this quiz section...tick tock!!!
1. Give any example of music software

2. State any output format for a completed work of music using music software
3. What do we call a tool that allows playing a composition whilst still working on it?
4. What do we classiff performance directions for volume?
5. State any example of a tempo marking
6. What is the Italian name for the dynamic marking for loud?
7. What are the good and acceptable principles in making music called?
8. What is the letter that represents a volume of soft?
9. What do we call the process of changing music from one notation to another?
10. What is the other name for speed in music?
Summary
. Music technology makes it easier to notate music using any desired notation.
. Sibelius and Finale are examples of music software.
. Song composition can be done using music software for better accuracy.
. Performance directions are found in groups such as tempo and dynamic markings.
. Musicians are encouraged to have ethical practices in practicing music especially on the
internet.
Glossarl'
Key - It is the scale around which a piece of music revolves

Copyrights - The intellectual property that gives the owner the right to copy or
reproduce it
Score - The organised notation of all ofthe instrumental and/orvocal parts
of a composition.
Adagio - Slow
Andante - At a walking pace
Allegro - A fast and lively movement
Grave - Very slow
Presto - Quick
Moderato - At a moderate pace
Plug-ins - Soffware additions that allow for customisation

1. An example of music software is
A. solfege B. finale C. adagio D. plug-in
2. Changing music from one notation to the other is called
A. notation B. transcription C. plug-in D. sibelius
t'c'l
t^-./
3. The following are output lonnats lvhcn ursing rnusic sottware except
A. midi B. audio C. PowerPoint D. pdf
4. Which music software leature allows the courposer to listen to a composition
whilst still composing it'l
A. playback B. keypad C. mixer D. transpose
5. Besides tempo and dynartric markings, we also have others that
indicate _ _
A. speed B. expression C. volume D. posture
6. Tempo markings indicate the of the song.
A. techniqr,re B. speed C. length D. aeslhetics
t. In music, 7.f'stands fbr
A. forle B. flat sign C. fnrajor D. fbrtissimo
8. Which dynamic marking is the loudest'l
A. mf B. pp c. mp D.p
9. Selling an artist's uusicai prodLrcts fbr personal gain is callecl
A. copyright B. piracy
C. ethics D. adverlising
l0 represents orvnership of a nrLrsical u,ork.
A. Copyright B. Piracy
C. Ethics D. Adverlising
i. Define the tbllowinq rer-irrs:
a) Music software
b) Keypacl
c) I'ranspose t3l
2. Outline the process of contposing a sone Lrsing rnusjc software. t41
-1. State any i etliics 'uvhen practicin_u rr",Lrsiic on the intcnret. j
4. Use the extract belou, to ansiver the lbllowins. t_3
Nkosi wami Jesu

Lafgo. = 5()
tD,'hli5l
soPlL\}.{()
I' .s
{. .s,d':- , l,r :t
l,r'
Nko-si w'a-mi ngi - - nda -ze
ALTO
L,, .,,',
'Nkt:-si
.l :- .\I-
ngi -thaI-a
1'ENOR
* .nrr I sr I r, .d isr
Nkr-.-si ngi tlia - l ee Nko-si
,\
a) What is the title of the song? tll
b) In which key was the song written in? u
c) What is the time signature of the song? [1
d) What type of hannony does the song have? [1
e) Which tempo marking is shown? [1
0 How many bars does the song have? [1
g) What type of rest is found in the song? [1
h) what is the meaning of the rhythmic marking joining the last 2 soprano
notes of the song? t2l
i) What is the interval between the last two alto notes inbar 4? t1l
Visual Arts
OBJECTIVES
. outline relevant and suitable technology in visual arts
. use different software to produce works of art
' demonstrate corel drawing, adobe package and other softwares
. observe ethics in visual arts when using the internet.
Introduction
The world is now a technological globe in which hardware and software are being employed
to make work easier. Visual Arts is a field that is now filled with many technological tools
and applications. These enable artists to create artworks with ease and provide them with
many editorial tools that can be used on artworks. These sofhvare packages can even be used
for the production and regeneration of past and present artworks. Different software such as
Adobe, CorelDraw and Photo Paint are used to produce various artworks. This modern day
technology proves to be effective than technology in the past but should be used following art
and design ethics.
Visual arts technology

This technology is able to create artworks faster, easier and provides a wide spectrum of
editing tools to change the appearance of artworks as per the artist's desires.
Visual arts technology involves the use
of digitalized tools and applications in
creating or presenting artworks. Some of
the digital and information Communication
Technology (ICT) tools used in visual arts
are laptops, computers, phones, 3D printers
and cameras.
An iPad used in creating art electronically
Visual arts technology in the past and present
Indigenous Technolog-v in Visual Modern Technology in Visual Arts

Arts
Pottery Used clay that was hand molded Uses oil-based clay which does not
dry and can be coloured.
The molding process is aided by a
machine
Textiles Used animal hide for clothing and Makes use of fabric, textile and is
blankets and was handmade done using machines set to produce a
desired weave
Basketry Was handmade using reeds and Makes use of machinery with
grass materials such as plastics and wire
and other recycled materials
Carving Handmade with hammer and chisel Makes use of an electric chisel of
or sharp stones varying size
Drawing Handmade with cinder, pencils and Computerised and done using
and paint brush on paper electronic pens, pencils and brushes
painting on a screen
Software design package

Msual arts make use ofvaried software packages in the creation and editing of artworks. These
software packages are user friendly and have more tools. Such tools can be automatically
employed to make a desired artwork that could not have been possibly made manually.
Corel Draw
Software used to create sketches, logos. icons, posters and
complex illustrations for videos.
CorelDraw logo
Photo Paint
Software which makes use of a variety colours to create paintings and also to paint in a
drawing.
Iraembrr'mrr,{h, pwn'!orrrlr?!rBt.', 4Errs!w'.E .,dr't.&@,!s d -*.x
El !a fr. !iit* f*d ft'* rhf $F.l li5, }i.*. $f
,.1 ,: - g F b ai t) : 11 E: ,1 i*r * r" " a -i' $I S-a:;[3: rg *
/r*rub. k. . t-.tr* i k{ . , t : }"r,..: !.$t'
;: M&'i-:-,1{s3?B8qryf9i#{X!{!r-iBl|3rt'drYtTt rHwit r .
ix'ilkiic
,l', i
.d
/
+.
ffI
r .a .'1
-.:
Ir 16. {d. trt m }*td ffi (rtt r ffi l{1 r.4dudFra} (re., lr! graer t {k6,
Photo Paint screenshot
Adobe Suite
It is a software package which allows the artist to cornbine multiple images and at the same
time remove unwanted objects from the image. It has three tools which are Photoshop,
InDesign and Illustrator.
Photoshop
It allows editing of images and can also be used to manipulate

colour. It works with pixels. The drawings done using Photoshop
Ps are similar to those done using pencils, chalk and paint.
Illustrator
It is a vector based application. Vector images can be reduced to
scale and are made up of lines and anchor points. Illustrator r:annot
paint with a raster brush
InDesign
InDesign is an example of Adobe Systems software that focuses on a

layout and page design. It can be used to create works such as posters.
flyers, brochures. magazines, newspapers, books, presentations and
electronic hooks.
Ethics in visual arts and the intemet

These ate moral principles that gr,ride the concfi-rct of artists in visual art productions
and these
include atltong others the tbllowing:
' E,nsure that artworks are copyri,qhted so as to avoid copyright infiingement.
' Artu,'orks produced shor-rld be culturally and socially acceptable.
' Avoid piracy by publishing another afiist's artwork without permission.
' Ensure tirat artvr'orks on the internet are sensitive to culture, gender, and other topical
iss Lrcs.
' Avoid makinq editecl digital copies of someone's artwork.
i . Make an artwork of your choice using any of the following software belour:
a) CorelDraw
b) Photo Paint
c) Photo Shop
2. From the artrvork you made, state tl're techniques -vcu applied that you could not
do manually without technology.
POP QTJTZ
\bu have exacfl-v 5 minutes to complete this quiz section...tick tock!!!
1. What is meant by digitalisation'l
2. What is visr-ral afis technolog1,.l)
3. State 3 r\dobe SLrite applications.
4. State 3 nrodem technology tools
,5. What is meant by indigenor_rs tools in art'.)
6. State any ethic in the practice ar1.
7. What does a 3D printer do'?
8. Which program deals witl-i creating sketches. logos, icons. posters and complex
ilhrstrations for videos'l
Summary
' Art makes use of technologies like laptops, computers, phones, 3D priniers ancl cameras.
' There are t\I'o types of tnaterials that can bc Lrsed in art and thev are grouped into
indigenous and rnodern technologics
t'Gl
t.l
a Examples of art software includes CorelDraw, PhotoShop and photopaint.
a
Art ethics should always be observed when using the internet.
Glossary
Application - An application is any software programrne

Regeneration - Renew or restore
Digitalised Put in a digital form for use in a computer
Tools - These are software functions that enable one to insert effects
Pixels - are the individual building blocks of digital photograph
MULTTPLB CHOTCE U0 MAIRKSI

1. An example of technology used in visual arts is
A.
ipad B.
pen
C. ethics D. advertising
2. Software used to create sketches, logos, icons, posters and complex illustrations
for videos is _.
1
A. Corel Draw B. Photopaint C. photoShop D.
InDesign
J. Software which makes use of a variety colours to create paintings ir
A. Corel Draw B. Photopaint C. PhotoShop D.
InDesign
4. The process of renewing or restoring an old artwork is called
A. photocopying B.printing -.
C. remodeling D. regeneration
5. What do we call the building blocks of digital pictures?
A. Pixels B.
Units C. Camera D.Lens
6. which is not an example of an indigenous technology used in art
A. clay B. ipad C. grass D. wood
7. which is not an example of modern technorogy used in art ?
A. wire B. ipad C. reeds D. computer
8. Any software program is called an
A. application B. tool C. software D. hardware
9. what do we call the principles that guide one in doing acceptable artworks?
A.
Form B. Content C. Culture D. Ethics
10. PhotoShop, Illustrator and InDesign are all packages of
A. Microsoft B. Apple C. Adobe D. Linux
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS t2O MARKSI
1. Hat is art technology in visual arts?
t1l
2. Explain the meaning of the following terms as used in Visual Arts:
a) ICT b) 3D printer c) Pixel t6l
ffse-I
\^-./
3. Give two examples of the following tools in visual arts:
a) Modern technology
b) Indigenous technology 141
4. Outline the functions of the following software technologies in visual arts:
a) Illustrator
b) PhotoShop L4l
5. Give any 3 functions of Corel Draw. t3l
6. Outline how technology has changed the world of art. 121
OBJECTIVES
. identif,v appropriate sound, visual and lighting effects for a selected one actplay
. create appropriate sound, visual and lighting effects for one act play
. apply sound, visual and lighting ellects fbr selected one-act play
. evaluate the impact of sound, visual and lighting effects
' identiflz career paths in the fleld of arts technolo-q-v
. outline ethics in theatre when using tl-re intemet.
Introduction
Theatrical productions require specific effects that have the abiliry to enhance the performance
of the play. These effects include sound, visual and lighting effects. The effects are added to
the theatrical plays in an organised and controlled manner that is suitable for the play. The
stage representation of an action or a story or a dramatic cornposition can also be in the form
of a one-act play. Ethical considerations should always be applied in theatrical plays.
Theatre arts technology

Theatre productions require appropriate etlects to aid and enhance a theatrical performance.
The effects can be scene centered or they can apply to the play as a whole. Technological
effects usually found in theatre are sound. visual and light effects.
a) Sound effects
These are intensified sounds that are rised to reinfbrce the perfornance of actors in a
theatrical play. Sound effects irave the tendency of bringing out reaiity or exaggerate
sounds. When actors perform, artiflcial sounds can be applied to intensify gestures and
movement. The sound is controlled electronically and has to be played at exactly the
sante time that the gestures and movenrents are done. Sound effects also set moods and
ernotions of the pla,v.
b) Visual effects
This is the use of make-up.which involves cosmetics and costumes or attire that actors
wear when performing on stage. These are done to emphasise facial features, historical
periods, characterisations and ethnic groups amongst other theatrical designs. Visual
effects tend to draw the audience more into the performance and relate to a character.
c) Light effects
This is the use of artificial lighting during a theatrical performance. Lighting is used
so as to make the actors more visible. Lights are also used to focus on and enhance the
main acts. The stage lights include sidelights, front lights and backlights. The lighting
is controlled electronically and can be designed to produce varied colours depending on
the requirements of the play in different scenes. Lighting also sets the tone and mood
of the play.
Careers paths in the field of Arts Technology

The career opportunities in the Arts Technology of theatre are endless. Amongst the many, the
following is a list of some career paths:
. Sound, visual, lighting and backstage technician
. Actor
. Announcer or narrator
. Film director
. Masks, costumes, puppets and props designer
. Theatre teacher
Ethics in theatre and the internet
These are acceptable moral principles which guide the conduct of theatre stakeholders when
practicing theatre. These include the following amongst others:
. Performing theatrical plays that do not incite negativity in any aspect of life.
. Perform and market culfural themes that preserve the culture of the society.
. Creating own acting styles, especially in costumes and voice types so as to avoid
copyright issues.
. Avoid uploading on the internet renditions of plays that were done by other actors
already without their permission.
1. Create a one-act play and suggest how you would add the following effects:
a) Sound b) Light c) Visual
2. Watch any theatrical play from the internet and discuss if the play is ethical.
POP QtJtZ
1. Which effect deals with cosmetics in theatre?
2. What is a one-actplay?
lq
3. What effects are applied to gestures in theatre,J
4. What is a voice type in theatre?
5. State any ethical practice in theatre.
6. What is known as characterisation,?
1. How does one show 'culture' in theatre,J
8. What does the tenn 'electronic'mean?
Summary
' Arts technology in theatre entails the application of effects to enhance a performance
or piay
' Examples of effects used in theatre include sound. visual and light
' Career paths in theatre technologl, include acting, directing, scriptwriting
and
costume design amongst other-s
' Practice of theatre rs guidc-d bv ethics that should alu,ays be conformed to
Glossary
Enhance improve or devel,tp or inil-ease

Exaggerate To overstress or over enrphasise
Gestures Signals
Rendition Version or an inrerpretation
vr[iLTTPLE CHOICE [10 MARKSj

l. Body movements that indicate signals are called
A. sequence B. chorcogr'"ipii;. gestures D. rendition
2. An example of an effect that is appliect rn theatre is
A. emotions B. sound C. props D. voice
3. Another name for a piay is
A. acting B. dranta C. act D. rendition
4. What is worn by actors on stage is ktrolvn AS
A. clothing B. fashion C. costumes D. shoes
5. The tone set by a play is cailed the
A. emotions B. rnood C. tone D. clarity
6. Cosmetics are used in the application of effects.
A. visual B. sound C. light D. musical
l. Visual effects are used to emphasise
A. light B.characterisation C. beauty D. aesthetics
8. An example of stageiights is
A. sidelight B. blue light C. beamed light D. florescent
9. Objects used in play by actors are knor,vn as
A. costumes B. props C. sets D. tools
A version of a play that was done before known as a
A. rendition B.episode C. series D. season
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS I2O MARKSI
1. Give 3 examples of lights that are used on stage during a theatrical play. t3l
2. Explain the meaning of the following as used in theatre arts:
a) Sound effects
b) Visual effects
c) Light effects t6l
3. What is meant by the term gesture? l2l
4. Explain how can culture be illustrated in theatre? l2l
5. Give any two examples of technology that are used in theatre. 12)
6. Complete the table below:
t4)
Career Role
One who performs acting on stage
Director
Costume designer
One who writes a play
OBJECTIVES
' identifu appropriate music, lighting and visual effects for selected dance piece
. construct set design for selected dance piece
' integrate music, lighting, visual effects and set design into dance performances
. identify ethics in dance when using the internet.
Introduction
Dance like many other performing arts call for induced technological effects. These are
needed so as to enhance the quality of the dance and bring out the desired dance theme. Such
effects involve music, sound, lighting, set design and visual effects. Dance performers are
also making use of the internet to upload and market their dance as well as to interact and
download performances from other dancers. Therefore, there is need to have ethical practices
in dance when using the internet.
Dance technology
It is the use of technological applications
and tools in dance performances and productions.
This technology focuses on incorporation of effects such as lighting, visual, sound, musical
and also set designs.
@
a) Lighting
This is the use of artificiai lighting during a dance perfonnance. Lighting is used so as
to make the perfbnlrers more visual and also to focus on and enhance the main dance
acts. The stage lights include sidelights. front lights and backlights. The iighting is
controlled electronically and can be designed to produce varied colours depending on
the requirements of the dance theme and performance as a whole.
Dancers hecorne t'isible ott .stage becttuse o/'lighting

b) Visual
This is the use of make-up artistr)' and attire that the clance performers wear on stage
so as to emphasise faciai featLrres. historical periods. characterisations and ethnic
groups amongst other dance concepts. Visr-ral effects tend to draw the audience more
into the perfonnance and also have the ctlect of conceptualising a dance and clearly
portraying a dance theme.
c) Sound
These are intensified sounds tirat are used in conjunction with dance patterns,
cspecially ihe rhytl-rnric stepping in', o1r eii in dancc. SoLrnd effects have the tendency
of emphasising movements iike gliding. turnirre. .jumping, stretc:hing or rising. The
soltnd is controlied electronicalh'and iras to be sor-rnderi at exacth'the same tirne that
ihe inov'ei-rcnis ere erecirted s,i-i ir:j ia) cntlti.iasise thenr.
d) Music
{t is di{icult to separate rlusic and dance. Musical effects involve the songs that serve
as inusicai accompanirnent io the clancc peribrmance. The music can be plaved and
ireard from the sta-ee speakels oi' it can be live n'rusic sung by the performers. This
t.t-u-tsic Ser','rS to n-raintain the r-hi,'tlln.i as r,ve ll as the ternpo of the dance. In addition.
music crcates the necessarv ti"rctl.i lbr tire dance perlormance through its speed and
jvrical conient.
e) Set design
Every dance ciepicts rvhat happcns in reality. The ability to create the environrnent in
il hich the pertbnnance takes pl;.ri--e in realitv rvhen on staqe is a necessity. Thus, a set
design is the representation of-an errr,ironrnent on sta-ge. It is rnade possible through
the arrangement of scenerv and plops to be used in a dance pertbrmance. This can be
done physicall,'" by anangrn{i the obiects on the stage. However, technology makes
it easier thrcr.rgh a controiicd eiectlonic background. -[his is iiperated to change the
scenery/ at any point ot'ihe ilanee pertbrnrance as per the requirements of the dance
therne.
Example of a set design
Ethics in dance and the internet
Ethics are the acceptable principles that govern the practice of anything. Dance is no
exception hence, dance performers need to abide to good ethics in their practice. As dancers,
the following ethics should be observed, especially when using the internet:
' Practice and perform dance styles that are acceptabie within the society and community.
' Perform and market cultural dances that preserve the culture of the society.
.
' Avoid copying dance styles and choreographed material that belongs to other groups
without permission.
' Avoid uploading dance style videos that are not well perfcrrmed or well researched on,
especially culfural ones, as they will be an insult to the culture the dance belongs to.
It is also encouraged fordance performers to have their own official pages on the internet
where they publish their videos and choreographies. This will also prevent or reduce their
dance copyrights from being infringed.
Activitics
1. a) Plan a dance set design for a dance piece with a theme of Sexuality, HIV
and AIDS Education.
b) Create the set design using any technological software of your choice.
2. Suggest the suitable effects for Amabhiza dance of the Kalanga people from
Plumtree when it is being performed on stage. Use the format below:
a) Music
b) Sound
c) Lighting
d) Visual
POP QtJrZ
1. What is a set design in dance?
2. State the three effects that can be used in dance performances?
3. What are musical effects in dance?
4. Why are stage lights used in dance?
5. How does one illustrate historical periods in dance?
6. State the types of movements in dance?
l. What is scenery in dance?
8. Give an example of any way in which copyright can be infringed in dance.
Summary
' Dance technology involr,es the toois and applications that are used to enhance a
dance performance
' Effects used in dance include lighting, music, visual and sound
. A set design brings out the actual environment on stage
. Dancers should always practice good ethical skills when using the internet
Glossary
Enhance - hnprove or develop

lncorporation Involve or inch-rde
Characterisation Porlraying
Scenery - The vieu'
MULrrpLE, CHOTCE ll0 MARKSI

1. The arl of bringing a reality enr.ironment on stage is called
A. set design B. acting C. imitation D. scenely
2. A dance effect that maintains rhythrn and tempo rs
A. rnusical B. sound C. visual D. lightin-q
3. Lighting that focuses 0n the main dancer 1S
A. back light B. tiorit light C. side lights D. lighting
1. Which of the fbllowing is an example of a visual effect?
A. acting B. make-r-rp C. song D. dancing
5. a dance effect that intensifies a movement.
A. Musical B. Sound C. Visua1 D. Lighting
6. Musical ellects dance provide and rhythm?
A. tempo B. light harmony D. steps
Ownership of dance ciroreograph.v is l<nolr,n as
A. choreography B. copvright C. rnanager D. contract
What are practices tirat are acceptable and encouraged in the practice ofdance?
A. Code B. C'onduct C. Ethics D. Laws
9. An example of a dance movement is
A. turning B. clarks C. gwaragwara D. rhythm
10. Another narrre tbr a vieu, in a dance perfonnance is called
A. scerie ts. scenery C. form D. str-lrcture
1. What is meant by the term dance technology? 12)
2. Explain what is meant by the following effects in dance:
a) Visual
b) Lighting t4l
3. Outline the difference between sound and musical effects in dance. t3l
4. State any 3 ethics in dance. t3l
5. Why are effects important in dance performances? 121
6. Give any three aspects that are emphasised by visual effects in dance. t3l
1. What do copyrights mean in dance? t1l
8. What is the importance of a set design in dance performances? L2l
@
,]
ma-
roptc 5 Enterprise Skills
..
Music
OB.IACTIVES
Learners should be abie
outline the duiies of the various rnr-isicians
differentiate one musical career fiom another
make tuned rnr-rsical instrurlcnts lor saie
organise exhibitions fbr fund raising pulposes
adverlise finished products in music
perlorm for comr-nercial purposes
create inciderices that clepict acceptable perspectives in rnusic.
Introduction
The world of nrusic is filled i,,,rth rrrn-'"1 .arcer opportunities that one can purslre. These
inciude teaching, composing, pcribni-,ing. cngineenng, producing and rnarketing arnongst
others. Instrument construction is also a careei' path in inusic. Onc carr organise exhibitions
for these manutactured musical instmments and market them as well. The same goes for
musical perfbrmances which can be done fbr commercial purposes.
Cureers in ruusir
The following are some of the career p;rths in nrusic and their duties:
Vlusic career iDuties
Cornposer Conrposing or crcating rnusic for vocal or instrumcntal perfor:rnances
Music educationist ;Teaches
or educates rnusic, both theory and pr-a_ctical
Perfonns nirisic as a vocalist. conductor or instrumentalist
Sound engineers Fr.,.,,i-r.,u sr.rLttitl,t"r- a desired sound
Dancers Perlbrrrs dance accompaniments to songs or
senarate
Adjudicator Judqe-s urus ical perfonrances
Mana-qer Managcs or rlrlls the administrative side of music for an
COITI
I nstr-ument constnrctor Niakes instrurnents for se11

Musical instruments
There are two types of musical instruments and these are tuned and untuned. Tuned instruments
are those that can produce a definite pitch and can have the pitctr adjusted. Untuned instruments
on the other hand cannot produce a definite pitch. Making musical instruments is a process
that requires knowledge of the instrument to be made. The following are some points to
consider when making a musical instrument:
. Is it a tuned or untuned instrument?
. Material is best suited for the instrument
. Sound production of the instrument
. Dimensions for the instrument
. Stages in construction of the instrument
. Purpose of the instrument
' After construction of the instrument, it is usually ideal to have an exhibition where
the maker showcases his or her musical instruments for selling purposes.
Business ethics
a) Soft skills
Soft skills are personal characteristics which enable one to interact and get along
well with other people. They include communication skiils, respect, positive attitude,
listening skills and flexibility. Good communication and listening skills are very
important in musical productions. This is seen through helping other musicians, doing
collaboration songs with other artists, supporting and nurturing young and upcoming
singers.
b) Unhu/Ubuntu/Vumunhu
Unhu/ ubuntuir,umunhu is oneness as well as togetherless which is a humanitarian
aspecl. in the music business industry it is encourage<i to have business plactices that
resemble and promotes oneness in the societies. It can be noted through performing
on concerts anci galas with other artists.
c) Copyrightprotection
Copyright laws protect the work of an artist in music so 1.hat other musicians will not
claim ownership of music or use it in their own music without permission. Record
labels and associations like Zimbabwe Music R.ights A.ssociation [ZIMURA] help
artists protect their work.
Marketing music
Music can be marketed in many ways. Many musir: stakeholders piay a leading role in
marketing music and these include promoters, record labels and retail shops amongst others.
Music advertisements are used to make people aware of musical products. These can be
done through use of media, posters, promotional ciothing and fliers. Digital marketing is also
used to market and promote music. Promoters and events planners also plan live shows and
concerts as a way of promoting and marketing music.
ria'l
[^-,/
1. Create a portfolio of music careers and have at least three prominent examples for
each career.
2. Choose any indigenous musical instrument from Zimbabwe and use locally found
materials to make the instrument. Write a process report explaining how you made
it and reasons for every step taken.
3. Create a marketing and promotional strategy of how you would market and
promote your school choir and percussion band.
MATCH MAKING
Match the aspects on the left to those on the right.
Display of musical
ZIN{URA instruments
Spirit of oneness
UBUl\TU
Ownership of a creation
COPYRIGI{TS
Organization that
lPIRACY protects musicians
I
I
I
I
i
\-;
iEXHIBITIOH l Infringement of rights I
I
I
Summary
'' There are various music careers such as sound engineers, technicians, music
educationists, instrument makers, distributors
' Instruments can be made using simpie materials and can be exhibited
' Business ethics include soft skills, ubunfu and copyright protection
Glossary
Career - An occupation or profession

Sound treatment - Editing and dealing with recordecl sound or space
so that it
produces a desired sound
Exhibition - A display where one showcases a product
Marketing - Advertising, promoting and selling of a musical product
MULTTPLE CHOICE [10 MARKSI

1. Which one of the following is not a career in music?
A. Producing B. Marketing C. Dancing D. Buying
2. One who writes instrumental music is a
A. singer B. instrumentalist C. composer D. writer
3. Sound treatment in the studio is done by the
A. composer B. engineer C. computer D. singer
4. Considering is important when constructing an instrument.
A. colour B. dimensions
C. competition D. performance
5. Music rights associations protect the artists,
A. career B. copyrights C. instruments D. voice
6. Payments made to artists when their music is played are called
A. contracts B. fees C. benefits D. .oyalties
7. Organising of shows and concerts is a way of -=.------.---.
A. promoting B. funding c. advertising D. marketing
8. Making posters and fliers is a way of
A' promoting B. funding c. competing D. marketing
9,Showcasingofmusicalproductsforsel1isdoneatthe
A. exhibition B. concert C. gala D. studio
10. Thesellingofsomeone'smusicforpersonalgainwithoutpermissioniscalled
. marketing B. advertising C. promoting D. pi.*y
sECTroN B: STRUCTURED euEsrroF{s I20 MARKSI
1. What do the following do in music:
a) Promoter
b) Instrument maker
c) Composer t3l
2. State any 5 marketing strategies you u'ould employ to market an upcoming
artist tsl
3. Outline how ZIMURAhelps artists. t1l
4. What does one consider when constructing a musical instrument? l2l
5. Explain the importance of a music exhibition. l2l
6. Explain the meaning of the following in music:
a) Soft skills
b) Unhu/ ubuntu/ vumunhu 14)
l. Explain how copyright protection reduces piracy? i3l
Visual
OBJEC'TIVES
outline visual afis careers and their tunctions in society
constmct indigenous tools and media using locally available materials
prepare erhibitions of artrvorks fbr mounting
parlicipate in commissioned aftu,orks
demonstrate business ethics reier,,ant to artvrorks production
advertise fi nished products.
I ntroduction
Visuai arts encompass a wide range of careers in which one can chose to be a part of. Amongst
these career paths in visual arls is sculpting. drawing, photographing and editing. One can
also choose to make the materials. media and tools that are used in visual arts for commercial
plrrposes as a career. Finished afiworks together with tools and materials for art can be
displayed in an exhibition or art gallery r.vhere they can be viewed and sold.
Visual arts careers

There are many careers in visuals. They include the likes of art gallery director, graphic
designer, photographer, curator. artist. painter, art editor, illustrator, art educationist and
sculptor amongst other.
Career Duties
Graphrc designer Creates vrsual concepts tbr art using computer software
Sculptor Designs and shapes 3I) .';br.,t .ul,.r q-r.ldir1-
"r."^,",g
I Photographer Takes photos of lvorks of art for publishing pLrposL's
Painter Applies paint on portraits and other objects in many styles using water
colours, oil paint and acrylics
Art editor Edits works of art manually or electronically
Curator Collects artworks for exhibition and marketing
Illustrator Produces sketches and pictures for books and magazines
Educationist Teaches the theory and practical side of art
Indigenous tools and media

The indigenous tools and media that are used in visual arts can be made for commercial
purposes. One needs to understand the types of materials to use in the construction of these
art tools and also the process of making the tools. Once this is done, one can become an art
tool maker and also be able to create media that is used in arfworks. These tools and media
can then be exhibited and sold in galleries for commercial purposes.
Exhibition of artworks
An exhibition is an event that is made for artists to showcase their artwork on display. The
artworks can be paintings, drawings, sculptures and even tools made for art. Artists mount and
display their artworks at these exhibitions for people to come and view as they explain their
artwork and make people buy the art pieces.
Examples of art exhibits
Business ethics
These are the guiding principles that guide any stakeholder in the operation of business. In
visual arts, the following business ethics must be observed:
Soft skills
Soft skills include character qualities and interpersonal skills which are used to relate with
others in a business. In visual arts these soft skills can be applied through sharing of artistic
ideas, doing collaborative artworks, supporting and promoting each other's artworks as well
as supporting other artists'art exhibits.
Unhui Ubuntu/ Vumunhu

This is the spirit of oneness and involves working together and humanity towards others. In
visual arts this can be noted largely in the artworks produced. Artists can develop and create
artworks that show themes of humanity. It also involves arfwor:ks that suppqrt the importance
of community.
r7J\
i'^-./
Copyright protection
This is protection that is placed on the work r:f art of arlists. An arlwork or ar1 style of an
arlist should be protected so that it cannot be r-rsed or abused by other arlists. Therefore, arlists
need to have couplete copvrights of their work. This can be done by registering with art
courpanies. It can also be done through ar1 galleries and exhibits where ar1 will be lormally
labeled with an artist's name.
Marketing in visual arts

Marketing is the art of advertising, pron'ioting and marketing arlworks of artists. In visual arts,
when an artist complete an afiwork it tiren needs to be placed on the market to be sold. This
is done through rnarketing agencies as they set up exhibitions for the artist's artworks. The
National Art galleries also irost annual cxhibitions where artworks are marketed.
1. Construct at least 3 indigenous tools that can be used in art using locally available
materials
2. Combine your tools together with others from the class and set up an art exhibition.
3. Suggest at least 5 ways you can market the tools you made
MATCH MAKING
Match the careers on the left to their duties on the right.
GRAPHIC Produces sketches and pictures for

DESIGI\ER books and magazines
CURATOR Applies paint on portraits and other

objects
ILLUSTRATOR Teaches the theorl, and practica I
side of art
EDUCATIONIST Creates visual concepts for art

using computer software
PAINTER Collects artworks for exhibition and

marketing
f 1741
!^r.l
Summary
' There are many career paths in visual art and they include photographer, sculptoi
graphic designer and curator amongst others.
' Creation of indigenous tools and materials that can be used in art is also a career path.
' An exhibition is when artworks are displayed for commercial purposes.
' Artworks should display ubuntu like creation of art that supports the community.
Exhibition - A display of artworks

Gallery A site where artworks are kept for storage purposes
-
Curator - collector and keeper of artworks in a gallery or museum
Commercial- Business oriented
MULTTPLE CHOTCE [10 MARKS]

1. one who creates visual concepts for art using computer software is a
A. graphic designer B. teacher
C. illustrator D. artist
2. is a display of artworks for commercial purposes.
A. Advertisement B. Exhibition C. Marketing D. Promotion
3. One who collects artworks is known as a
A. scavenger B. curator C. librarian D. marketer
4.A produces sketches and pictures for books and magazines.
A. curator B. graphic C. illustrator D. sketcher
5. Art tools that are locally made are called
A. foreign B. exotic c. homemade D. indigenous
6. What do we call the art of advertising, promoting and marketing artworks?
A. Advertisement B. Exhibition C. Marketing D. Promotion
7. A is a site where artworks are kept.
A. museum B. exhibition C. gallery D. market
8. one who makes 3D object by molding or carving is called a
A. artist B. sculptor C. painter D. potter
9. Materials other than tools that are used in art are called .
A. tools B. media C. material D. form
10. Involvement of unity and humanity in an artwork shows
A. Soft skills B. Copyright C. Chariry D. Ubuntu
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUBSTIONS [20 MARKSI
1. outline the duties or roles of the following careers in ar1:
a) Educationist b) Curator
c) Photographer d) Illustrator t8l
/,G\
l'^f.,/
2. Give an example of how to show the following in art:
a) Ubuntu
b) Soft skills t4l
3. What is the function of the concept shorvn below?
l2l
Outline the difference between a sculptor and a potter. l2l
State two ways in which you lvouild market any indigenous tool you would have
made l2l
What is copyright protection in afi? l2l
Theatre
f'rr*rrarrvrS
Learners should Lre able tr::
rcientit--v diffeleni Jareei:s ir ihea!r-',' 'ir-t,,
make an aqe appiooriate theatricai perlormance for business
design costumes and props lbr business
make costumes an<i pi-oos for business
ci:serve business ethics: soti skrils. unhLrl ubuntu/ rumunhu and copyright protection.
Introduction
Theatre arts present many career oppoitunities that involve scriptrvriting, directing and many
others. Theatrical performances can be done as a business in many ways than one for a paying
audience. Costume, puppets and props production is also another career that can be pursued
in theatre for commercial purposes. However, business ethics should always be adhered to in
the theatre business and also in the marketing of theatrical productions.
Careers in ttreatre
Many career paths can be pursued in the world of theatrical arts. Careers such as script
writing, abting, directing, producing, editing, broadcasting and presenting are the common
ones amongst others.
Career Duties
Script writer Writes scripts for performances
Actor Plays the role of a character in a theatrical play
Director Directs the flow of the whole theakical production
Editor Edits recorded plays in terms of scene arrangements
Engineer Works on adding effects to a play on stage or on video
Manager Manages the entire theatrical production
Costume maker Designs and creates costumes and props for theatre
Make-up artist Designs and applies visual effects for the actors
Performances for the paying audience or commissioned \ryork

Theatrical plays can be done for business putposes instead of them just being for
social entertainment. Many actors form or join acting groups so as to become theatre
performers. In some instances actors enroll or attach themselves to arts theatres where
they are given slots and roles in play that are run at the arts theatre. Exampl-es of theatre
centers in Zimbabwe are Reps Theatre, Amakhosi Theatre and Jasen Mphepo Little
Theatre. These theatre arts centers also promote theatrical arts in the country. Zrmbabwe
has seen many renowned actors in theatre such as Kapfupi, Marabha, Sakamuzi, the
late Paraffin and Gringo.
Props and costumes for business
Props and cosfumes can be made for business purposes. C)ne can venture into a business
of designing costumes and props that are specific and appropriate to the theatrical plays'
content. Costumes and props are also made for identification pu{poses of actors. In
addition to costumes and props, puppets can also be designed and made for commercial
purposes.
\
f*.
, ,lf
qw irs .
j
i
An examples of props used in theatre
Business ethics
Soft skills
The creative body is central to contemporary theatrical practice, often implying collaboration
with others. The soft skills in theatre are oral communication shown in how actors speak with
others clearly, precisely and with more confidence, while learning how to vary their pitch and
tone. All these soft skill contribute to one being a valued visual artist.
Unhu/ Vumunhu/ Ubuntu
Ubuntu in theatre is the showcasing of togetherness and it can be displayed in many ways.
Theatrical practices can show ubuntu/ unhu/ vumunhu by inspiring compassion in the society.
t7
\^-.i
Copyright protection
Dance skills of artists or performers should always be protected. It is ideal for dance societies to
be registered and to ensure that their creations in dance performances and choreographies are
protected. In addition, dancers should not copy other dancers'performances or do renditions
without seeking permission first.
Marketing production
Marketing of theatre is the process of ensuring that theatrical productions are advertised and
promoted. This can be done in so many ways using both print and electronic media. Examples
of theatre centers that market theatrical productions in Zimbabwe are Reps Theatre, Amakhosi
Theatre and Jasen Mphepo Little Theatre. The National Arts Council of Zimbabwe (NACZ)
markets theatrical productions at festivals and exhibitions.
1. Make a theatrical production on the theme of Children's Rights as a class. Clearly

explain how and why you wouid price rhe production for a paying audience.
2. Design costumes and props using locally available materials for the production
you designed in activity 1.
MATCH MAKING
Match the careers on the left to their duties on the right.
DIRECTOR lVrites and conres up with a
SCRIPT Applies cosmetics to actors

WRITER
ACTOR Guides the flow of the act
MAKE.UP Creates the environment for a play

on stage
ARTIST
SET Plays a role in an act or play
DESIGNER
Summary
. Careers in theatre include acting, make-up artist, directing, costume making and
scriptwriting amongst others.
' Theatrical productions can be done for commercial purposes and for a paying audience
. Costumes and props for theatre can be made for commercial purposes
. Puppetry is the art of using puppets for characterisation
. The NACZ plays a role in marketing theatre in Zimbabwe
Glossary
Puppet - A doll that is created for use in theatre to represent figures

Broadcasting -Distribution
Contemporary - Modern
Compassion -Sympathy,empathy,consideration
Rendition - Version

1. One who writes plays for theatre is u _.
A. director B. actor C. script writer D. author
2. An plays the role of a character in a theatrical play.
A. ambassador B. engineer C. expression D. actor
3. is an organization that promotes theatre in Zimbabwe.
NSSA
A. -- B. NACZ C. NAPH D. JMLT
4. In which city is Reps Theatre is found?
A. Gweru B. Bulawayo C. Harare D.
Mutare
5. What is a different version of a theatrical play but with the same theme?
A. Episode B. Series C. Rendition D. Scene
6. The practice of using dolls that are created for use in theatre to represent figures is
called
A. acting B. puppetry C. improvisation D. doll
7. Which of the following was a popular actor during the early 90s in Zimbabwe?
A. Marabha B. Bhutisi C. Parrafin D. Gringo
8. Which arts centre promotes theatre in Bulawayo?
A. Reps B. Amakhosi C. Jasen Mpepho D. NACZ
9. Tools that are used by actors during a play are called
A. set B. props C. tools D. costumes
10. One who leads and guides the flow of a play is called a _.
A. writer B. director C. actor D. engineer
I'rzll
t^f/
SECTION B: STRUCTURED QUESTIONS t2O MARKSI
1. Identify any two theatre centres in Zirnbabwe. l2l
2. What is a theatrical production? l2l
3. State the duties that are done by the following in theatrical productions:
a) Manager
b) Costume maker
c) Make-up artist l6l
4. What is commissioned work in theatre? l2l
5. Outline any three ways of marketing theatre. t3l
6. What is a rendition in theatre? t1l
1. How does NACZ promote and market theatre in Zimbabwe? t2l
8. What is copyright in theatrical productions? 121
l)ance
OBJECTIVES
. identify careers in dance
' construct indigenous and contemporary musical instruments for business
' design costumes and props fbr br-rsinr'ss
. create dance pieces for business
' obserye business ethics in soft skills, unhu/ubuntu/vumunhu and copyright protection
. market flnished products.
Introduction
The world of dance has many different sectors and as such, many diff-erent careers are
there in dance. They include the iikes of choreographer, teacher, managers, costume
makers and dancers amongst others. Instrument construction also falls under dance
careers as there is need for instruments in dance. A11 the production and careers in
dance rncluding marketing need to be practiced with good business ethics.
Careers in dance
Various careers are available in dance lrom berng the dance perfbrmer to being one who aids
the dance performance to come out as desireci. The following are some of the examples of
careers that are found in dance.
Career Duties
Choreographer Creates and composes dances by arranging or inventing steps
Teacher Teaches the academic theory and practical side of dance
Costume designer Creates and develops attire and costurnes for dancers
Instrument maker Makes musical instruments that are used during dance
Manager Runs the administrative side of dancers or dance groups
Dancer Performs dances on stage
Set designer Creates and develop the stage environment for dances
Indigenous and contemp orary dance instruments

Dance and music are inseparable. Musical instruments pnovide dancers with musical
accompaniment which guides rhythm and tempo of the dance. In addition to this, instruments
also add richness to the sound of dance songs and music with their timbre. These musical
instruments, both indigenous and contemporary, car be made using simple materials, after
which they are then exhibited and sold for business.
Indigenous Instruments Contemporary Instruments
Amahlwayi Guitar
Hosho Tambourine
Hwamanda Cymbals
Zvlkeyi Keyboard
Magavhu Drum set
Magagada Triangles
Some musical instruments for dance are also found under costumes and attire like amahlwayi,
magagada and magavhu.
Costumes and props

A dance costume is clothing worn by dancers when perfcnning a dance. Dance costumes are
specific to each and every dance as they have a resemblance in the dance that they are worri.
Props are objects that dancers caffy during performances and they are aiso specific ro a <iance
.
Zimbabwean dance costumes and props

Costumes/ attire Props
N4bikiza Hari
Beads Umthanyelo
hnisi Induku
Umcatshelo Shield
Indlukula Hari
Izijego Pfumo
Iiembu Mbezo
Magavhu Tswanda
@
Zimtratrwean and foreign dances as business
There are, many established dance groups throughout Zimbabwe. These dance groups
choreograph their performances professionally and pertbrm them for cornmercial purposes.
Examples include Iyasa Dance Group from Bulawayo and Pasichigare Dance Group from
Harare. Arts theatres like Amakhosi Arts Centre in Makokoba, Bulawayo have a huge
influence in grooming, marketing and prornoting dancers to perform for a paying audience.
In paid performances, individual dancers or dance groups entertaiu a live audience by
performing various dance styles. For this to be possible there is need for thorough research
on the dance styles as r,vell as thorough rehearsals on choreography so that the perfonnances
will be exceptional.
Business ethics in dance

Good practice in dance includes applying knowledge of ethical issues in the practice of dance.
Ethical principles should always be obsen'ed when running a dance business and they apply
to all stakeholders in the dance indristrv.
a) Soft skills
Tire creative body is central io coilt.rnporary dcntce practice, often iniplying
collaboration with others. The soft skills in dance include flexibility, empathy,
resilience, cotnmunication skills. etiquette, respect, emotional intelligence, a positive
attitude, the ability to listen. All these soft skill contribute to one being a valued dance
practitioner.
b) Unhu/Ubuntu/Vumunhu
Unhu/ ubuntu/ vumunhu is the belief in oneness and togetherness of a peopie. This is
the display of oneness and humanity throtrgh dance performances. These are shown
through collaborative dance perfonnances. It can be noted also from the dance themes.
tire dance pattems and movernent sequences as r,vell. Therefore, in the dance business
industry it is encouraged to have business practices that resernble and promotes
oneness. These are business practices that have the society at heart and beneflt the
society and community culturalilr and traditionally.
c) Copyrightprotection
Every dance creation by a dancer or dance group in the fbrm of dance pattems or
choreographed rnaterial needs to be protected. This is stamping ownership over the
creation. Copyright laws protect the rvork of dancers so that they will not be copied
r,vitlrout seeking pennission flrst. Therefbre. it is ideal lor one to ensure that as a
dancer, copyrights are observed at all tinres. It is also ideal to register with dance
societies that protect the copyrights oiartists.
Marketing in dance
Dance productions are marketed in a variety oi'ways. Professional Dance groLlps can rnake use
of the internet and social media platlorms to nrarket their dance products. Print and electronic
nredia can also be used especially the us.- of Arts newspapers. In addition, dance can also be
nrarketed and especially promoted in tlie education sector.In Ztnbabwean schools, dance
is marketed by rnany organisations. An cxample is the Children Perfonning Arts Workshop
t'-r#t
t;rJ
(CHIPAWO) is an arts education development which was established for theatre, music,
dance and media. The National Arts Council (NAC) also markets dance during festivals and
exhibitions such as Jikinya Dance Festival which is held yearly for primary and secondary
schools. Delta Beverages promotes and markets dance by sponsoring Chibuku Neshamwari
Traditional Dance Festival.
1. lmagine you are a choreographer and have been tasked to create a dance
performance for a national event on "Gender-Based Violence'i Use the following
points to guide you in creating your choreography.
a) How many dancers are to perform?
b) How can the theme be brought out?
c) What dance effects can be employed?
d) How long is the performance going to last?
2. You are a traditional dance costume designer based in the rural areas. Explain how
you would design and create costumes for a contemporary or foreign dance of
your choice clearly stating the materials you would use.
MATCH MAKING
Match the following careers in dance to the roles on the right.
Choreographer Makes attire for use in dance
COSTUME Constructs musical instruments for

use in dance
DESIGNER
INSTRUMENT Creates and organizes dance

routines
MAKER
DANCER Creates the environment for a

dance on stage
Summary
There are different careers in the dance industry including teaching, engineering,
dancing and choreographing
People can earn a living from making and selling musical instruments for dance,
costumes and props
' Costume is what dancers wear and prclps is what dancers carry during a performance
' Exatnples of indigenous insttuments for dance are zvikeyi, amahlwayi and magagada
' Dance promoters rnZtmbabwe include CHIPAWO, NAC and Delta Beverages
' Prorninent dance
-qroups
in Zimbabrve include iyasa anci Pasichigare
Timbre - Tone colour or quaiity of sound heard

Contemporary - Modern or current
Style - A way or type of dance
MULTTPLE CHOTCE [r0 MARr(S]

1. one who creates and composes dances by arranging or inventing steps called a
A. dancer B. director C. choreographer D. manager

2. A__ is a person .I]in charge of the administrative aspects of dance.
A. oerfcrme: J.
Ji--^r^.
'-liiL!!\lr C. r'eceptionist D manager
An exampie of an indigenous musicai rnstrument worn on the legs is
li. ::rbiillz.a iJ. iitiliit-lr-.i.. :*. :lnaiti-wayr beads
4. What rs carrie,i b;u. iiancels iurinil a perionnance'.)
A. Cosiumes B. Prop:, C. Drums D. Whistle
Another name for dance costrure is
A. clothes B. fashion C. culture D. attire
5. Which is a dance prop car.rieci by women perfbrming Dinhe?
A. Badza B. Spea:' C. Tswanda D. Umthanyelo
An example of a prominent Zimbabwean dance group is
A. NACZ B. NAPH C. Ivasa D.
8. is an organtzation that promotes dance in children.
A. NAPH B. NACZ C. Pasichigare D. CHIPAWO
9. is a festival that promotes dance in primary and secondary schools.
A. Carnival B. Chibuku Festival C. Jikinya D. NAPH
10. Modern dance styles are referred to as
A. contemporary B. foreign C. indigenous D. colonial
1. What is the function of the following careers in dance?
a) Set designer
b) Teacher V)
2. State any 3 soft skills in dance. t3l
3. Where in Bulawayo is Amakhosi Arts Center found? Il]
' 4. Complete the table below:
tgl
ln{igenous lnstru ments Contem porary lnstru ments
a) Amahlwayi a) Guitar
5. Explain how the following organisations promote anclmarket dance in Zimbabwe?

a) CHIPAWO
b) NACZ L4l
A
--
___t
!
m
PAPER 1 TESTS
TEST 1 i
1. Where is the food stored in the digestive system?

A. Mouth B. Stomach C. Trachea D. Rectum
2. State the function of large intestines.
A. Digestion B. Transportation C. Storage D. Absorption
J. Why are swimmers with open wounds not allowed in the pool?
A. Germs on wounds spread to others.
B. They swim faster.
C. They need swimming goggles.
D. They will fail to float.
4. Why is the water in swimming pool chlorinated?
A. To purify drinking water.
B. To add oxygen to water.
C. To change colour of water.
D. To prevent spread of waterborne diseases.
5. Which of the following is the correct swimming attire used by boys and girls?
A. cap and sunhat.
B. swimming trunks and skin tight.
C. t/shirt and a short.
D. swimming trunks and swimming custom.
6. What enables the swimmer to see underwater?
A. sun glasses B. Drying towel
C. swimming goggles D. nose clip
1. Which of the following is a method of exchanging the baton in a relay ruce?
A. downsweep B. front pass
C. back pass D. right sicle pass
8. Which of the following athlete was the best 100m sprinter?
A. Usain Bolt B. Yohan Blake C. Warren Weir D. Asafa Powell
9. If boundaries are not marked we can use
A. cones B. whistles C. balls D. bibs
10. What equipment is used to play chess?
A. arrows B. bottle tops C. pieces D. stones
11. A serve is an act of
A. hitting the ball using a bat B. rolling the ball using hand
C. jumping with the ball very high D. an act of hitting the ball to start play
12. The following are all volleyball skills except
A. dodging B. catching C. dribbling D. spiking
13. How many players make up a cricket team fielding or batting?
D. 22
f'E\
\^-.i
14. The hitting of a ball using a bat is calied
A. throwing B. serving C. batting D. bowling
15. and are skills to aim in target games.
A. rolling and dribbling B. dribbling and shooting
C. shooting and running D. throwing and rolling
16. and work together in target games.
A. ball and arrow B. bow and arrow
C. darl and bow D. affow and dart
What lesson is learnt by people r.vhen carnping?
A. fishing B. selflsh
C. teamwork D. rock climbing
18. Why do people go for camping?
A. to be isolated B. for flshing
C. to establish team building D. to rest
19. Which asymmetrical body shape can be created during a head stand?
A. the leg split B. the twisting
C. bending of one leg D. lifting of one leg
20. What is a sequence in gymnastics'i
A. linking movements B. balancing
C. leaping D. rolling
il
21. What is the purpose of mucus lining ihe stomach during digestion?
A. To make the lining stronger B. To make the lining slippery
C. To make digestion easier D. To protect it from gastric juice
22. Ulcers in the stomach are caused bv
A. overeating B. skipping meals
C. corrosion of stomach lining D. solid food
23. How otten shouid one bath?
A. regularly B. once a week
C. twice a week D. never
The major function of the liver in digestion is
A. to release the f-aeces B. to reabsorb the food
C. to lubricate the food D. to produce bile and digestive juices
2-5. Which statement is true about the large intestine?
A. it is divided into three parts
B. the duodenurr is part of large inrestrrre
C. the intestines are smaller in iiiatneter-
D. rectum and anus are pafi of large intestine
26. Which of the following was a fr_rnction of nrusrc during the colonial period?
A. politics B. entertaillntelt {'. drama D. nhimbe
An example of au indigenous art rrecLa is
A. charcoal B. pairrt C. clay oil D. rubber
A story teller in Shona is called
A. sarungano B. muirnbr C. narrator D. mother
@
29. An example of a pre-colonial dance inZimbabwe is
A. Agogo B. Kongonya C. Amantshomane D. Nyau
30. Half of a semibreve is called a
A. minim B. crotchet C. quaver D. beat
31. What is a tint in visual arts?
A. A way of shading a picture
B. The line between any given drawings
C. The quality of a colour that differs from another one
D. An example of a colonial drawing technique
32. What is the use of stage lights in theatre?
A. To make the stage beautiful B. To make actors light in colour
C. To create a desired mood D. To make the audience vissible
33. A is the arrangement of movement pattems in dance.
A. Movement B. Sequence C. Rondo D. ABA
34. The highness or lowness of a sound is called
A. rhythm B. pitch C. melody, D. tune
35. Mixing of primary colours can produce colours.
A. three B. secondary C. tertiary D. paint
36. is an example of a prop in theatre.
A. Walking stick B. Curtains C. Lights D. Music
Jt. What is sequencing in dance?
A. The art of following a lead dancer B. The arrangement of dance pattems
C. The playing of drums in rhythm D. The act of stationary movement
38. Music software is used to musical pieces.
A. shape B. compose C. send D. tone
39. Which tool is used in photography?
A. Camera B. Shape C. Focus D. Brush
40. Atype of lighting that focuses on one actor is calred a
light.
A. side B. f C. spot D. white
41. which of the following is a good ethical practice in dance?
A. Infringing the rights of other dancers
B. uploading other dancers' performances without permission
C. Avoiding copyrights infringement
D' Uploading other cultural dances'renditions without full knowledge of the dance
42. A creates original musical pieces.
A. sound B. judge C. composer D. teacher
43. What does a curator do in art?
A. Paints B. Draws C. Sells D. Collects
44. A plays a character's role in a play or act.
A. director B. actor C. engineer D. script writer
o' dance career fo1us1 on the creation of dance movements
P:l
A. Choreographer B. Teacher
and sequences?
C. Engineer
-.--].:>-^^--".
D. Dancer
A
46. Which musical genre has rhythmic characteristics that are closely related to Kanindo
music?
A. Sungura B. Iazz C. Jiti D. Rhumba
47. MarrmbarnZimbabwe came from Mozambique and
A. Zambia B. Botswana C. Nigeria D. Malawi
48. Mbira music is believed to induce during sacred ceremonies.
A. sacred B. possession C. spirits D. death
49. What material was used to make the carving shown below?
A. Plastic B. Rock C. Wood D. Metal

50. Paintings by the Khoisan in Tsodilo Hilis are found in rvhich SouthernAfrican country?
A. Lesotho B. Mozambiqu.: C. Zimbabwe D. Botswana
1. Which statement is true about small intestines?
A.they are longer B. they are shorter
C.they are broader D. they are wider
2. What is inhalation?
A. breathing in and out
B. breathing in oxygen
C. action of breathing
D. breathing in carbon dioxide
a
J. Why should baseball players wear a box?
A. for shaping B. they are forced
C. to protect the genital area D. show off
4. How can oyeru.se injuries be avoided?
A. by reducing intensify of training.
B. by increasing number of repetitions.
C. by applying heat rub.
D. by taking pain relievers.
5. The ability to keep on top of water without movement is known as
A. drowning B. floating C. swimming D. aquatic
6. The swimmer uses to move from one end to the other end in the pool.
A. swimming strokes B. walking strokes
C. survival skills D. water skills
1 . How many steps do you take in triple jump after the hop?
A. 1 B.3 c.4 D.2
8. Which one of these is a field event that involves running a short distance?
A. shot put B. javelin
C. discus hammer throw
9. The pieces in chess are placed
A. in occupied space B. in a specifled box
C. in marked space D. anyhow
10. Which of the following skills is a way of creating space?
A. shooting B. dribbling C. defending D. pivoting
11. Which one is the key point in net garnes for the serve?
A. keep your eyes on the ball always.
B. use your head to defend the ball.
C. grip the bat flrmly.
D. always listen to a coach always.
12. is one of the equipments used in net games.
A. Bat B. Goal post C. Court D. Net
13. The V shaped grip is formed mainly by using
A. fore finger and thumb B. fore finger and bat
C. bat and ball D. baseball and softball
A
14. _are basic strokes in stnking games.
A.Backward and forward B. Spin and roll
C. Running and Walking D. Fast and slow
15. Which statement clearly deflnes target garnes?
A. games which are played by throwing objects to an intended target for points. :
B. bat and ball games played using arows.

C. games played by skilled mathematics iearners.
D. smart games played in a good area.
16. The oldest target game which was played during the past is _.
A. javelin B. dafis C. archery D. spearthrowing
17. Which of the foilowing is used as a temporary shelter during camping?
A. house B. tent C. apartment D. cabin
18. Campers usually carry
A. few goods B. luxury goods C. households goods D. a lot of goods
19. The other name for sequence is _
A. locomotion B. routine C. weight transfer D. swinging
20. A sequence must have
A. a start, middle and end position B. a start position only
C. at least 2 points D. no position
21. How is an air bome disease transrnitted to another person?
A. sharing clothes B. when people cough or sneeze
C. using same bathroom D. sharing plates
22. Which disease is caused by poor sanitation?
A. diarrhoea B. kwashiorkor C. epilepsy D. goitre
23. Type of food to be taken by one with iron deflciency include
A. eating carrots B. eating dark leaf greens
C. eating fish D. eating Potatoes
24. How do you take care of a cricket helmet?
A. take it to a dry cleaner B. simply soak it
C. simply steam it D. simply clean it with damp cloth
25. Cool down activities include the followirg _.
A. increase in intensity B. more repetitions
C. vigorous running D. reduce intensity
26. An example of a pre-colonial instrument in Zimbabwe is
A. guitar B. conga C. mbira D. hosho
27. is the fype of art that was used in the making of the Zimbabwean bird.
A. Sculpturing B. Painting C. Drawing D. Moulding
28. What was the role of storytelling in the pre-colonial era?
A. Business B. Entertainment C. Eating D. Drama
29.Inwhich historical period was Kongonya dance mainly practiced?
A. pre-colonial B. post-colonial C. colonial D. historical
30. Grouping of notes together by joining their tails is called
A classification B. beaming C. joining D. accidental
31. An example of an art element is
A. proportion B. repetition C. line D. tint
32. The art of performing unscripted scenes is callecl
A. scenery B. improvisation C. motivation D. directing
33. Which is not an example of a skill in group dancing?
A. leading B. imitating C. following D. sequencing
34. is the patterrr of regular or irregular pulses.
A. Rhythm B. Pitch C. Melody D. Tune
35. What is form in art?
A. The material used to make an artwork.
B. The 3d structure of an arfwork.
C. The beaufy of an artwork.
D. The time taken to make an artwork.
36. is the clear audibility of a voice in theatre.
A. Voice projection B. Tone
C. Pitch D. Sound
37. The picture below shows dancers with attire that represents their
A. culture B. intentions C. motivation D. climax

38. is music software used to compose and edit songs.
A. Microsoft B. Corel Draw C. Sibelius D. PowerPoint
39. A modern art technology tool is
A. charcoal B. reeds C. eraser D. clay
40. which effects are used to intensify a gesture in theatre?
A. Sound B. Visual C. Musical D. Lighting
41. Another word for a view in dance is
A. sound B. scenery C. pattern D. scene
42. Where does a sound engineer usually work from?
A. Theatre Park B. School C. Studio D. Harare
43. One who makes sculptures is known as a
A. drawer B. sculptor C. painter D. artist
44. One who writes a play in theatre is a
A. director B. actor C. engineer D. script r.vriter
A
45. A pertbrms dance moves and sequences in a dance performance.
A. Choreographer B. Teacher C. Engineer D. Dancer
46. What is poetry?
A. Is an example of a poem.
B. It is a form of singing about traditions.
C. The art of performing poems.
D. It is an example of a set design.
47. An idea embedded in a theatrical play is known as a
A. theme B. hidden C. tone D. mood
48. The Chewa people are famous for which dance?
A. Shangara B. Nyau C. Chihodha D. Agogo
49. is a dance for wondering spirits without relatives.
A. Chihodha B. Isitshikitsha C. Amabhiza D. Zvipunha
50, is a dance that began during the colonial era.
A. Mbende B. Isitshikitsha C. Amabhiza D. Agogo
m
TEST 3
l.
In breathing, oxygen is taken in
A. through the nose B. through the heart
C. using the tongue D. using the lungs
2. Which air do we breathe out?
A. Carbon dioxide B. Nitrogen C. Carbon D. Oxygen
a
J. Causes of obesify include
A. too much sugary food.
B. enganging in several sporting activities.
C. not eating a balanced diet.
D. lack of exercise.
4. How does one keep the body healthy?
A. By exercising and engaging in physical activities.
B. Watching sporting activities on TV.
C. Fast foods.
D. Over working the body.
5. Fitness and enables the swimmer to swim very fast.
A. swimming strokes B. swimming gear
C. safety ropes D. water levels
6. cause people to drown inside the pool?
A. River B. Skills
C. Panic D. Swimming attire
7. When running track events u,e run in a
A. line B. lane C. circle D.
8. How many athletes make a kids athletics team?
A.2 B. 1 c.4 D.8
9 ' Basing on the positioning of soccer players in the diagram below,
state the role of
player shown by an arrow.
A. passing B. instructing C. goalkeeping D. scoring
A
10. With reference to the diagram in question 9 above, state the roles of the three players
in the goal area, on the penaity arc.
A. attacking B. defending
C. scoring D. ball controlling
11. From the soccer diagram on question no.9. rvhich boundary line separates the two
teams before kick-off?
A. Touch line B. Half way line C. Goal line D. Penaity arc
are nsed when exiting the pool.
A. Side steps B. Life jackets
C. Goggles D. Swimming trunks
make up a wicket used in cricket.
A. Sturnps and ball B. Bails and gloves
C. Knee pads and chest pads D. Stumps and bails
14. The fielders who catch the ball rn softball and cricket are called respectively.
'A. pitcher and bow.ler B. batter and batsman
Cl. catcher and rvicket keeper D. wicket keeper and umpire
15. Whicir .>iatement clearly define target')
A. a position hehind the aiming point B. a position beside the aiming point
C. a point after the aiming point D. a point airned for
16. Which of the tbllowing is not an object used in target games'i
.A. dart B. skittle C. racket D. ball
17. What rs the name of the camping equipment shown on the picture'?
A. pot B. binocular C. torch D. water bottle

18. During the night campers use to sleep.
A. sleeping bags B. double bed C. the mountain site D. the ground
Soio balancing is done by
A.2 people B. 3 people C. 1 p) irson D.
4 people
20. Linking balances can be exhibited by how'lnany people to show body shapes'l
A. an individual B. oneperson C. in pairs D.
solo
.affi?ffibt
21. In a dive which part of the body hit tt nrstu
A. head B. legs C. hands D.
stomach
Which swimming strokes imitate the windmill movement of hands?
A. butterfly and front crawl
B. backstroke and breaststroke
C. br-rtter11y and breaststroke
D. front crawi and backstroke
23. Which swimming techniques resemble the swimming of a dolphin?
A. butterfly B. front crarn'l C. backstroke D. breaststroke
24. Aswimming relay team is made up of swlmmers.
A. 1 B.2 c.3 D.4
25. Which one is not leg action in swimming?
A. dolphin action B. water kick
C. flutter kick D. whip kick
26. is an example of a pre-colonial song of the Shona people in Zimbabwe.
A. Nhemamusasa B. Ivai nesu
C. National Anthem D. Seiko
21. An example of a heritage site in Zimbabrve is
A. pottery B. Khami Ruins C. Chimoio D. Heroes Acre
28. Story-telling develops singing skills.
A. True B. False C. Maybe D. Both
29. Which dance style was originaliy perfonned at traditional weddings?
A. Isitshikitsha B. Amabhiza C. Amantshomane D. Iwossana
30. Time signature with the type of beat that is a dotted note is known as
A. simple B. duple C. meter D. compound
3 1. Which of the following is a principle of design in art?
A. Proportion B. Repetition C. Line D.Tint
32. is the environment created on stage for a play.
A. Scene B. View C. Set design D. Lighting
33. The stance at which a dance is performed is called a
A. movement B. posture C. rondo D. acting
34. is a musical sequence of musical notes that are organised in a song.
A. Rhythm B. Pitch C. Melody D. Tune
35. An example of an art element is
A. shape B. proportion C. form D. content
36. The people watching a theatrical production are called
A. directors B. adjudicators C. production D. audience
37. Agroup of dancers form a
A. duet B. band C. ensemble D. pattern
38. Notes used in composition are found on the when using Sibelius.
A. keypad B. playback C. plug-in D. notepad
39. is a software program that is used to make sketches and logos.
A. Corel Draw B. In Design C. Sibelius D. PhotoPaint
40. Musical effects in theatre are used to set the
A. mood B. play C. set design D. lighting
41. An example of technology used in dance performances is
A. props B. speakers C. culture D. sticks
42. The process of assessing musical performances is called
A. choreography B. adjudication C. fault finding D. performance
43. An illustrator makes for books and magazines.
A. sketches B. images C. money D. lighting
f,El
\^]./
44. The trgure shorvn below is a
A. puppet B. culture C. curator D. painter

45. A makes musical acconrpaniment instruments to be used in dances.
A. Choreographer B. Tcacher
maker
C. Instrument D. Dancer
46. The olle responsible fbr applying cosllrciirib ro actors so as to appear as shown
below
is called a
A. paintcr B. puppeteer C. rnake-up artist D. drawer

is an example of a drarnatic element.
A. Tension B. Ciimax C. Motivation D. Suspense
48. An example of a dance theme is
A. work B. sequence Cl. rondo D. dance
49. A dance sequence that perfonns a sequence in reverse is called
A. retrograde B. sequence C. rondo D. ABA
50. An example of attire wom by dani:ers in a dance performance is
A. beads B. drums C. whistle D. clappers
A
r
I TEST 4
l. The process of taking in air is called
A. Exhalation B. Air flow C. Inhalation D. Circulation
2. The other name for alveoli is
A. lungs B. gullet C. trachea D. air sac
3. is a disease which is caused when the blood sugar is high.
A. Cancer B. Obesity C. Cholera D. Diabetes
4. For all short distances one is encouraged to
A. use car B. use bus
C. walk D. stop travelling
5. The person who rescues people from drowning is called
A. safety person B.
lifeguard
C. swimming coach D. swimming instructor
6. is used to dry our body after swimming.
A. swimming cap B. swimming trunk c. drying towel D. nose cap
I - The jumping events where one jumps for height are classified as
A. horizontal B. bars C. vertical D. hurdles
8. Which pair of events is made up of horizontaljumps?
A. long jump and pole vault. B. triple jump and high jump
C. long jump and triple jump D. high jump and pole vault
9. An object can be served using a hand in
A. badminton B. tennis C. table tennis D. volleyball
10. Attacking header in soccer means
A. defending B. dodging
C. directing the ball dowrrwards to score D. blocking
11. which one is the correct statement that deflnes net games?
A. games which uses goal posts.
B. bat and ball games.
C. games which are played by one team.
D. games which are played by two teams divided by a net
12. Avolleyball team has players playing at each time.
A.2 8.4 c.6 D.8
i3. one of the key points to note when gripping the bat in striking games is
A. Firmly handle the bat by the knob.
B. firmly handle the middle part of the bat.
C. widely spread hands around the bat.
D. hold the toe of the bat correctly.
14. When do teams change roles in striking games?
A. when the batting team has scored many runs.
B. when the flelding team is tired.
C. when the fielding team puts the batting team out.
D. when the batting team is tired.
A
15. A mobile object in target games is one
A. stationary B. sleeping C. moving D. phoning
16. In target games the thrower becomeS stable if
A. focusing on the target B. the target point is bigger
C. the base of support is wide D. eyes are opened
17. Litter is placed inside the during expendition.
A. trash bag B. sleeping bag C. camping site D. backpackers
18. Destination is
A. act of planning a route B. a place to which someone is going
C. instrument used to find a place D. activities that require muscle strength
19. Simple locomotion involve
A. walking B. rolling C. somersaulting D. hopping
20. The use of apparatus in gymnastics can promote
A. range of movements through exploration.
B. speed in movements.
C. forward and backward movement.
D. balances.
21. The area where baton exchange is done in relay is called
A. acceleration zone B. baton zone
C. change over zone D. running zone
22. How long is the change over zone?
A. 30m B. 20m C. 10m D. 100m
23. When participating in track events one can take off from
A. a kneeling or standing position.
B. a crouch or standing position.
C. a flight stafi or sitting posrtion.
D. a standing or flight start position.
24. Which one is not a beneflt of participating in athletics at school'J
A. to keep our body fit B. to score goals
C. tornin medals D. to travel with the team
The following are flight techniques in horizontal jumps except
A. sail B. hang C. hitch kick D. scissors
26. At which of the following events did music serve as a social function?
A. Ilima B. Sleeping C. Eating D. Cooking
27. Where in Zimbabwe were renowned basketry skills mostly displayed?
A. Chipinge B. Binga C. Nambya D. Gweru
28. Theatre has the ability to reflect
A. tun B. customs C. actors D. movies
29. Muchongoyo is a traditional dance of .rhich ethnic group?
A. Ndau B. Korekore C. Nambya D. Zezuru
30. The shortest distance between any given notes is a
A. minim B. tone C. quaver D. semitone
Efid\
[^.i
31. What art is shown in the pic below?
A. 3-D B. 2-D C. l-D D. 4-D

32. Thetechniques of leavingthe audience expectingmore in aplay is called
A. tension B. suspense C. motivation D. edging
JJ. is an example of a dance principle.
A. Energy B. Sequence C. Set D. Content
34. What is tempo in music?.
A. Speed B. Volume C. Dynamics D. Performance
35. To is to give an assessment of an artwork.
A. critique B. paint C. tone D. shade
36. One who writes a play is called a
A. script writer B. composer C. director D. manager
31. is an example of a dance form.
A. Pattern B. Leader C. Canon D. Content
38. Which of the following is encouraged when uploading music on the internet?
A. copyright infringement B. piracy
C. ethical considerations D. ZIMURA
39. is an example of Adobe Suite application used in art
A. Corel Draw B. In Design C. Sibelius D. Microsoft
40. Cartoons are a form of
A. musicals B. animation C. series D. episode
4t. can be used to set the mood in dance.
A. Music B. Adjudication C. Females D. Drums
42. Instruments that can produce a definite pitch are referred to as
A. chordophones B. aerophones C. foreign D. tuned
43. Achisel is an example of a tool in art.
A. exotic B. foreign C. indigenous D. form
44. Which career has the role of guiding and leading the flow of scenes in a play?
A. Director B. Actor C. Engineer D. Script writer
A
45. The picture below shows an exampie of a musicai instrument used in
dance.
A. contemporary B. indigenous c. lamellaphone D. dancer,s

46' ln music adjudication, what is known as the personal musical skills displayed by a
choir or conductor?
A. conducting B. Arrangement c. projection D. Musicianship
use the extract below to answer questions 47 and 4g
Folk Song - Mwanangu

Alistair Thriro. Dzarnara
;=l2O
ttl:'.'Ll-11J - llgtt i L
t\ltt'a-ltrt - ttgtt, rtttrLl_tttt - ntau ii,t tttcl-tla - ilgit te-ra - ra. I-rcc
47. The fype of harmony shown in the song is
A. 2 part 3 partB. C. poly D. unison
48. The rhyhmic structure of the song rs
A. monophony B. polyrhl'thmic C. hormophony D. harmony
49. is the visual impressions that depend on the reflection of light.
A. Shape B. Line C. Colour D. Design
50. what is called the relation in sizes of parts in an artwork?
A. Alignment B. proportion C. Tertiary D. Shade
fror:\
[^-.,/
l. What is the name of the organ which transport air?
A. Liver B. Trachea C. Arteries D. Intestines
2- On the diagram below, two tubes which branch from the trachea to the lungs
are
A.bronchi B. bronchioles C. alveolus D. capillaries

3. When you lack water in your body it is called
A. hydration B. sweating C. dehydration D. perspiration
4. Which statement is true about physical activities?
A. Reading B. Meditation
c. Involve in indoor and outdoor games D. Fighting others
5. The Zimbabwe water Authority (ZINV/A) is responsible for
A. providing water for use B. collecting waste products
C. cleaning the streets D. supplyingelectricity
6. Water polo is
A. a ball game played in the court B. a ball game played in the water
C. a swimming skill D. a sport played inZimbabwe only
7. The picture is showing the throwing of a event.
'ilu; s r4:tr
A. relay B. shot C. discus D. hurdles
A
8. What is the name of equipment used by sprint runners at the start of the race'/
A. start gun B. starting block C. fly start D. crouch start
9. Drills in shooting improves
A. accuracy and speed B. time and speed
C. endurance D. strength
10. Speed in invasion games can be enhanced by
A. push ups B. vertical jumps C. step ups D. shuttle run
11. is a scoring term used in tennis
A. dribbling B. striking C. goal D. love
12. A spike is used when
A. attacking B. defending C. serving D. volleying
13 Listed below are rnajor requirements considered when batting including
A. leg shoulderuvidth apart.

B. eyes focused to the direction at which the object is coming tiom..
C. players in the game.
D. nnmber of runs obtained.
t4. A cornplete cycle of batting and fielding is called
A. attacking and defending B. toss up
C. change over zone D. an inning
15. What is aimins?
A. looking at tiie target B. tbcLising to intended target
C. to reducing stress D. throrvirrg an object
16. A bull's eye is a target in
A. ,eolf B. karate C. COW D. darts
17. During rock cliinbing balance it rs unportant to
A. to push the body up B. keep the body rnoving up
C'. to r,vatch the boi1t, position D. to keep the safe distance
18. Which body exercise is used by climbe rs to liti the bod1, upwards?
A. pull ups B. push ups C. press ups D. leg straddle
19. Nan-re the locornotion below
A.spinning B. round off C. forward roll D. cartwheel

24. Refer to picture on l9 above, the general speed movement is
A. very slow B. slow C. rnediurn D. fast
m
21. One.way of maintaining ball possession in basketball while walking or running is
A. dribbling B. passing C. shooting D. defending
22. Why should skilled basketball dribblers bounce the ball low to the ground?
A. to prevent the defender from getting possession of the ball
B. to prevent the ball from rolling
C. to reduce the hard impact
D. to allow players to pass the ball to each other
23. Dodging is a skill which involves
A. change of direction to escape an opponent
B. to maintain good balance
C. being stable
D. slow movements
24. What is the advantage of change in speed of the dribble in basketball?
A. helps in shooting.
B. creates options to pass.
C. creates speed of player.
D. helps the dribbling skills.
25. One of the pathways in invasion games include
A. high shot B. medium C. zig-zag D. low level
26. What is the name of the instrument below?
A. Flute B. Ngororombe C. Mbira D. Bhosvo

27. is a way of preserving artwork.
A. Gallery B. Exhibition C. Buying D. Marketing
28. was a prominent actor inZimbabwe?
A. Ben Stiller B. The Rock C. Mukadota D. Tazvida
29. Which dance is mainly dominated by males?
A. Mbende B. Chihodha C. Chinyambera D. Isitshikitsha
30. The root triad in the key of C major is
A. DFA B. GBD C. CEG D. ACE
31. Which of the following is not a primary coluor?
A. Red B. Blue C. Brown D. Yellow
32. Body movements used to emphasise a point in theatre are called
A. energy B. tension C. dancing D. gestures
33. A dance form with 2 patterns is called
A. AB B. retrograde C. rondo D. ABA
A
34. What are dynamics in music?
A. These are markin-q of speeci B. These ar'e expressicls of ie;hnique
C. These ar"e voiumc levels in niirsic D. These are meiodious l:aikin::.'
3:. \\/hat cmotrons cannot bc drarvn rlcni the pic bclow','
;r
:i li ,1o_r"
ivlotir,'ation
:,ii-:ijir.rr
I r''t",, enteryrlse
.Jluaii'ilil li' il
i i i!, iil!:iiii
jr
"rl rr it,.l li-ji.li.i, i,;. i,,.1

"
l'.r, i j l)
!-t ll\i L !iL' i'i-tlliri; .' .,':,
i.- Stil.1:,, r,ilir:.: l:;, )ii i-l _! I I,l.qt,-'
&
43. what is done to artworks at the display shown in the picture below?
A. Stolen B. Copied C. Sold D. Torn apart

44. The people watching aplay are called the
A. adjudicators B. audience C. technicians D. script rvriters
45. What is the role of an educationist in dance?
. A. To enable copying of dances.
B. To stop people from stealing dance.
C. To makes sure that dances are studied and known.
D. To ensure that choreographers are paid.
46. The use of puppets in theatre is known as
A. puppets B. string C. puppetry D. puppeteer
47. Msual effects in theatre are used to emphasise
A. historical periods B. cosfumes
C. actors D. theme
48. is an example of an axial movement.
A. Sliding B. Crawling C. Bending D. Walking
49. The physical area upon which dancers perform is called
A. stage B. spot C. scene D. view
50. Form is the overall organisation of a dance.
A. economical B. cultural C. political D. structural
A
1. Which organ pumps blood in the body?
A. Kidney B. Lungs C. Heart D. Liver
2. Blood is kansported by
A. heart B. brain
C. lungs D. blood vessels
Good nutrition for the body refers to
A. vitamins B. proteins
C. balanced diet D. carbohydrates
You keep healthy and fit at home by
A. help in the garden B. eat and sleep
C. always watch TV D. wait for regular meais
5. Someone who cannot swim should always put on a when swimming.
A. swimming trunk B. swimming costume
C. lifejacket D. swimming cap
6. All activities done in water are called
A. aquatlcs
aquatics B. swlmmlng
swimming C. olvlng
L. divin D. Water polo
1. Which one of the following is a long distance race?
A. 12 laps B" 200m
C. 100m D. 4x100m relay
Which one is not a track event?
A. Sprint hurdle relay B. Medley relay
C. Pole vault D. l10m hurdles
Basic defensive roles include
A. opening space B. closing space
C. supporting defence D. individual defence
10. How are team-mates positioned in relation to their opponents at the start of the match?
A. In their own half B. In their opponent's half
C. In their same area D. On the whole field of playing
Net games are played by
A. primary school learners only B. boys only
C. everyone who is flt to play. D. girls only
In tennis and table tennis the ball is not allowed to bounce more than
A. once B. twice C. thrice D. four times
Which one is not a fielding position in softball,/baseballl'
A. catcher B. pitcher
C. shot stop D. Wicket keeper
14. Cool down is done
A. during an activity B. before an activity
C. two days before activities D. soon after an activify
15. The following are combat games except
A. karate B. boxing C. wrestling D. archery
rtd,l
\^f.i
16. Gloves, mouth guards, and gum guards are used as
A. protective wear B. fashion wear
C. playing gear D. outfit
17. Which equipment is not used for rock climbing?
A. helmet rope B. C. buoyancy aid D. harness
18. During adventure in the mountains we move in a. 6
A. scattered way single filb B.
C. row file D. circle formation
19. The small body parts which can be used to bear weight are
A. shoulders B. tummy C. D. knees
20. The most common landing is on. .hips
A. one feet B. two feet C. hands D. hand
21. The path followed by an object in air after hitting it is called
A. speed B.
trajectory C. rally D. spin
22. Sewing is done in which game?
A. netball B. pada C. soccer D. tennis
23. The object that is hit in badminton is called
A. a ball B. a bat C. shuttle cock D. racquet
24. If a player wants the object to travel fast and fuither he/she should put a lot of
A. power B. speed C. vision D. space

25. The barrier in net games is
A. court B. bat C. net D. ball
26. Which musical genre is associated with the VaKorekore people of Zimbabwe?
A. Kanindo B. Sungura Jiti c.
D. Mbende
27. Ndombonda is a smoking pipe that was made by the people in Zimbabwe.
A. Korekore B. Ndebele C. Nambyans D. Chewa
28. is an example of a past theatrical style in Zimbabwe.
A. Pungwe B. Cinema C. Nhimbe D. Musical
29. At which ceremony is Mhande dance performed?
A. Rain making B. Appeasement C. Burial D. Ritual
Use the extract below to answer questions 30 to 32
uNgcwele Nkosi
VeDzioza lVlusic Roots
I-argo j = +O
m?
33
SOPRANO
I a,a,a l* :r :d:t; I l1 .,t1:d .,.1; :s .r l- .r :s lr i. - lr :- ls :
1.,,,,,o I a :tt:lr:tr I d -,tr:sl .d:d.m l- .r :d I . :d lt; :- la ,- 1a ,

TENOR
_, =..-.
sgmrsl m;.,sgrr1 .,srisr .11:mr.dr i-.fi:mr I r, rS,
A
30. The song begins with a beat.
A. minim B. crusis C. anacrusis D. largo
The curved line that is joining notes in bar 2 is called a
A. tie B. slur C. beam D. beat
32. The tempo marking in the song is
A. Largo B. mp C.p D.f
33. What is the time signature of the song?
A. 2-2 B. 3-4 c. 4-4 D. 6-8
34. ln which key is the song written?
A. G major B. C major C. D major D. A major
35. Artwork that has no depth is referred to as
A. 3-D B. 2-D C. 1-D D. 4-D
36. The figures in the picture below are called
A. scenery B. puppets C. form D. content

3J. Creatrng and arranging dance moves is called
A. choreographing B. sequencing C:. retrograding D. movement
38. The first line on the treble stave is called
A. F B. Middle C C.E D. G
39.
'Ihe illusiou of'rliree dimensions ihal can -i..: ltoted in artworks is called
A. structure B. content C. fake D. form
40. The most interesring part of a play is callec tlie
A. suspense B. tension C. motivation D. climax
The most suitable venue fbr a dance is
A. theatre ts. sfr-rdio C. traditional D. hall
42. ailow'one to add lyrics to a musical composition.
A. Plug-ins B. Notepad C. Flayback D. Midi
A1
+J. is an application that focuses on a layout and page design.
A. Corel Drau, B. in Design C. Sibelius D. Photo Paint
44. The picture below illustrates which ellect tn theatre?
A. sound B. visual rrusical D. lighting

45. music is best suited for improvisation during a dance.
A. Recorded B. Cultural C. Live D" Colonial
46. which organisation protects the copyrights of musicians inzimbabwe?
A. NSSA B. NACZ C. ZIMURA D. PDF
47. An example of an indigenous art material is
A. Clay oil B. Pencil C. Blood D. Pen
48. The following picture shows an example of plastic used in theatre.
A.
costume
L
I
B. eating C. props D. metal

49. The instrument in the picture below falls under which group of musical instruments
used in dance?
A.
exotic B. indigenous C. foreign D. man-made
50. Adding the composer's name on a composition is a form of showing
A. piracy B. copyrights C. artistry D. culture
A
I . An example of a blood vessel is
A. valve B.heart C. vein D. liver
Which vessel carries blood away from the heart?
A. ArtervJ B.Vein C. Capillaries D. l'enLrles
3. Which factor does not cause heart diseases?
A. Age B. Balanced diet
C. Smoking D. Poor hygiene
4. Meals should be taken
A. huniedly B. whilst standing
C. relaxed D. whilst walkin_e
5. Which one is not a reason fbr swirnining'l
.{. lor rehabilitrtion B. for relaxation
C. to win cornpetitions D. to drown
L). it is not a1lo*'ci1 ir,. su'im u,hile
A. wearing a srvirnming cap B. wearing goggles
C. one have skrn diseases D. the life saver is present
1. The pictr-rre is shor,r,ing
A. the correct leg and anrr actior, in athlctics

B. the preparation stage of 100rn race
C. the preparation stage in discus
D. the false start in short distance race
8. Triple jumpers land inside the. . ...
A. gravel pit B. soil pit C. srvirnrning pool D. sand pit
o What are the principles of attack':
A. balance B. pressure C. penetration D. control
Which statement is true about the strensth 3.5.2 in soccer?
A. risk of losing possession.
B. team congests the midfleld.
C. minimises attacking output.
D. difficult to pin opponent into their haif-.
1 l. The highest number of points in tennis is
A.6 B. t2 c.24 D. 30
12.In striking games knees are flexed to
A.
keep the body in ready position.
B.
enable the batsman to have a good vision.
C. swing the bat in good direction.
D. to make contact with the ball directly.
13. which of the following is a safety measure when playing baseball?
A. playing in wet fields B.
not doing a wann up
C. Using poor equipment D. Following instruction properly
14. Select possible dangers likely caused by not doing warnl up when playing softball.
A. good perforrnance B.
nice preparation of the event
C. cause some injuries D. reduces the rate of injuries
15. In combat games, athletes each other during the game.
A. fight B. .play C. bit D. teach
16. The following are combat games.
A. karate, tennis, table tennis, volleyball, badminton and cricket
B. karate, judo, wrestling, kickboxing, boxing and fencing
C. netball, boxing, badminton, handball, darts and judo
D. judo, boxing, karate, wresting, kickboxing and football
17. which of the following is used to tie knots before climbing a rock?
A. harness B.
rope
C. helmet D. climbing gear
18. The legs push up the body and the hands in rock climbing.
A. maintain posture B.
maintain balance
C. keep the body up D. reduce body weight
19. Which one of the foilowing is true about dynamic balances?
A. cartwheel B.tuck C. straddle D. pike
20. General categories of movement include
A. stretching B.weight transfer C. weight lifting D. weighting
21. The picture is showing the ball used to play.
A.
cricket B. basketball C. softball D. hockey
22. What is the role of pitcher during a softball game?
A. to score points B. to attack the goal area
C. to throw balls to the batter D. to hit the wickets
rfiI
i'^-./
23. is when a ball hit by abatterhatsman is caught by a fielding piayer
before it touches the ground.
A. tagging B. caught out C. run out D. three strikes
1A
is allowed to throw the ball to the batter/batsman to start the game.
A. catcher/wicket keeper B. recorder/scorer
C. umpire/referee D. pitcher/bowler
25. Which team is considered to be a winner in striking games?
A. The one that has fast runners.
B. The one that is good at fielding.
C. The one that dismisses more batters/batsman.
D. The one with more runs.
1A ',Vhich historical period
saw both women and men participating in music equally?
A. Pre-colonial B. Post-colonial C. Historical D. Colonial
27. Whicir ethnic group did rock art in the Matopos?
A. Ndebele B. 'San C. Mutapa D. Rozvi
28. The picture beiow'shows an example of'a
-f;r
A.
Set desisn B, SoLrnd ellects C. Musical effects D. Movie
29. An extrmple of a dance tlnction is
A. 1o pass thc tinre
B. to keep the bod.v in good heaith
C. to abide to the laws of tradition arid valnes
D. to rernove boredom
30. Drawing frorn the rnind is called drawing.
A. creative B. irnaginari, C. observational D. iife
3 i. What is blocking in theatre?
A. The aspect of preventing a mistake on stage
B. The act of rernoving an actor's role iiom a scene
C. The planning and lr'orking otrt of actors' movements on stage
D. The preventing of rnovement from happening
32. An example of a movement sequence is
A. movement B. sequence C. rondo D. duet
33. The other name fbr ttre treble clef aiso known as the clef.
A.F B. C C. E D.G
34. The lightness or darkness of a colonr is called its
A. shade B. tone C. paint D. alignment
ril\
til.i
35. _ is the detailed information revealing the facts of a plot.
A. Emotions B. Background C. Exposition D. Climax
36. Which type of music enables dancers to improvise in the event of a mistake during a
dance performance?
A. Recorded B. Cultural C. Live D. Cotemporary
37. Apaper with a musical piece is called a
A. score B. composition C. song D. finale
38. Photo Paint is software that deals with application of _ to an artwork.
A. paint B. sketches C. layouts D. illustrators
39. One who works with adding sound and musical effects in theatre is called
A. teacher B. director C. engineer D. adjudicator
40. In which class of effects in dance does costumes and attire fall under?
41. Which one of the following is not a career in music?
A. Dancer B. composer c. Disc Jockey D. Illustrator
42. One who works with applying paint in artworks is a
A. teacher B. make-up artsist c. painter -----. D. technician
43. Performing theatre for a paying audience is called work.
A. director B. actor C. commissioned D. free
44. Which musical instrument can also fall under costumes and attire in dance?
A. amahlwayi B. drums C. hosho D. mbira
45. Changing the notation of music using software is called
A. notation B. composition c. transcription D. modulator
46. allows a composer to play, rewind, fast forward or stop a composition
using software.
A. Playback B. Notepad C. Note input D. plug-in
41. The process of renewing or restoring an old artwork is called
A. photocopying B. repainting C. regeneration D. copying
48. An example of a storage device in art is
A. Corel Draw B. iPad C. Sibelius D. Oil
49. Msual effects can be used to show _ in theatre.
A. sound B. scenes C. culture D. lighting
50. Acceptable behaviour in theatre is known as
A. piracy B. copyrights c. ethics D. adjudication
--.
A
1. What type of blood enters the lungs'/
A. Oxygenated blood B. Blood with nutrients
C" Deoxygenated blood D. Blood carrying food
2. Which statement is true about the blood?
A. It transport oxygen to the hearl only B. It carries oxygen to the nose
1
C. It transport nutrients to body parts D. It transport heat to the hands
J. Surplus energy is stored in the body as
A. kilogrammes B. energy
C. fat D. carbohydrates
4. What is the function of mineral salts in the body?
A. Flushing out ioxins B. Regulating body's chemical reaction
C. Storage of some vitamins D. Repair worn out tissues
5. What are survival skills in water?
A. skills that help soilreone to grasp the skill of su,imming
B. skills that may prevent someone from drowning
C. skills that help a swirnrner to enter the pool easily
D. skills that enables a swimmer to win a race
6. When treading in water )'ou move anns and legs to
A. dive properiy B. stay afloat
C. increase speed D. rvin a race
7. A bronze medal is awarded to the runner rvhen
A. the mnner finish on the third position during the racc.
B. the runnel finish in the seconcl ltosition.
C. the runner finish on the first position.
D. the runner nnish on the tourth position during tire race
8. Which statement is true?
A. l00m and 200m race are long distance events
B. Hurdles and high jump are track events
C. Athletics involve running only
D. Discus and harnmer throw are throwing events
9. Formation is the same as
A. technique B. tactic C. skill D. disguise
10. The advantages of 4-4-2 tbrmation in soccer is
A. is a defensive formation B. is an attacking formation
C. is a ball position tbrmation D. is a cheating formation
11. Doubles involve how many piayers in net games?
4.4 8.3 c.2 D. 1
12. Love all is comrnonly used when

A. there is a draw B. juice C. wln D. lose
A
13. Which of the following statements is a false answer?
A. striking games includes the use of bats and balls.
B. striking games includes the use of racquets and balls.
C. striking games includes the use of shin pads and helmets.
D. striking games includes the use of gloves and masks.
14. The path of the bowled ball determines
A. bat B. handle C. Distance D. shot
15. A ring is used when playing
A. hwishu B. soccer C. boxing D. hockey
16. The forward and horse stances are used in
A. tennis B. cricket C. boxing D. martial arts
17. The picture below is showing a
A.
adventure hotel B.
camping site
C. camping furniture D. cooking equipment
18. Which of the following is not a type of rock climbing?
A. aid climbing B. bouldering c.solo climbing D. kayaking
19. Wrich statement is true about space aspect?
A. effort weight B. C. time D. direction
20. why does a pyramid have a wider base as shown in picture below?
A. for beauty B. for support C. for competition D. for exercise

21. Stability in combat games is gained if
A. the base of support is wider
B. the opponent is close
C. one is putting on proper protective gear
D. one is standing at attention
22- What happens in combat games if one is standing with legs wide open and slightly
bent knees with back straight?
A. the person will win the game. B. the person will improve speed
c. the.person will be balanced D. the person will be flexible
A
23. is the way in which someone stands in combat.
A. Grip B. Stance
C. Release D. Follow through
24.In martial arts which part of the foot is used as the striking foot?
A. heel B. toes
C. ball of the foot D. l"g
25.In target and combat games if a player is right handed
A. left leg should be in front B. right leg should be in front.
C. close to each other D. parailel to each other
26. is a version of Rhumba music.
A. Soukus B. Museve C. Jiti D. Classical
27 . Where in Southern Africa is beadwork mostly practised?
A. Lesotho B. Mozambique C. Zrmbabwe D. Egypt
28. Actors wear when performingaplay.
A. fun B. costumes C. traditions D. scenes
29. In which dance is the following musical accompaniment used?
A.mbende B. isitshikitsha C. amabhiza D. agogo

30. Harmony is __.
A. sounding of two or more tone at the same time
B. an example of a melody
C. the rhythmic tendencies of music
D. how music changes volume
3i. ln dance, the positroning of the body in space that can be curved. straight. angular,
twisted or symmetrical is called
A. posture B. shape C. line D. form
32. is a part or section of a play.
A. Scene B. Set design C. Blocking D. Form
33. What colour is produced when you mix red and yeliow?
A. Red B. Orange C. Brown D. Yellow
34. Content refers to the in an artwork.
A. list B. tone C. message D. form
35. The picture below illustrates an example of which type of theatrical effects?
A. sound B. musical visual D. lighting
A
36. The concept of performing a dance without changing its uniqueness is called
A. originality B. contemporary C. motivation D. ethnicity

37. Which of the following is not an example of an output format when one finishes a
composition using software?
A. Midi B. Wav C. Pdf D.
Doc
38. Illustrator program works with images.
A. vector B. paint C. old D. new
39. Musical effects can enhance in a play.
A. posture B. audience C. emotions D.
form
40. The people performing the dance below form a
A.
duet B. band C. ensemble D. solo
41. Which musical career creates the following?
d.
i
, '-r,
fi
A.
Teacher B. Instrument maker
C. Composer D. Lighting
42. Where are artworks usually marketed in Zimbabwe?
A. Gweru B. Art Gallery C. Supermarket D. Shops
43. Which prominent theatre arts centre is found in BulaweLyo?
A. Jasen Mphepo B. Reps C. Jenaguru D. Amakhosi
44. is a prominent Bulawayo based dance group.
A. Pasichigare B. Amakhosi C. Iyasa D. YeDzinza
45. means dance movements that take place at the same time.
A. Duet B. Unison C. Patterrr D. Ensemble
46. The instruments in the picture below can be substituted by effects.
A. sound B. visual C. musical -- D. lighting
47. Dance technology is mainly used in dances.
A. colonial B. contemporary C. aesthel.ic D. Zimbabwean
48. which zimbabwean musician is owner of Military Touch Movement?
A. Mufukudzi B. Winkv D C. JahPrayzah D. Killer T
49. A is when two artists sing a song together.
A. Solo B. Remix C. Collaboration D. DJ
50. Giving out free t-shirts and caps is a way of music.
A. promoting B. selling C. showing off D. competing
A
1. Name the body parls used for balancing on the picture.
A. knces B. toes C. heels D. feet

2. Which body parl passes out undigestecl fbod particles'/
A. Rectun-r B. Anus C. Large intestines B. Stomach
l. Thc stat. of shorn iug tr,h1 sical, rrerttal and crnctional-,i.cll-b:ir-q r,r ;n11cd
A. habit B. fitness C. insr-rlin D. health
1. Hypertension is carlsed b1,'
A. ovenveight B. eating meat
C. not washine hands D. ee,ting rnilk prodr-rcts
5. Whie h crne is not a snn,ival device to be r.rsed rvhe r: iir,.nvning'?
r\. ttippers B. i,r,,.,'
::hepherci ct'ocl< C. rir:: D. life jacket
(',. Thc saf'est rva.v of a su,inrnring beerirnel to entel the po,r. , ,-,rilrll
A. steps B. floaters C. raiis D. diving board

I . J Li;-r,ii,i, iitrcl tlti,-,rr . at,:
A. track ar-rd field el,ents.
B. irack cverrt:r.
C. field events.
D. long and short distance events.
8. In the athiete thror,r's an oi;.ject as far as possible.
A. t-riple jurnp B. jai'elin C. 100m race D. hurdles
9. Hor,v does a pla-ver create space rvithin l:or,indaries J
A. by nioving into occnpied spacc.
B. by rnovirrg treelv into open spiice.
C. by moving into nrarked area.
D. by rernaininS statitrnary.
10. Cne of the attacking objectives in invasron gamcs include
A. to delay score B. to score
C. to possess the ball D. to defbnd
1 i. Which of the following net games Lrse a racket'/
A. badminton and squash B. badminton and netball

C. tennis and badminton D. table tennis and volleyball
fr;'I
[^r.J
_.
12. The net games are started by
A. blocking B. serving
C. receiving D. spiking
l3.InstrikinggameStheattackingteamorplayeristheone-.
A. bowling B. pitching C. batting D. fielding
14. Points scored in cricket are called
A. innings B. runs C. marks D. goals
15.ThebesttermwhichdescribesSomeonewhocoachescombatgameSi'-.
A. coach B. instructor C. teacher D. facilitator
16. Why is the stance of importance in combat games?
A. it provides much stable balance and support.
B. it provides much focus to the opponent.
C. it allow much more good view for the opponent.
D. it reduces risks.
17. Which one of the following is used to climb the rock during camping?
A. ladder B. belays C. harness D. karabiners
18. Which animal do people ride?
A. lion B. giraffe C. elephant D. hare
19. The correct and safer way to support a partner in a head stand is to
A. stand infront of a performing partner.
B. stand behind the permorming partner.
C. stand far away and watch.
D. stand at any side of the performing partner.
20. Why is the apex narrower than the base of the pyramid?
A. the bulk of the weight is closer to the ground.
B. to form a triangle in pyramids.
C. to make a beautiful shape.
D. to include every gymnast in the pyramid.
21. The activity whereby people climb down the rock is called
A. abseiling B. canoeing C. walking D. riding
22. Whichmaterials are used for constructing a tent during camping?
A. tent, pegs, rope and strings B. tent, backpack, rope and strings
C. floating jacket, rope, pegs and tent D. helmet, harness, carabina and tent
23. Which materials are used in raft building?
A. ropes, poles and compass B. poles, ropes and a drum
C. map, compass and ropes D. poles drum and compass
24. When doing a climbing activity using ropes and with the help of others, the person
helping is called a _.
A. helper B. belayer C. climber D. instructor
25. When a climber is ready to climb he/she calls "on belay" the person helping would
call _.
A. climb B. "on belay"
C. what is your name D. what do you mean
26. Diversity in music of the world is mainly due to
A. culture B. singers C. politics D. economy
A
21. is a prominent sculptor is Zimbabwe.
A. Mutukudzi B. Benhura c. coventry D. Maraire
28. What is an artificial flgure used to represent a human being or an animal in theatre
called?
A. Prop B. Attire C. puppet D. Ser
29. Which dance does not make use of instruments and only depends on the clapiring of
hands?
A. Mbende B.Chihodha C. Chinyambera D. Isitshikitsha
30. Which of the following is an indigenous aft tool?
A. Pen B. iPad C. Clay oil D. Cinder
3 I. A character's reason to do or say things in a play is called
A. tension B. suspense C. motivation D. edging
) /.. dance rnovernents are thosc that happen ar a stationary position.
A. Locourotive B" Sequence C. Rondo D. Axial
J-1 What is known as tirnbre?
.
A. The version of a rhythrn B. fhe irighness or lowness of a sound

L. ihe qLrality ut a sounLl D. fhc noise in a choir
Which of the following is a principle of clcsign in ar1'J
A. Line B. Shape C. Colour D. Alignment
3-5. is the respollse of the audience to a plai,,"
A. Reactior"r B. Tension C. \4otivation D. Climax
The picture below is an exarnple of a rirrr r r,.: perlormance.
A. solo B. dLret C. group D. ensemble

What is the meaning of the word the prcsro in music'/
A. Slow B. Moderate C. Quick D. -fone
38. What do we call the individual br-rilding blocks of a digital photograph?
A. Vectors B. Pirels C. Artistrv D. Lens
39. An example of stage ligirts is
A. torch B. back ligirts C. lamp D. spot
40. The art of creating and organisins dancs- iuovements is called
A. choreography B. sequencing C. retrograde D. perlbrmance
Benefiting from an artist's musical works wrthoui permission is called
A. ethical B. adjudicating C. piracy D. enterprise
42. Dominic Benhura is a prominent rn Zimbabwean
A. painter B. drau,er C. potter D. sculntor
I
ffil
l[^r*i
43. Oral communication is an example of a in theatre.
A. soft skill B. copyright C. marketing D. script
44. Pasichigare dance group is from which city in Zimbabwe?
A. Harare B. Bulawayo C. Masvingo D. Mutare
45. Making artworks that support the community shows
A. business B. creativity C. stupidify D. ubuntu
46. The artwork shown below is a
A. monument B. carving C. painting D. pottery

47. The markets theatrical productions at festivals and exhibitions in Zimbabwe.
A. NACZ B. NSSA C. CHIPAWO D. Jikinya
48. gives a person total ownership of a theatrical production.
A. Copyrights B. Actors C. Directors D. Script writers
49. which festival promotes indigenous dances in zimbabwe schools?
A. Jikinya B. Chibuku neShamwari
C. TIFAZ D. NACZ
50. is a festival for promoting Zimbabwean clance cultures for everyone in
Zimbabwe.
A. Jikinya B. Chibuku neshamwari
C. TIFAZ D. NACZ
A
TEST 10
1. Which body parts are classified as internal?
A. heart and head B. stomach and legs
C. lungs and heart D. lungs and arms
2. The forearms in the diagram are used for in Gymnastics.
A. movement B. balancing C. strength D. power

3. First aid is important after injuries because it
A. reduces hospital fees B. reduces work load of hospital staff
C. prevents injury from getting worse D. makes hospital unnecessary
4. Goitre is lack of
A. iron B. carbohydrates C. protein D. vitamin
5. Which swirnming stroke is shown ou the picture below'l
A. front crawl B. back stroke

C. butterflv stroke D. side stroke
It is important to before entering the pool.
A. dive
B. establish the shallow end of the pool
C. play around the pool
D. sing together
Which of the following events is a team event?
A. Vertical jumps B. horizontal3umps C. relays D. throws
8. Which of the following organisation is for athletic only in Zimbabwe?
A. ZTFA B. NAAZ C. NAPH D. NASH
g. in invasion games?
which component of fitness is needed for change of direction
A.strengthB.powelC.flexibilityD.agility
10. Name the principles of defending'
A. pressure B. penetration C. shooting D. creativitY
11. The following are all net game skills except

A. digging and dodging
B. receiving and blocking
C. spiking and serving
D. volleying and sPiking
t2. activitiesareveryimportantbeforeplayinganynetgame.
A. Light jogging and stretches
B. Giant Yawning and jogging
C. Head stand and deeP breath
D. Running and reading
l3.onewhocontrolsthegameofcricketorsoftbali is called
A. coach B. umpire C. observer D. recorder
14. Zimbabwean cricket team is called

A. warriors B. sables C. chevrons D. dynamos
15. It is a must for all combatants to put on

A. uniforms B. shoes
C. necklace D. protective gear
16. One of the Zimbabwe's boxing champions is --'
A.
Oliver Mutukudzi B. Charies ManYtichi
C. Charles Mungoshi D. Mayweather FYlod
17. Choose the appropriate definition of abseiling below.
A. It is the use of boats to travel'
B. Going uP the mountains
C.Itisamethodusedtodecentfromaverticalpoint.
D. It refers to water activities.
18. Theability to work together during adventure activities is called
A. climbing B. innovation c. critical thinking D' teambuilding
19. Why should a gymnast stay in a tucked position during rotation?
in order to rotate
A. B' to become smaller
c. in order to turn quickly D. to win in a competition
20. Astep turn in gymnastics means a turn made by
A. going round a bar
B. shifting weight from one body part to another
C. leaping with right foot
D. leaping off the left to right foot
21. Which of the following apparatus is suitable for back str:addle ro11?
A. sting mat B. incline mat
C. landing mat D. panel mat
A
22. which component of fitness is being
displayed on the diagram below?
A. strength B. power C. flexibiliry

23. What is the purpose of a landing D. agility
mat in gymnastics?
A. to absorb the force when tanaing B. lor beauty
C. for competition D. for display
24. Gymnastics attire must be
A. tight B. stretchy
C. tight and srretchy D. loose
2-5. Which statement is true about
rules in gyrnnastics?
A. nojewellery B. to use a track_suit as attire
C. to leave hair dangling D. to always chew gum
26. ln which class of rnusicai instmments
does the following instrument belong
to?
,A "x
'""'*lf
,\. inerlbranes ll. ci.ii_rr.rihrrpiioiie: C. larneilaphones

27. Which art type producecl proCu*s that D. aerophones
were r-rsed to hold beer r-ised to appease
. spirits'/ the
A. Painting B. Drawing C. Sculpruring D. pottery
Mohobelo, Mokhibo, Monyanyai<o and
oiio Mangu. u.. all theatrical and ceremonial
dances fiorn
A. Lesotho B, Mozambique C. Zimbabwe
29. Which dance was used lbr comnrunicatir-rn D. Egypt
purposes?
A. mbende B. gumboots C.
30. What a shade in visual arts?
kongonl,a D. agogo
A. A coiour with black addeci to it B. It is arr with 4-D
C. It is a principle of design D. It is when colours
31. An actor's function and diity in a play
called a
A. acting B. role
-12. What are axial movements in dance'/
C. motivation D. suspense
A. These are movements that. show rhythm.
B. These are movements at a stationary position.
C. These are movements that bring out culfure.
D. These are movements not allor.rred in dance.
GA
t^-./
1a
JJ. is the overall organisation of sections in music'
A. Texture B. Form C. Content D.
HarmonY
34. is the ability of an artwork to imitate reality or nature'
A. Copying B. Duplicating C. Shading D.
Imitation
prepare for
35. What is known as practice sessions in which the actors and technicians
public performance through repetition?
A. Exposition B. Tension C' Rehearsal D. Schooling
36. Another name for posture in dance is
A. posture
ra-, PvDlsrv B. shape C. move D. stance
31. Anexample of a group of performance directions is
A. Tone B. Tempo C. Volume D. Andante
38. is a printer that can produce objects with form'
A. 2D printer B. HP Printer C' Xerox D. 3D Printer
39. One who guides the flow of scenes in a play is the
A. actor ' B. director C. script writer D." teacher
40. A set design in dance is made in relation to the of the dance.
A. theme B. costume C. drums D. height
41. A instructs music theory and practical?
A. Composer B. Teacher C. Engineer D. Dancer
42. Which effects can be applied to art during an exhibition?
43. Jasen Mphepo Little Theatre is found in which city?
A. Gweru B. Bulawayo C. Mutare D. Harare
44. Anexample of a soft skill in dance is
A. movement B. retrograde C. flexibility D. noise
45. Changing music from one notation to another is called
A. notation B. solfege C.. staff D. transcription
46. The distance between notes is known as
A. semitone B. interval C. quaver D. beat
47. Whatname is given to this type of mbira?
A. matepe B. nyunganyunga C. nhare D. njari
@
48. What type of drawing is shown below?
A. observational B. painting C.
49. What is a sketch in art,?
abstract D. sculpture
A. A drawing without fonn.
B. A preliminary drawing for later elaborations.
C. A cross hatching principle .
D. A poster made of paint.

50. which organisation promotes dance for childre n in
Zimbabwe?
A. NAPH B. CHIPAWO C. NACZ D. TTFAZ
G
rfil
\^-.,/
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Topic l: Human Body

Word search (12 marks)
l. Nose 2. trachea 1
-). lungs 4. alveoli
5. mouth 6. oesophagus 1 stomach 8. intestines
9. heart 10. oxygen 11 veins 12. arteries
Multiple Choice (10 marks)
l. B 2.A 3.B 4.8 s.c
6.D 7, C 8.C 9. A 10. B
Structured Questions (15 marks)
1. These are body parrs fbund inside the body.
2. Inhaiation is breathing in oxygen.
Exhalation is breathing out carbon dioxide.
3.A tion takes place in the small intestines
Function
A. Teeth Break food
B. Stomach Stores foocl
Vein Transports blood
Nose Takcs in air
E. Trachea Heips in the flow of air to the lunss
F. Heart
|g*ry1rh" blood throughout the body
G. Artery Canlrcrygenated blood tiom the heart to the body
5. a) Mouth b) nose
Topic 2: Saf'ety and Health

Crossword puzzle (13 marks)
Across
Down
1. nutrients f . injury
2. proteins 2. fruits
3. water 3. warm up
4. sprain 4. knee
5. storage 5. gymnastics
6. inventory 6. sleep
1. bandages
A
Multiple Choice Questions (10 marks)
1.A 2. B 3.8 4. C 5.D
6.C 1. C 8.8 9. A 10.A
1. Use the table below identify the cause aand management or
w to rdentlly of lnlurles in sport [6]
inj u 'ies m
Iniury tvpe Cause management
a) fracture Contact Use cast or splint
Walking and running on Help the person to supPort the

uneven surfaces injured area.
Falls and accidents 2. Stop any bleeding by applying
pressure with clean bandage or
sports injuries
cloth.
blow on bones
3. Apply a soft or hard splint
above and below the area.
4. Apply ice or cold pack and

elevate.-
5. If the person is in shock lay

person down.
b) dislocation Poor landing 1. Help the person to support the
injured area.
sports injuries
2. Stop any bleeding by applying
falls
pressure with clean bandage or
accidents cloth.
collisions between two 3. Apply a soft or hard splint
lbotball players above and below the area.
4. Apply ice or cold pack and
elevate.
5. If
the person is in shock lay
person down.
c)nose bleeding injury and blow to the nose 1. To stop nose bleeding, pinch
repeated sneezing
flrmly the soft part of the nose
for at least 10-15 minutes.
Nose picking
2. Lean fonvards and breathe
collisions between trvo through the nrouth.
football players
offrozen
3. Place ice bag or a bag
vegetables coved in a clean cloth
on the nose bridge.
4. If' bleeding continues seek
medical attention
2. To protect-ii:.r r:yes iiom chlorinr: and other chemicals.
i r prcvet. ,: ' irn.
7;iI
t^r.l
3. Help brain to work faster.
Relaxes the body and the other organs.
Resting controls blood pressure.
Refreshes the body.
4. Proteins - amacimbi\madora, ishwa. dried flsh, kapenta, legurnes, dried meat, sour
milk, chicken road runners,
Carbohydrates -sweet potatoes, sadza, mutakura/inkobe,
mealie-meal porridge, yams,madumbe , brown rice
5. Various answers
Topic 3: Aquatic Skills

Pop quiz
1. Swimming, floating, sculiing, treading water, use of devices
2. A- Airway, B- Breathing C- circulation
3.' Front crawl, backstroke /crawl ,butterfl1,, breast stroke
4. Using steps, jumps, side entry sitting swivel and diving.
5. Swimming, scuba diving, boating, ratting, diving, canoeing, water polo
6. Correct the diving technique
. Correct body position during a dive.
. Starting at the edge of the pool.
' Placing one hand on top of the other with palms facing down.
' Bending forward and get the head as close to the water as possible.
. Crouching if preferring to take a smailer dive.
. Taking a deep breath and diving in headflrst.
I . Three advantages of learning diirerent swirnrring strokes
. Gives better workorit as inorc muscles are used
a
Swimming injuries are reduced as the body is not stressecl lvith the same movements
There is much more fun and exciternent in doing many strokes.
a
Learning a new stroke helps in improving perflormance.
Different strokes focus on different requirements thus many styles gives more
speed.
8. Two devices used when swimming
. Life jackets, arm floaters, floatation suits.
Treading water is turning into an upright position and making in-and-out sweeping
motion with arms to stabilise the upper body.
i0.Objects used to rescue a drowning person.
. Safety rings, towel, long sticks, long ropes
1,A 2, D 3.A 4.8 5.A
6. C 7. B 8.C 9.C 10. B
1. These are the basic skills a swimmer requires to keep afloat in water and swim.
,,T"dI
i.z-J
2. Swimming, safe entry and exit, breathing in water, floatation, streaming, treading'
water, rotation and orientation
3. Kirsty Coventry
4. Treading water, floating, sculling, the HELP position, swimming, use of devices'
5. (i) Lifting the casualty's chin and tilting the head back will open the airway.
(ii) If the casualty is not breathing, blow your own exhaled air into the casualty's
lung throughthe mouth thus oxygenating the blood by giving artiflcial ventilation.
(iii) If the hearf stops, apply Chest Compressions to force the blood through the heart
and around the bodY.
6. back stroke, butterfly, front crawl, breast stroke, side strotrie
TOPIC 4: Kids Athletics

Poems
Various poems
r. c 2. A 3. A 4.D 5.C
6, C 1, D 8.8 9,A 10. c
l. (i) 75m,80m, 100m,200m,400m
(ii) 800m, 1 500m
2. small cones? hurdles ,slalom poles
3. right take off position, good reaction, correct arm-leg action, good finishing technique
4. three chances
5. (i) In horizontal jumps the distance covered on the ground is measured whereas in
vertical jumps it is the height going up from the ground which is measured.
(iij Horizontal jumps- long and triple jump
Vertical- pole and high jumP
6. Holding the object, the stance, movement, the release
7. Shot put, hammer, discus and javelin
8. Circle or ring
Topic 5: Invasion Games
Type of invasion g4lqe Place of play No of players

hockey Hockey field t1
Soccer/football Soccer field/ pitch 11
mgby Rugby pitchifield 15
basketball Basketball court 15

1. C 2.D J. C 4.C 5.8
6.C 1. B 8. B 9. C 10. A
A
1. (i) defending - protecting, shielding or guarding against
being attacked.
(ii) attacking -moving forward or engaging an opposing
team
with the objective of scoring points or goals.
2' lines that runs along the lengthl'of each side of the field.
Also called
loucflinls-
Ine stcle-hnes.
goal lines- lines at the end of the field .Also called
the end lines.
3. The principle of delay
The principle of depth
The principle of defensive balance
[2]
4. 4-3-3,5-3-2,4_4_2, 3_5_2 L2l
5. Advantages of formations
(i) They are used to strengthen the tearn.
(ii) They can also be used to spot the weakness of the opponent
and attack.
(iii) Using lormations creates opporlunities to flll spaces when
defending.
Disadvantages of formations
(i) Requires players to understand each position as well as the tactics
of the team.
(ii) Formations can create very rigid ryri.-, of play.
(iii) Formations demands a lot of communication to coordinate
with the teammates.
i. Defenders, strikers, midfielders, goalkeeper.
'. Changing speed, direction and pace. disguise movement, guarding
TOPIC 6: Target and Combat Games

Word splash
Judo, daris, stance, combatants, kung Fu, karate, kickboxing,
wrestling, hula hoops,
Aiming, shooting games, stationary,. mobile space
2.8 )
J. B 4. C 5.A
6.C t. c 8. A 9. B 10. c
1' Target games are activities in which players send an object
towards a targetwhile
avoiding any obstacles.
2. moving or stationary
3. Darts, archery carpeting ,target shooting, cone croquet and ring games
4' scoring is when one successfuliy throws or strikes an object
closer to a target
than their opponents were able to.
Players can score points by throwing, kicking or rolling objects
at the targets.
5. A contact game where two combatants fight against
each olh". using rule"s of contact.
6. kicking, squatting, jumping, fwisting and tuming
7. legs and arns or hands
8. wrestling, judo, karate, fencing, kung Fu, martial arts
and kick-boxing.
TOPIC 7. Net Games
crossword puzzle
Across Down
1. Soccer 1. target area
2. net 2. court
3. two 3. racket
4. strokes 4. six
5. defending
1. B 2. C 3.C 4. B 5.B
6. A 1. B 8.D 9. C 10.D
1. (i) Net games are activities in which players strike an object over the net towards a
court or target area that the opponent is defending.
(ii) Net games: volleyball, tennis, table tennis, badminton, squash
2. Serve, pass, set, ground stroke, clear shot and many more ref page 50.
3. A top spin is a serve that spins rapidly forward from the top.
Topspin also refers to the forward rotation of the ball.
4. (i) Spin is a rotational motion given to the ball.
(ii) A stroke is an act of hitting or swinging an object with a hand or any sporting
equipment.
5. Power is a change in energy with respect to time.
TOPIC 8: Striking Games

Scrambled sentences
1. Examples of striking games are cricket, baseball, softball and rounders.
2. When striking for a distance, grip and stance are considered.
3. Grip is holding the handle of a bat.
4. In striking games runners hit, kick and throw an object.
5. In cricket, two teams have equal chances of batting and fielding.
6. Scoring in cricket is called a run.
l. The strongest shot is the forehand.
8. Footwork refers to the movement of back foot..
9. The O- shaped and V-shaped are the two types of grips.
10. The back position is critical.
Multiple Choice (l0marks)

1.A 2. D 3.C 4. B 5.A
6. A 1. C 8.C 9. B 10.C
Structured Questions (lSmarks)
1. Losing a wicket occurs when a batsman's period of batting is brought to an end by the
A
opposing team. '
2. Baseball, cricket, softball. handball, rounders and T-ball.
3' The stance is the position in which a batting player stands to have the
ball bowled to
then'r.
4. (i) Front strokes require the batter to come forwards and hit the balls.
(ii) Footwork is a systetnatic movernent of the feet in some sporting actirrities.
5' Back stroke is perfonned when the batter moves his leg back befoie playing
t5e ball.
' The leg nrovement causes the ball to change direction
' Backward det-ensive strokes rirav be used to score runs by rlanipuiating the block
to nrove the ball into vacant portions of the i,fielcl.
' back stroke also allow's space creation for the batter to score runs.
A
6. run
7. to allorv thern to score points ol. l.Llns
TOPIC,9: Adventure Games

\\'ord search
ORIENTEERING ABSEILING MOUNTAINEERING CANOEING ATLAS
CLIMBERS CAN,IPING CON,IPASS MAP ADVENTURE
Nlultiple Choice Questions(l 0 marks)
l. D L C i. tl ,+. D 5.C
6. B i. C' 8. i) i)A r0. c
Structured Questions(l 5 marks)
l. Orienteerine. hiking. qorge rn alking. r-oi:k clitr-rbins. atrse ilinq. nlountaineerins,
cantping. ani rniii ridirrg. cvc lrng, r.l'hitervatei ralti ng, navigation
l. Calrl;rirl-q is a t'ccl'cltliln:ti ;-ir.'ti..'i;,, ilr i','1rith par-ticiparris tal<e Lip tcllporary r.esidence
in the outdoors ttsrtallf iisinir rcrtis or specialiv ciesigneci or adapted vehicles
fbr shelter.
-r. A great rvay oi'har in_q fiin,
. a good exposure to lresh air
' is a wav of boosting vitarni, D si,cc r-r.rost activitics are
. pertbrmed outdoor-s
. spendin-9 rtruch tintc doing physical activities.
. slress reductiorr
4. boating, scuba diving. rafiing, sLLrfins. *,ater skiing, canoeing . w,ater polo
,5. Con-rpass. nrap, checkpoint recording crevice, orientcering shoes
6. Helnlet. harness. ropes. carabinr-ers. bclav tlevices. r'ocl< climlring anchors, ice axe,
quick drar.l,, fi_eure 8. cord.
Topic 10: Gymnastics
circuit stations
l. legs,knees,arrrls, hands, back 6. legs, heads, arrns, hands
2. legs, backs,heads,arms, shoulders, 7. ankles, legs, hip, knees, feet
knees, hands 8. legs, ankle, knees, toes
3. legs, heads, arrns, knees 9. legs,arms, flngers, hands
4. egs, heads,arrns, hands 10. legs, fingers, shoulders,ankles, hands
5. legs, hip, knees, feet
Multiple choice (10 marks)

1.A 2,C 3. C 4.A 5.C
6.C 7. C 8.8 9.D 10. B
L rolling, ,skipping, walking. hopping
2. it is the shape that is different on either side of the body if divided tnto 2 equal parts
3. to allow free movement
to show body shape
4. poor balancing
not following proper stages
lack of fitness
5. balance, flexibility, strength, endurance, speed,
Topic 11 : Music
Match works
Various answers
1.A 2,C 3.B 4.8 5.A
6.8 7. A 8.D 9. Cl 10. A
1. Physical activify is any movement action that exercises the body.
A workout is an exercise that usually follows an arranged pattern
2. Rhythm and tempo
3. Uses of background music in physical education:
. It can motivate, stimulate or guide a workout
. It arouses the mood and enhances performance
. It can be used as a timer that guides a workout
4. Recording music is a process that involves many stages. These are writing a song,
arangement, recording, mixing and mastering. Recording music for mass displays is
also guided by a theme.
5. Music and dance can be combined as dance can be choreographed in relation to the
music. The two are then executed together and bring out the theme.
@
Background. music is tneant ibl gLriding any physicai activity. Perfbrinance rlusic is
ntcant for a specific perfbnnancc u ith a specific theme.
7. The ternpo or speed of'a song ts important as the speed gLrides the rate at which the
rvorkout is done. The thster the spced. the intense the workout and the slou,er the
speed. the more relaxed is the workout.
Topic l2: Background Art Nlultiple Choice

Pop Quiz
l. Backsround art is art that establishes artv clesir-ed mood or character of the surrounding
or envirunlltcnt.
2. A pattent is an arrangcrllcltt or tlesign irt rvhich there repetition of visual elentents
such as shapes and colours.
3. Exan-rples of pattenrs arc shai'res. picrLrres and syrnbols.
4. A ther-ne is an idea or subject expressecl and revealed thror,ig h
5. A theme can bi- broLr-qht out bv clcar illusrrations.
6. A r.nount is a hard boarci onto r.l,hrch art,,vorks are place<i so as to protect therl and for
easy displayin-u.
7 . An art display can also be called an exhibition.
8. A tlrouttt serves to protect artv,,or l<s tl'ont bendin-u. cnrling, wrir-rkling, rapid changes in
tel"rlpel ature ancl hurnidity.
9. A s,v-mbol is anything in the lonl of'a rnark. sign or character that represents an object
or an idea.
10. Finished artworks are displaved at ;in erliibition

i. B -1.A I l,f 4. I) 5.A
6. B 7. C s. B 9. t) r0. A
l. Definition of tcnns as used in aii:
' A syrnbol is anythirrg in the lorm oi a nrark. sign or character that represents an
ob.ject or an ideii.
" A lt.lotlltt is a hard board or.rttr rvhich ilnished artworks are placed.
c { pattern is an arrangement or ciesign in i,vhich there is repetition of visual elernents
such as shapt-s antl colours.
2. Background art is it-lt|r)r'tr'rni-'e ir: it creates a desired envrronr-nent or sllrrounding.
3. r,'ariotis ilitrstlations can be ei'caieci here as lor"rg as they are al1 patterns.
1. Thernatic art is art that is nrarle rrr i'el:ition to a specrfic idea or concept.
-5. A tlieute is an idea or strb_iect erlrrcsscd and rcvealed through artistic ilnages.
6. Benefits of mountrng arnvclrks:
7. Prevents artu/orks ti'otn bendntg
8. Avoids curlrn-s of artrvorks
9. Protects the artr.l,orks ficltr u,rinl<ling
10. It protects the artworl<s tr-onr ra1-ricl changes in temperature and humidity.
1 1. An art display is important because it is a platform where finished aftworks can be
exhibited and sold.
Topic 13: Arena Acts

Word splash
A poem titled 'Mass displays atZimbabwe National Youth Games''
Multiple Choice (lOmarks)
1.B 2. A 3.C 4. A 5.A
6. B 7. A 8. A 9. D 10.B

1. Arena acts are any body movements in space.
2. Meaning of terms:
. Space awareness is the ability to be alert when making use of space.
. Rondo is a movement sequence in which patterns are repeated with contrasting
sections in between (ABACA).
. Space is the area on which mass display movements happen.
. A formation is when movements are done creating arrangements, forms, structures
or patterns.
3. Rhythm guides steps in movement with its beats.
4. Choreography is the affangelnent of movement patterns in a specific sequence for
performance or based on a theme.
5. The illustration shows a sirnple line formations
6. A forrnation can bring out a theme by illustrating patterns, or symbols that are in line
with the theme.
7 . It is necessary to mark out the space for movements as it makes one aware of the
area boundaries where movements are supposed to happen.
A
VISUAL AN D PERFORMING ARTS
Topic I : History of arts and culture
l.l Music
Word Search
a) Makossa, Kwasakwasa and Soukos b) Macheso c) Kwaito
d) Texas e) Chioniso 0 Juntal g) Kanindo
h) Aerophones i) Hosho j) Melody
Nlultiple Choice (l0marks)
1. D 2.A 3.C 4.A 5.D
6.8 l. D 8.A 9. C 10. B
1. a) The process of creating or making an original song
b) Rhythm, melody, theme, culture
2. Cultures cause diversity in music due to the different ways in which each and every
culture arranges its rnusic in terms of rhythms and musical in-struments used.
3. a) Jazzhas characteristic rhythrn pattems, harmonic practices related to, but not
identical with. functional hatrnony, and the practice of improvisation
b) Kwaito has a slower tempo range than other styles of house music and it contains
catchy rnelodic and percussive loop sainples, deep bass lines, and vocals.
c) Cor-rntry lnrtsic often consists of ballads and dance tunes with generally simple
forms, tblk lyrics, and hanlonies mostly accompanied by string in-struments
1. a) Chordophones prodtrce souncl throrlsh the strunrming or piurcking oistrings.
. Examples include guitar. chipendar-ri, violin, cello. harp
b) Idiophones produce souttd througli scrapping or shaking the instmrnent.
Examples include hosho. rnaracas, cymbals, mbira
5. An indigenous instrument is one that originates in a country. A loreign in-strument is
one that is brought from another coLlntry.
6. An electrophone is an instrument that produces sound using electricity
7. It raises awareness, it educates the community, it unites the community,
1.2 \risual arts

Word Search
a) Culture b) Content c) Khoisan d) Matopos
e) Benhura f) Cinder g) Khami h) Basketry
i) Canvas jl Lesotho
lYlultiple Choice {l Omarlis}
1.A 2.C )
J. D 4.8 5.D
6.A ], B 8. C' 9.A 10. D
1. Matopos, Makumbe, Tsodilo, Daramaland
2. a) Pottery is the making of pot like objects or containers using clay. The products
include the likes of traditional clay pots used for cooking and storing beverages
and water.
b) Beading is the art ofjoining small objects to make jewelry. The objects used
include stones, shells and teeth of animals as well as plastic prod-ucts and glass
and other minerals to make a
c) Masks are objects used to cover the face for different reasons like pro-tection and
cultural significance. Masks are made of human or animal skulls, newspapers,
plastic textiles, pottery, shells, feathers, animal teeth, copper, bronze, wood, metal.
3. Rock paintings in Zimbabwe show the way of life of our ancestors and dis-play our
ori_einal norns and traditions from the pre-colonial period.
4. Culture can be seen in an artwork through the form of the artwork. This can be seen
through the tools in the artwork, clothing, structure as well as materials used.
5. Art galleries developed and promoted local art in post colonial Zimbabwe through
marketing and advertising local art products as well as ellcouraging artists to make
local and indigenous artworks.
Art style Materials used in pre-colonial era
Weaving Reeds, small sticks and straw
Drawing Cinder
Pottery Clay
Sculpture Stones
7. Arlworks fi'om different historical periods are different because of the influence
found during that historical period. In pre-colonial periocl artworks were influenced
by the way of life in the society, colonial period had western influence and post-
colonial artworks have a contemporary influence.
1.3 Theatre
Word Search
1. Sfyle 2. Costume 3. Set 4. props
5. Mokhibo and Tingoma 6. pungwe and Storytelling
l. Puppeteer
Multiple Choice (1 0marks)
l. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 5.A
6. D l. A 8. B 9. D 10.D
1. a) Set is the environment created on stage by arranging objects for a play.
b) A puppet is a doll used as characters in theatre.
c) A prop is any object that is carried or used by actors cluring a play.
A
d) Costurne is the clothing that actors wear on stage during a play.
2. Costumes help in bringing out a character's status is a play.
a
J. A genre is a type or kind of theatrical act.
4. Masks are used to represent culture or to hide the face for different reasons or to
show status.
5. Pre-colonial theatre focused rnainly on social issues and was done for entertainment.
Post-colonial theatre encompasses many different issues and is rnainly done for
commercial purposes.
6. Match the following theatrical styles to the countries which they are practiced.
Theatrical Style Country

Mohobelo Lesotho
Umhlanga Swaziland
lngabisa Swaziland
Pungwe Zimbabwe
7. A set design is used to bring out the desired environment as as to set the mood
for the play.
1.4 Dance
Word Search
l. Sacred 2. Iwossana
1
J. Zi,ipunha Taboo
5. Attire 6. Gurnboots 'l
Agogo Chewa
9. Fitness 10. Baiance
Multiple Choice ( lOmarks)

1. B 2.A -). L- A A
6.C l. D 8B C B

l. a) Origin is the geographical location fi'om where the dance started.
b) Ethnic group is the group of people or tribe that started performing the dance.
c) Props are objects that dancers carry and use during a dance
2. Musical accompaniment is the musical sound that is produced as the dancers are
performing. These can be tirrou-eh sir"rging, drumming, clapping or from rattles.
1 Rain rnaking, appeasement, burial, praying for crops, crowning of chiefs, searching
for lost people
4.
Dance type Purpose
Gumboots Communication
Tangi Celehration of war
Amabhiza For social gathering and
rainmaking
Sibhaca Fun or entertainment
lTd
l'^-.i
5. a)Children - supports creativity and socialisation, improves physical fitness,
provides entertainment, exercises the bodies, stimulates brain activity, improves
coordination skills and balance
b) Adults - slows the aging process, provides fitness, improves memory retention,
exercises the bodies, improves blood circulation, improves balance and strength,
provides social and entertainment activities
7. Traditional dances from the pre-colonial era were affected during the colonial period
due to the western influence as their culture became dominating over the local culture.
8. a) Attire - ngundu, mbikiza, madhumbu
b) Song - guva rangu, ho ho iyere,
c) Musical accompaniment - clappers, drums, singing, whistle
9. Culture influences dances through the ceremonies that each culture does.
Topic 2: The creative process and performance

2.1 Music
Crossword Puzzle
Across
1. Semitone
2. Octave
Down
l. Accidentals 2. Bassoon 3. Harmony 4. Compound
5. B flat 6. Pitch 1. Meter 8. Scale

1. B 2.C 3.A 4.A 5.C
6.A 7. A 8.B 9.C 10. A
1. a) Simple time signature is a type of meter in which the type of beat is divided into
twos
b) Compound time signature is a type of meter in which the type of beat is divided
into threes or sixes.
3. Identifying intervals from extract
2d 3'd 2d 4th
4. Completing the rhythm:

i
(i,,'mblls t
l}3.1 ,ir€Jfi l
There ctre mam' r)?rsions thtl t'uu l;t, t'i'ertta(l hcre. I7ot,,'et,et', the total ru::::ber o/-beats
sliauld ALIIAYS be 3. Rii.t,tlitn.s .tl'rctttld itr;t he compli{'oted and sltc;:rid be,ttt ,,; irtii:ci the
i rtslrunrcnt p/ut,irtg the rh.i thnt ( c'.vttbti i.t ).
-5. a) This is a group of flats ot'sharps liral show thc key of a rnusicai piecc,
b) Accidentals are flats, naturals or sharps that are used to change the pitcr r i a nuie
6. D maior u,ithout key signature but accidcntals and marked scmitones
2.2 \'isual arts

Crossword Puzzle
Across
1. Imaginary 2. Value 3. Tone 4. Line
5. Shade 6. Proportion
Down
l. Life 2. Colour 3. Shape 4. Abstract
i. A 2. C ,i. ij 4.A s.c
ir. -l-or-r.' '7 B ,-, r. '). ./\, 10. A
1. a) Line it is a point moving in space and can var-v'. in rvidth, length. curvature.
colour. or direction
b) Colour It is the visual impression that depends oir the reflection or absorption of
iight
c) Texture It is the surtbce qiial;tv ot'nrateriais, either actual or :IS call be scen: it is
the ror-rgirness or smoothness ol'a sr-rrf-ace
d) Space It is the emptiness or area benveen. arounJ, above, beiow, or contained
rvithin objects
2 The clifference betu'een a paintine and a drawing is that the rnateriais used in
painting is paint whilst that used in drau,ing is a usually charcoal
3. a) Imaginary drawing is drar,ving what is being pictured in the rninC
b) Observation drar.ving is drawing tiorn aranged objects
1" r\ shading techr-rique is a way rn rvhich shading is dorre in drawing. It includes types
like cross-hatching shading.
-5. Shading is irr"rportant as it sho\\'s the etlect of light ()n an object and also shorvs the
ru
texture ofan object.
6. Tonal variation is the difference in tone colours that can be noted in art.
7. a) abstract sculpture b) observational drawing c) abstract drawing
8. Proportion is important in art as it makes an artwork come out clearly in terms of
sizes of its parts.
2"3 Theatre
CrosswordPuzzle
Across
1. Suspense 2. Blocking 3. Motivation 4. Set
5. Curtain 6. Improvise
Down
l. Walking 2. Audience 3. Tension
1.8 2. B 3.A 4. C 5.B
6. A 7. A 8.C 9.8 10.D
Structured Questions (2A marks)
1. a) Improvisation is performing unscripted scenes during a play
b) Tension is a sense of unease created within the audience by the actors in a play
c) Mood is the creation of an atmosphere with certain emotions that are caused by
the play.
d) Suspense is the act of leaving the audience in a state of wanting more or
expecting more from the play.
e) Motivation is an actor's reason to do something during a play.
2. A set design is important in aiding or helping to bring out the theme of a play or
creating a desired environment that suits the play.
3. Characterisation is the skill of portraying or displaying the character of a certain
character by an actor.
4. a) Blocking means any type of movement that is done by actors on stage during a
play.
b) Scriptwriting is the act of writing aplay.
5. Suspense is important as it generate.s more liking or fascination from the audience
captivating them. It also makes aplay to have a continued version.
6. Sub-text is Information that is implied by a character but not stated by a character
in dialogue, including actions and thoughts.
7 . Moods that can be created in a play are joy, sadness, shock, anger, amazement
@
2.4 Dance
Crossword Puzzle
Across
1. Theme 2. Skit 3. Space 4. Rondo
5. Bending
Down
l. Ir-rrprovise 2. Gliding 3. Retrograde 4. Jumping
5. AB
l.A 2. B 3.A 4. A 5.C
6.C 1. B S.fi 9. D 10.C
L a) Tuming is when the body rotates or spins at a fixed position or in motion.
b) Jumping is lifting the body from the ground into the air by leaping or skipping.
c) Gliding is r,vhen the body is siiriing flom one point to the other.
d) Stretching is widening of any body part or any reaching action.
2. hnprovisation is when the dancer perfonns an Llnpracticed or unrehearsed dance
tnovement during a perfomrance. It shouid be noted that in any improvised
movement, it should always be in line rvith the rhythrnic patterns.
3. Choreography is the act of creating ar-ri arlanging clancc incrr,'ements into aperformance.
1. A dance sequence is a repeated scquence of nrovernent ideas or a speciflc
relationship or grouping of people dtrrinq a dance.
5. a) ABA is a tl'irce-part con.tpcsi;ionat f-r,r'nr in v.,.irich the seconci section differs i,vith
the first section and the third section is an interpretation of the first section in a
condenseci. abbreviated. or ertcndeci ibnr"i.
b) Rondo is a musical fortri in u'liich a section is repeated, with contrasting sections
in between. such as ABACA.
c) Retrograde is the act of taking a seqlrence of choreography and reversing it.
d) Call and response is a dance seqllencL- that has 2 forms that are cornplimentary to
each other and are alwa,vs repeating.
6- Lnitation in danqe is when dancers copy the rnovements being done by the one
leading the dance.
Topic 3: Aesthetic values and appreciation

3.1 Music
Jumtrle Land
I. ADJUDICATION 2. ME,LOD\' 3. TIMBRE
J. INTERPRETA|ION 4. MUSICIANSHIP
-5. SCORE 6. DYNAMICS ]. TEXTURE
7A
i'^-\l
8. EXPRESSION 9. RHYTHM
Multiple Choice (1 Omarks)
1.A 2.C 3. B 4, B 5.C
6.A 7. B 8.C 9. C 10. A
1. a) Timbre is the unique quality of a sound
b) Texture describes how layers of sound within a piece of music interact
c) Form is the overall organisation of sections in music
d) Melody is a musical sequence of single musical tones that are organised in
a song or a musical piece
2. Pitch is how high or low a sound is while volume is hou'loud or soft a sound is.
3' If music is in binary form it means that the music has two different sections
4. a) Balance and blend is how voices in a choir sound together at the right dynamic
(volume) levels and how they sound together producing harmony.
b) Score interpretation means the ability to understand and perform exactly what is
required and written on the musical piece.
c) Tone quality means the texture and type of voice being produced by the choir as
a whole.
d) Voice production means the ability to produce a desired sound or voice type and
one that is audible.
3.2 Visual arts

Jumble Land
1. FORM 2. CONTENT 3. Colour 4. SHADE
5. TONE 6. ALIGNMENT ]. PROPORTION 8. CONTRAST
9. IMITAIION 10. BALANCE
1.A 2.C 3.8 4.A 5.8
6.B 7. B 8.A 9.B 10. B
1. Balance, alignment, contrast, proportion, repetition, emphasis
2. a) Colour is the visual expressions that depend on reflection or absorption of light
on surfaces.
b) Line It is a point moving in space and can vary in width, length, curvafure,
colour, or direction
d) Tone is the lightness or darkness of a colour
2. Repetition is when an art skill is constantly repeated in an artwork.
It can be shown
in many ways. An example can be shown through creation of patterns.
1
J. Emotional quality
4. 3D Art or art showing form
5. a) Proportion can be used to show the size relationship
s in parts of an artwork.
A
For example, the size of hands in relation to the body.
b) Contrast can be used to show the difference between the lightest and darkest
parts of a picture. For exampie, those parts with more light and those with iess
light.
3,3 Theatre
Jumble Land
1. CONFLICT 2. SPACE 3. MOOD 4. TENSION
5. COSTUME 6. LIGHTING 1. SET 8. SCENE
9. PUPPET IO. CLIMAX
l.A 2.D 3.A 4.A s.c
6.8 1. C 8.A 9.D 10. A
1. a) Costume is the type of clothing wom by actors on stage during a play.
b) Mask is a face covering wom by actors for various reasons.
c) Props are the objects used by actors during a play to represent something.
d) Form is the overall structure of a theatrical play that normally follows an
established design.
2. Dramatic elements are essential t'eatures of a theatrical performance and they include
conflict, tnood, sound, contrast. climax, rhythm, space and tension.
3. a) Set means a designed environment that is created and placed on the stage"
b) Lighting means the visual effects used in a play that make use of stage lights on
actors during a play.
Climax in a play is the most interesting parl or peak o1'a play.
Make-up is necessary in a pla-v- as ii give,' the actors visual impressions and enhances
or change facial appearances of actor:r.
6. Characterisation is the development and portrayal of a personality through thought,
action, dialogue, costuming, and makeup.
3.4 llance
Jumble Land
1. VENUE 2. 3. THEME
RETROGRADE 4. DUET
5. POSTURE 6. PATTi]RN 1. RONDO 8. ENSEMBLE
9. CHOREOGRAPHY tO. ORIGINALITY
Nlultiple Choice ( 1 0marks)
1. A 2. B 3.8 4.D 5.A
6. D t. C 8.D 9.8 10. A
i. a) Form is the overall structural organisation of a dance
b) Content is the main idea or major concept of a dance
2. a) Duet is when a dance performance is done by two people.
b) Ensemble is when a group of people perform a dance.
c) Solo is when one person performs a dance
3. Dance adjudication is the process of analysing and judging giving marks to a dance
performance.
4. a) Entrance and stage management looks at how the dancers make their way onto
the stage at the beginning of the performance. Stage management looks at how
the dancers perform their movements and sequences making use of the whole
stage suitably.
b) Self expression looks at horn, each and every dancer uniquely performs a dance in
his or her own way.
c) Originality looks at performing the dance without making any significant cultural
changes to it especially for traditional dances.
5. A venue can affect a dance performance as different venues have different floors that
produce different sounds when dancers perform. The dift-erent floors also affect thc
feet ofthe dancers.
Topic 4: Arts technology

4.1: Music
Pop Quiz
1. Sibelius,Finale 2. Midi, Pdf, Audio, Video
3. Playback 4. Dynamics
5. Largo, grave, allegro, allegretto, andante, adagio, presto
6. Forte 7. Ethics
8. P 9. Transcription
10. Tempo
Multiple Choice (10marks)

1.B 2. B 3.C 4. A 5.B
6. B 7. D 8. A 9. B 10.A
1. a) Music software is any digital tool or application that allows one to create or edit
music electronically.
b) Keypad is a bar in music software where one gets all the note values to be used
in song composition.
c) Transpose means to change music from one key to another key.
2. Composing a song using music software:
. start the application
' do your page setup (title, instruments, key, time signafure, metronome marking,
crusis or anacrusis beats)
. add notes on the stave from the notepad
. add any necessary plug-ins
. save your project in any desired format
A
Avoid copyright infringement, avoid piracy, be social sensitive
a) Nkosi yami Jesu b) D major
c) 2-2 or cut common time d) 3 part harmony
e) Largo 0 5 bars
g) Crotchet rest
h) It is a tie and it means that the notes are on the same pitch level
i) Unison or 1"
4.2 Visual arts
Pop Quiz
1. Digitalisation is the process of working electronically and not manually.
2. Visual arts technology is any software or hardware that is used in making artworks.
3. InDesign, Illustrator and Photoshop
4. Oiled-clay, Fabrics, electric chisel, electronic pens, pencils and brushes, textile
5. Indigenous tools in art are Locally found tools and they can be easily made.
6. Doing art that is socially acceptable, respccting other artists'copyrights
1. A 3-D printer prints objecrs with height (breadth), width and length
8. Corel Draw
1.A 2. A 3u 4.D 5.A
6. B 7. Cl 8.A 9. D 10. c
Structured Questions (20 marksi
1. Visual arts technology is any softu,are or hardware that is used in making arf'works.
2. a) ICT stands for Information and Cornnrunication Technology and it means all the
technological toois and materials ibLinci in \risr-ralAr1s.
b) 3D printer is a tenn grvelr to a pnllter that prints objects with form (length, width
and height).
c) Pixel are the building blocks tbr any digital picture
3. a) Modern technology - Ipad, computer. electronic pen and pencil
b) Indigenous technology - Clair. reeds, grass, animal hide
4. a) Illustrator is a vector based application that works with vector images that can be
reduced to scale and are made up of lines and anchor points.
b) PhotoShop works with pixeis and allows editing of images and can also be used
to manipulate colour.
5. sketches logos lcons posters
complex illustrations for videos
6. Technology has changed the world of arl by making everything digital. This becomes
easy to create artworks with perfection. However, it also changed the world of art bv
removing personal manual skills and techniques.
4.3'X-heatre
Pop Quiz
1. Visual effects
2. A one-act play is a play with only one prolonged scene, in some cases it can be 2 scenes.
3. Sound effects
4. A voice type in theatre is a way in which a character uniquely produces a desired kind,
form or style of voice
5. Avoiding copyright infringement, avoiding to do renditions without permission, avoid
piracy
6. Characterisation is the skill of portraying or displaying the character of a certain
character by an actor
7. It can be seen through costume or make-up or voice
8. Electronic means digitalised
l.C 2. B 3. C 4. C 5.B
6. A 7. B. 8. A 9. B 10.A
Structured Questions Q0 marks)
1. Side lights, back lights, front lights, spot lights
2. a) Sound effects are stronger and exaggerated sounds that are used to support an
action of an actor in a theatrical play.
b) Msual effects is the use of make-up which involves cosmetics and costumes or
attire that actors wear when performing on stage
c) Light effects involve the use of artificial lighting on actors during a theatrical
performance.
3. A gesture is any body movement used by an actor to strengthen a point in a theatrical
play.
4. Culture can be illustrated in theatre through costumes used, language used, rnake-up
used and also the props and set design used.
5. Microphones, speakers, lights, projectors, cameras
Career Role
Actor One who performs acting on stage
Director One who leads the flow of events or
scenes in a play
Costume designer One who designs and creates
costumes or attire to be worn by
actors on stage
Script writer One who writes aplay
4,4 Dance
Pop Quiz
1. A set design is the environment created on stage for a dance performance
A
SoLrnd. i'isual, r'nusical. lighting
NlLrsicai eff'ects invcllr es the sonss that are plal,ed dLrring a dance pcrlbnnance
Stag': li-ghts are used sr) as to rnalie 1hc rhnce visible clr-rring a dance pcrl,:nnatrce
llistorical periods in dance are illustrated throu-uh application of visual cfl-ects
t-nake Llp 0r costlrllres
6. lipes olmovements in dance are locor.r.rotor and axial
7. Scenery in dance is the vievu'thai is crcated on stage for a dance perfonri:,-.','
8. Piracy: incorporatins dance stvles oiother dancers in dance without perrlissron
N{ultiple Choice l0marks)

l. :\ A f)
!) 4.8 _5. B
6. ii, B 9A r0. B
Structured Questions (2{l marks}
L Dltr],..c tct,lttttrlr,:-) j::,..,1re. ilr,.. sotirvrirc rrsccj to prtx r-flccts in a
c-lnncc pertbrnranc;.
a) \'isLrli cllccts itlioir,: tlri Lrs,-'ll irltrrl,ritr1 ntalie-rrp orr tlanccrs tbr a perlbrlnance
b) L.ightinu inrolr cs rhc Lrsr oi'riiliiie rir j iiglrts on clancc pertonlcr s to malie then-l
r,irihlc.
lioLrtrci r-ilccts,u-c:\irol'i srlnr-irir ir:.r11 tir.-'r-tpltl:isc,.larrcc 1lovcl'ltcnts r,r,hile ntrrsical
ctlccts iri'r s()r'lg: Liri.lr-i ir, pi-,r'. irl* 1.rrli)r) :rnti li:r,1hn-i rlulinq a diince perfbrmance.
Pllc'Licc and ilre ,.'ti.riublc society ancl

cornnrunitr,.
Perfbrnr anci nrark,-.i crrlirinii Jarr,,; iir;tt 1.lt'csr,rr * oi tlrc societv.
Ar rricl r:olrr irtg ilanl.: :i., i,.:-i rtriJ ;i,.rt-COgraP hCr-i that belongs to othcr
\\
:ll'(,lt11\ iii'ilil1 i't,-" 'f i'-.i,,;
' Ayoid Ltploltriinu rjilncc'i) ic'. rii,,'r-i" iiuli ruc itr.r|r i.i'cil pertorirrcr-l or i',ull fuseal'clled
..,ir",:spcciallr ..ii'' "i; r:ii-'r..,.'. ilr.:'. iilbc ln insuit to thc cr-rltLilc ihc clan,.e bclongs
".
ttl.
Etlects arc inipol'tani in a aiari.J licl'ii)nlriurce iis they enrphasisc rllov'Jllcnts
and irnpro\.'c the r i:'ibilin oi'ihc rlanee irerfbr'mel's.
(i. Ll istorical
llcf iods. rLiltLlr.. tiL,:ilrl !i.:ai.rlcs. charactcrisatiolrs
7 L'op1,'riglrts in tlancc ilrc o\\'r1u'ishiil oi'ii clance rro\;es. r'oirtines r)r chorcography.
(r
.t sci ilcsign is inrirLrriant in il Lilni.-,-'iri't{31f i1;1;rc:e lis it lielps in bringing or-rt tl-re
thcnrc oi'the dunc,J.
-tr"rpic
5: tnterprise skills
5. t l'lusic
$'Iatch \,Iaking
ll\41;Rn - ( )rr.iltisrrLi,"i il;;.ri 1r1;ri;. {s illi.::.1-il}ils
;
l-lilUNTLr - Spinl trf oir.rrus:.
trXillBITION - Displui' of i.t'tLr:tc:ii i1l]il'lilI ii-'f it:;
ITIRAC\' - Inti'ingcr.iteni i,f li-,rhl:
COPYRIGHTS - Ownership of a creation
1. D 2. C 3. B 4. B s.B
6. D 7. A 8.D 9. A 10.D
1. a) Promoter makes sure that an artist gets to perform his or her music on shows,
festivals and concerts
b) Instrument maker designs and creates musical instruments for sell.
c) Composer creates original or re-alranges pieces of music for performance.
2. a) Media coverage (newspaper and television)
b) Making posters
c) Making promotional clothing
d) Giving our fliers
e) Digital marketing on social media
0 Planning live shows and concerts
3. ZIMURA helps artists by registering them and ensuring that they have their full
copyrights over their music. It also helps artist to get their royalties.
4. When constructing a musical instrument one considers the dimensions, sound
production, suitable materials
5. A music exhibition is important because it makes people know of musical products
(songs and instruments). It also gives artists and instrument makers a chance to sell
their products.
6. a) Soft skills are are personal characteristics which enable one to interact and get
along well with other people.
b) Unhu/ ubuntu/ vumunhu is the spirit of oneness as well as togetherness
l. Copyright protection reduces piracy as artists will have full ownership of their
music. This avoids people selling their music as it will have the artists'name on it
and it will not be easy to copy.
5.2 Visual arts

Match Making
GRAPHIC DESIGNER - Creates visual concepts for art using computer software
CURATOR - Collects artworks for exhibition and marketing
ILLUSTRATOR - Produces sketches and pictures for books and magazines
EDUCAIIONIST - Teaches the theory and practical side of art
PAINTER - Applies paint on portraits and other objects
Multiple Choice (I 0nrarks)
1.A 2. B 3. B 4. C 5.D
6. B 7. C 8.B 9. Il 10.D
Structurecl Questions (20 mar.ks)
1. a) Fducationist teaches the theory and practical part of visual arts.
A
b) Curator collects artrvorks to bc placecl in a gallery.
c )
Plrotographer tul,.c: r isLral pit trrrr's rrsitrg a car-lterfl.
d) Illustrator r-nakes sketches arrd ltictLrres fbr books and magazines.
1 a) Ubuntu can be sho.nl,n by makin_u an artwork that shows Lrnity
b) Soti skills catr be seen by doing collaborative rvork r.vith other artists.
-) The concept is an exhibitior-r and it is set so as to market and sell artr,vorl<s
1. A scr-rlptor carves stone ol r,vood rvhile a irotter rnoulds clay.

5. a) Setting Lrp ar1 exhibit
b) Making use of rnedia coverage (television and ner.vspaper)
c) Making use of social n-redia
6. Copyright protection in art is protection that is placed on the work of art of artists by
clearly and fbm-rall_v making an ai'trvork as belcln-uin-e to the artist who created it.
5.3 Theatre
Match Making
DIRECTOR- Guides the flow of the act
SCRIPT WRITER - Writt-s and corrics Lr1.r u,itlr a pla.v
ACTOR - Plays a roie in an act or piav
IVIAKE-UP ARTIST - Appiies cosn'leiie s tu i.r-tL)r's
SET DESIGNER- Creates the environlrr-nt lirr a play on stage
r.c 2. D 3.B 4.C 5.C
6 B 1. C 8 Fl 9.8 10. B

I Arnakhosi Arts Centre, Jasen Mpepho L-ittle Theatre, Reps Theatre
2. A theatrical production is a play or ar1 act
3. a) Manager is responsible for runnrng. tu'ganising and supervising the
administration tbr thc r,vl-role theatrical production.
b) Costume rnaker is responsible fbr ciesigning and crcatrng costLrnres lor actors in a
play.
c) Make-r-rp arlist applies visual ell'ects on actors in the fbrrn of cosmetics to change
faciai zrppearances.
A
+- Comrnissioned work ir-r theatre is perfirnning a play or act for a paying audience.
5. a) Making use of print rledja b) Making use of social rnedia
c) Holding shows d) Making fliers
e) Issuing promotional items (caps, t-shirts)
6. A rendition in theatre is a different version of the same act or play.
l. NACZ promote and market theatre in Zimbabwe at festivals and exhibitions.
8. Copyright in theatrical productions is ownership of a per:formance in a play or an act.
5.4 Dance
Match Making
Choreographer - Creates and organises dance routines
Costume designer - Makes attire for use in dance
Instrument maker - Constructs musical instruments for use in dance
Dancer - Performs dance movements and sequences on stage
Set designer - Creates the environment for a dance on stage

1.C 2. D 3. C 4. B 5.D
6. C 7. C 8. D 9. C l0.A
1. a) Set designer is responsible for creating the appropriate scenery or environment
on stage for a dance performance.
b) Teacher teaches or educates on the theory and practical side ofdance.
2. Soft skills in dance include flexibility, empathy,resilience. communication skills,
etiquette, respect, emotional intelligence, a positive attitude, the ability to listen
3. Amakhosi Arts Center is found in Makokoba, Bulawayo.
Indigenous Instruments Contemporary Instruments

Amahlwayi Guitar
Hosho Tambourine
Hwamanda Cymbals
Zvikeyi Keyboard
Magavhu Drum set
Magagada Triangles
5. Organisations promoting and marketing dance in Zimbabwe:
a) CHIPAV/O promotes and markets dance through arts education development for
children.
b) The National Arts Council (NAC) also markets and promotes dance during
festivals and exhibitions such as Jikinya Dance Festival which is held yearly for
primary and secondary schools.
ft'l\
\^-./
Ah{SWERS FOR SECTION B
Test I
1. B 2.C 3. A 4,D 5.D
6.C 1. A 8.A 9.A 10. c
11. D t2. D 13. B 14. c 15. D
16. B 17. C 18. c 19. B 20. A
2t. D 22. C 23. A 24. D 25. D
26. B 27. A 28. A 29. C 30. A
31. C 32. C 33. B 34. B 35. B
36. A 37. B 38. B 39. A 40. c
4t. c 42. C 43. D 44. B 45. A
46. A 47. A 48. B 49. C. 50. D
TEST 2
I,A 2.8 3.C 4.A 5.B
6.A l. A 8.8 9.B 10. B
11. A t2. D 13. A 14. A 15. A
16. D 17. B 18. A 19. B 20. A
21. B 22. A 2i. B 24. D 25. D
26. D 21. A 28. B 29. C 30. B
31. C 32. B 33. I) 34. A 35. B
36. A 31. A 38. C 39. C 40. A
41. B 42. C 43B 44. D 45.D
46. C 41. A 4r. B 49, D 50. D
TEST 3
l. A 2A -1. ,1 4.A 5.A
6,C 1. B 8.D 9. D 10. B
11. B 12. A 13. D t4. c 15. D
16. c 17. c 18. A i9. c 20. c
21. D 22. D 23. D 24. B 25. D
26. A 21. B 28. A 29. A 30. D
31. A 32" C 33. B 34. C 35. A
36. D 31. C 38. D 39. A 40. A
41. B 42. B 43. A 44. A 45. C
46. C 41. B 48. A 49. A 50. A
TEST 4 I
1. C 2.D l.D 4.C 5.B

6,C 7. C 8.C 9.D 10. c
I
11. D t2. c 13. A t4. c 15. C I

I
16. C T7. A 18. B 19. A 20.A
21. C 22. C 23. A 24. B 25.8
26. A 27.8 28. B 29. A 30. D
31. A 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. A
36. A 37. C 38. C 39. B 40. B
41. A 42. D 43. C 44. A 4s. A
46. D 47. A 48. C 49. C 50. B
TEST 5
1.8 2.A 3.C 4.C 5.A
6.8 7. C 8.B 9.A 10. D
11. D t2. A 13. C 14. D 1s. B
16. D n.A 18. A 19. D 20.D
21. A 22. A 23. A 24. B 2s. c
26. B 21. A 28. C 29. C 30. c
31. C 32. D 33. A 34. C 35. A
36. B 31. A 38. A 39. C 40. B
41. C 42. C 43. C 44. B 4s. c
46. C 47. A 48. C 49. A 50. D
TEST 6
l. c 2.D 3,C 4.A s.c
6.A 1. A 8.C 9,B r0. A
1i. c 12. A 13. D 14. D 15. D
16. A 17. c 18. B 19. D 20. B
2t. B 22. D 23. C 24. A 25. C
26. C 21. C 28. A 29. ,\ 30. c
31. A 32. A JJ. L 34. A 35. B
36. B 31. A 38. C 39. D 40. D
41. B 42. A 43. B 44. D 45. C
46. C 47. C 48. C 49. B 50. B
Test 7
1. C 2.A 3. B 4.C 5.D
6.C 7. A 8.D 9, C 10. B
11. D 12. A 13. D t4. c 15. A
16. B 11. B 18. B 19. A 20. B
21. A 22. C 23. C 24. D 25. D
26. B 21. B 28. A 29.1) 30. B
31. C 32. C 33. D 34. B 35. C
36. C 31. A 38. A 39. C 40. B
41. D 42. C 43. C 44. A 45. C
46. A 47.. C 48. B 49. C s0. c
A
TEST 8
r. c 2.C 3.C 4,8 5.B
6.8 l. A 8.D 9.B 10. A
11. C t2. A 13. B 14. C 15. c
16. D i7. B 18. D 19. D 20.D
2r. A 22. C 23. B 24. C. 25. A
26. A 27. A 28. B 29. A 30. A
31. A 32. A 33. B 34. C 35. C
36. A 31.D 38. A 39. C 40. c
41. B 42. B 43. D 44. C 45. B
46. A 4,a. B 48. t 49. C 50. A
TEST 9
1. B 2.8 3.D 4.A 5.A
6.A t. c 8.8 9.8 10. B
11. C i2. B 1t c 14. B 15. B
16. A 17. B 18. C 19. D 20. A
21. A 22. A 2i. B 24. B 25 .8
26. A )l If 18. c 29. D 30. D
31. c :12. D 3i" c 34. D 35. A
36. B 37. C ,r8 u 39. D 40.,4
41. C. 42. D 43A 44. A 4-s. D
16. ts
l-i
+i.la,\
-15. ri +v ,1 :;0. B
I TEST 1O
+.A
i
r. c 2.B
-t. c
-;. t ,;, ,L\
6.8 r)
\ n
11 9.D 10. A
11. A 12. A 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. B 17. c 18. t) 19. C 20. B
2r. B 22. C 23. A 24. C 25. A
21.D 29"8 30. A
26. D -t5. A
31. B
a1
)L. D .1 J. A .14. D 35. C
36. D 37. B 38. A 39. A 40. D
4t. D 42. D "41. ['' 4,1. D 45. B
46. B 47. C :18. Ll 49. B 50. B
f"E.l.I
li^-/

Enjoy: Revisf Om

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enjoy: Revisf Om

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enjoy: Revisf Om

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enjoy Physical

Education amd Arts

S" r" Jonlrasi and R. [.eonard

2 Safefy and Health .......... 9

Study area 2: Sport

Study 3: Mass displays

VISUAL AND PERFORMING ARTS

1 History of arts and culture 86

3 Aesthetic values and appreciation r3l

4.1 Mtisic 149

5 Enterprisg skills.. ...'r.r..q.trrrt.r.r..r*e.r.rrtrritr*rrrtir.rtttr?i..!i.rr 168

Section A: Physical Education and Mass Displays 230

Topic 1 Human Body

The human body

1. Respiratory System for air transport

Fig Ll Respirutory s.l'stent

Alveoli (air sacs)

2. Digestive System for transport and food storage

Gall bladder Perncreas

Fig 1.3 Circulatory System

The circulatory system organs and functions

Absorption - absorption of digested food into the blood stream.

SECTION A: MULTIPLE CHOICE [10 Marks]

5. State one organ which is used in cach ot'rhe tbllowing processes;

Healthy living habits

Healthy living styles

tnutaknra/inkobc. sour rnilk nadoralamacimbi

inbantbaira, int b:iinbav i i ii i1t uilli;l-.re, r Lt] irr b t; i il magakar'anragai<a

Sleep and rest

Healthy living projects

Bleed ing ,,\ppi), iiliect pressLlre io the r,vor-rnd Lrsing a sterilc

5. ctrllisions betii,een . li blcedin-s contini.res seek rnedical attention.

Safety rules and precautions

Apparatus - of rnaterials or equipmcnt produced for a particular use.

A.Kne,-- cap B. Kree C'. Dislocation D. Fracture

Fig 3.1 Help positiott

The ABC resuscitation

Rescuing a drowning causality

lh* rr,r*t< tf .?',11 fl ;1 5t'.rc' i:'f'

Lqrttsfiy t€il:tEf lrnillt,*

Advantages of iearning diflerent swim strokes

Entry into water

Aquatic - relatirrg to r,vater.

SECTIO|TIA: N{UI,TIPLE CHOICE [10 Marks]

A. front crawl B. freestyle c. back stroke D. butterfly

Participation in long distance runs or races is beneflcial to athletes as it improves their

Running with obstacles

Fig 4.3 Long.jump

Approach Hop 5tBp Jump

Fig 1.4 Triplejuntp

Jumping for height

Fig 4.6 Pole vault

Fig 4.7 Javelin grip

Fig 1.8 Disuts grip

Fig 4.9 Shot put grip

Athletics - a group of sporting events that involve competitive mnning,

3. Give one tactic perfomed bv ninners. t1l

Topic 5 Invasion Games

l'--' -':**:* t'*r*'-' -'r

5 Enterprisg skills.. ...'r.r..q.trrrt.r.r..re.r.rrtrritrrrrtir.rtttr?i..!i.rr 168

l'--' -':**:* t'r'-' -'r